Home

MINOLTA PI4700E Use and Maintenance Manual

1. 2 Multi staple Finisher Hard Disk Drive in Copier Page Layout Printer Figure _ Mailbox Seting About Profile root diutil Prn55ppm dipjlrc OK Cancel Apply Help 1 Easy Set Allows you to call and use the settings stored in each tab Easy Set Name Allows you to call the settings stored in each tab Save Delete Used to save delete the settings of tabs When you touch the Save button to save the contents of a tab the Save Easy Set Name dialog box appears For details See page 5 22 When you touch Delete the stored set contents are de leted 2 Paper preview Machine preview Allows you to display change over the paper preview and machine preview Page Layout The layout of the printed data on a single page is dis played as an image This allows you to checkthe status for two sided printing for example See page 12 12 for the Page Layout list Printer Figure When the paper take up tray and the paper exit tray are set the paper take up tray and paper exit tray are dis played in green See page 12 15 for the Printer Figure list Tip If the set contents were changed the Save button will appear If the set contents are the Easy Name contents the Delete button will appear Pi4700e 5 21 Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux Te D o Ren Printer Driver for Linux Properties settings Functions o
2. Network Card TCP IP TCP IP E UNIX UNI Generally printer based Ipd is easiest to use on BSD UNIX systems that require an entry in the printcap file once the Network Card has its IP infor mation Some UNIX System V systems place restrictions on support of re mote Ipr lpd printers requiring that the host based Ipr lpd approach be used On many UNIX systems you can choose between host resident printing or print server resident printing The following shows the differences be tween the two types of printing Item Host resident Print server resident Banner Page User name and file name are e Host name printed on the printed on the banner page banner page Ipd Installation e Ipd must be installed on every Single installation of Ipd host computer used for print when print server is in ing stalled S Note The Network Card also operates with other host resident print super visor spooler programs that provide a print image to the printer over a TCP IP port The base TCP IP port number can be changed using Tel net MAP or a Web browser The actual port is always one higher than the base port number The status page shows the actual port number With both the host based and printer based Ipd you must assign IP pa rameters to the Network Card See 12 7 Setting Up IP Para
3. sm m 8 34 Novell Directory Services c ceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeetaes 8 8 Novell Distributed Print Services ssse 8 16 Number of registrations esssen e 12 9 N up ptinting viii Pepe dias 7 6 NWS etUp ice n endet ete ecce eie ice ug Been aes 8 38 13 4 Pi4700e OHP interleaving teta eet nettes 7 18 Operating environment ML E ES uc asses trm eise 5 1 MET ori de 6 1 Windows 2000 XP ccsccccesecceseseeceneeeeseaeeesceeeeseneeessaeeeseneeeesnseeess 2 8 Windows 95 98 Me essseseeeneeeeeeeenneeneen eren 2 1 Windows NT 4 0 eter nein e eee a eden 2 15 GUEN ico coe rot etc dr fee Se ett sets 12 42 Overlay tab 2 ete eat IE EE ain Reed 4 27 PageScope Light ACCESS pp TE 10 2 Jota rita dada tea danna 10 7 network Setting ivedik hile aia iets 3 23 Network tab aaia pon OUI NU gU p EE 10 18 Pa WO iii ea Added ples auti 10 2 Printer tab ied nes EU De RH PERENNI HERES 10 8 Scanner tab 23 to BRUT ete Eee abl nt pere e 10 17 system requirements eeesseseeeeen ennemi 10 1 System tab uisu 10 5 Paper tab ie eee deii Aceh 4 16 5 31 Password Chariging ou ERE EL IER BERE 12 63 PCL6 printer driver ifiStallitig eta ettet terea iret edt ette getto 2 1 Peer to Peer printing IPX SBPX aic RA LI MUI D Une 3 12 TOP Pcia e ete dei hee 3 5 Peer to Peer Printing Program
4. notice 44 Minolta PageScope Light for Di470 Microsoft Internet Explorer olx Ele Edt View Go Favorites Help a 5 On line Minolta Di470 MINOLTA Es 3m Ready Versionl0 System Job Printer Scanner Network Eun Device Status Details Online Preference Ready Save Setting Online Assistance Configuration Summary Copier Memory 32 Mbyte Admin Password Printer Memory 32 128 Mbyte EDH Tray 1 2 F nsgi Disa LOC ELCT Printer HDD Installed Mailbin Finisher Duplex Tora Tray 1 2 pee LOC LCT Output Mailbin Finisher EDH Installed Network Ethernet 10 100BaseT Scanner Installed e Ma Minolta PageScope Light Logo Clicking the logo jumps to the Website below www minolta com Status Display The current status of the Digital Copier is indicated by both icons and text The message Ready appears when the Digital Copier is operating nor mally VN Ready Error Caution Fatal Pi4700e 10 3 Chapter 10 PageScope Light o Y ee D E o lt PageScope Light 10 Screen configuration Tabs Use the tabs to select the category of items you want to display See the following sections of this document for detailed information about each tab Menus Use the menus to select information or setting items The menus that ap pear depend on the currently selected tab See the following sections of this document for d
5. seeeeesss 4 4 4 3 Functions common to various tabs eene 4 5 Functions of the Save Easy Set Name dialog box 4 6 44 A eaeIenes 4 7 Functions of the Detail of Paper Source dialog box 4 11 Functions of the Detail of Output Setting dialog box 4 13 4 5 Paper tab ueesssseesesseeeeeeee eene enne natnm n nnns nnne nnns tn nnns 4 16 Functions of the Edit Custom Paper or Custom Paper dialog o d pies T CHEER PUN 4 19 4 6 Quality tab eene ti 4 21 POLO Version ciere Pe ve icd te da 4 21 PS Version tm c ERR aree eec ete GR Dec 4 22 Functions of the Halftoning dialog box seeeeesesss 4 23 4 7 Job Management tab 4 8 X Overlay tab eseeeseeeseseeeeseeeee nennen nnne nnns nnnm nine sinas Functions of the Watermark dialog box seeeeeeese 4 28 4 9 PostScriptiaD conocimien 4 31 Functions of the Font Substitution Table dialog box 4 33 Functions of the Send Fonts As dialog box sss 4 34 Functions of the Advanced PostScript dialog box 4 35 4 10 Conflicts dialog box eeeeeeeeeeeernennennnnnn nnne 4 36 5 er Di for Linux 5 1 Installing the printer driver eere 5 1 Operating environment ssssseseeeeneenenenenennn 5 1 Installation 4
6. oyojojojo OIO OJ OJO x O O O O O O x Ot O O OJO O OJO O OJ OI OI AIx O x x OIOJ O O A x O x x x O O x G6 x O x x x O O x G6 x O x x x OJOJOJO A O JOJOJOJOJO x x x OJO x eEe AJOJO JOJOJO x ojojo O O O O OIO x O6 A O OJjJOJO x ojojo ojpojojo AJOJO OJOJOJOJO OJO JOJOJOJO x O ojojojo OJOJOJO OJOJO O OJOJO O OJOJOJO oOjojoOJO AJOJOJO OJOJO O OJOJO JO OJO x O ojojojo OJOJOJO OJOJO O OJOJO JO OJOJOJO OJOJOJO A x O x O x OjojoOJO O xJO x OJOJOJO OJOJO O OJOJOJO oyojo x x O O 2 3 4 Manual Feed Auto Tray1 C C oj Uncollated Collated Sorted Staple Off Long Edge Short Edge Center Off Long Edge Short Edge Corner Off Z Fold Half Folding O O x x AJOJO O O x Crease Punch Folding 1 sided 1up 2 sided 1up 2 sided 2 4 6 9 16up 1 sided 2 4 6 9 16up Scaling Booklet aounos jaded suondo oyioeds 1ejuud 23 o gt ou E Distribution Number Watermark OHP Interleaving Cover mode 12 1 Pi4700e Function combination matrix Windows ZL saydeyo xipueddy pow JAAD x O OJOJ O O O OlO JO OJO O O OO O x x O O O 101 0 OJ Ol O O x BuweeueudHO x x x x OlO O OlO x x
7. 1 Setup Paper Device Options Setting Job Management 5 r Easy Set Original Document Size Orientation Untitled Portrait Letter 8 1 2x 11 inch 3 Landscape Save J Copies Copy 1 999 Page Layout w Printer Figure Collate EE A Collated Sorting x Uncollated Profile root diutil Prn55ppm dipjlrc cx Cancel Apply Help Original Document Size Sets the Original Document Size e Paper size Copies Select the Original Document Size Available settings Letter Legal Executive A3 A4 A5 A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 JIS B6 Invoice Ledger 11 x 14 FLS1 FLS2 FLS3 FLS4 Specify the number of sets of prints to be made Enter the value either directly or by pressing A or V Setting range 1 to 999 sets Collate Use this function when making multiple sets of prints of the same document to spec ify whether or not to print one set at a time Uncollated Collated Sorting Select the sorting method Unsorted Sorted Orientation All of the pages are simply printed one after the other For example if you make five sets of prints each page is printed in sequence five copies at a time Prints are output one set at a time For example if you make five sets of prints of a 10 page document the prints will be output one set at a time Prints are not sorted Pri
8. 100BASE T A network data transfer standard established by the IEEE The network uses a twisted pair cable carrying 100 megabits per second Mbps application A software program that performs a particular function such as generat ing graphics or spreadsheets click To press and release a mouse button quickly Often used to select an ob ject SEE double click control panel A bank of indicators that show the current status of the printer Panel buttons that are located on the control panel make it possible to per form a variety of different operations dialog box A box that appears in order for the user to input information or settings re quired for the printer to operate double click Pressing a mouse button twice in quick succession while keeping the mouse in place Often used to open a dialog or enable a function SEE click display A visual output device of a computer resolution The fineness of detail of the output print expressed in the number of dots per inch dpi or dots per inch Higher resolution produces text and graph ics with greater sharpness and fineness of detail but results in a greater amount of data involved EtherTalk The AppleTalk protocol supporting Ethernet It allows Macintosh users to use the Ethernet Pi4700e 12 25 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix Preview Listing font A complete set of characters in a given typeface and style The size of
9. 3 Touch Scanner Adar Input memory 4 Touch the address to be changed Select the addr or Delete f Scanner Address Inputl 3 5 Confirmation screen will appear If you touch an item to be changed you will changed you will change the content Deleting registration touch panel of the digital copier 1 Press the Utility Key 2 Touch Job Image Scan Input Utility Rewari eae Meter users ERA Count 4 choice 4 Administr ator Mode y Toner He plenisher j 3 Touch Scanner Addr Input 9 30 Pi4700e Mailbox Destinations 9 4 Touch the address to be deleted Job Image Scan Memory Input Select the address to Input Change lt or Delete 5 Y Touch Delete Job Image Scan Memory Input ten to change he Delete Key to remove this from the director Scanner input Direct Name can Address 6 Touch Yes and touch Enter Job Image Scan Memory Input Do you really want to delete this address from the directory Y or N Scann er Address Input Pi4700e 9 31 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode o2 LE o 2 o lt Scanner Mode Mailbox Destinations Direct Input 1 Press the Scan Key 2 Set Original 3 Touch address 4 Touch Direct Scanner Mode Address DL riginal Scan Size Image Type Resolution 1004600dpi 600dp
10. 9 6 Howto input characters Input alphabet letters and symbols by touching keys on screen Input nu merals using numeric keys Display input i as E appear in the directory character Input capi o tal letters by D touching it a to highlight o lt 9 Back space key Switches screen for inputting symbols o E o o c c 99 O 0 9 40 Pi4700e System requirements 10 PageScope Light 10 10 1 System requirements The following items are required to use this utility Computer e Software Operating System Web Browser Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 2000 Internet Explorer 5 0 or higher Netscape Communicator 4 7 or higher Macintosh System 7 or higher Internet Explorer 4 5 or higher Netscape Navigator 4 or higher Solaris 2 5 1 2 6 7 2 7 Netscape Navigator 4 or higher Linux Netscape Navigator 4 or higher NIC Network Interface Card e Ethernet e TCP IP Protocol Digital Copier Pi4700e Printer Controller Note If Proxy Server of the Web browser is set to ON it may not be pos sible to access PageScope Light Pi4700e 10 1 Chapter 10 PageScope Light o Y ee D E o lt PageScope Light 10 Access 10 2 Access PageScope Light for Pi4700e can be accessed directly from a Web browser Start the Web browser 2 Inthe URL field enter the IP address of the printer controller as shown below http IP address o
11. Advanced PostScript 2 xl 1 2 PostScript language le vel E Data format ASOII data C Tagged binary communications protocol TBCP J Send CTRL D before job v Send CTRL D after job PostScript language level Cancel Help Selects PostScript language level Set Value Data format 2 PostScript level 2 3 PostScript level 3 Sets data format of PostScript e ASCII data e Tagged binary commu nications protocol TB CP Send CTRL D before job Send CTRL D after job Transmits the data in the ASCII format 7 bit When you select this format it takes more time for transmis sion but any I O channel such as the parallel port or the network port is available Transmits the data in the binary format 8 bit When the data is transmitted from the parallel port it can be transmitted faster than in the ASCII format This binary format is not available when you use the option for the archiving form or create the EPS file Transmits Ctrl D before job Transmits Ctrl D after job Pi4700e 4 35 Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings 4 Conflicts dialog box 4 10 Conflicts dialog box Your current selections have caused the following items to conflict with each other Item Current Selection Paper Source Trayl OHF Interleaving On To automatically resolve the conflicts as shown in the ta
12. Pi4700e 7 29 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions Using the settings function Dialog box for confirmation will appear Click the OK button The set ting data will then be read to the driver software Click the OK button The Print dialog box will appear Click the OK button The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon start Storing settings 1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the document Normally printing can be started by selecting Print from the File menu The Print dialog box will appear Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer and click the Properties button S Note Some Applications allow you to set Copies and Collate Sort in the Print dialog box To ensure proper printing operation however turn OFF these items of the application and make the necessary settings in each tab of the printer driver The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear Make settings in Setup Paper Quality Job Management and Post Script properties as necessary Click the Save button S Tip If setting is changed as in step 4 the Easy Set Name becomes Unti tled and the Save button will appear Pi4700e Using the settings function 7 6 The Save Easy Set Name dialog box will appear Input the Easy Set Name to be registered and click the OK button N x o 2 on o lt Save Easy Set
13. Using the utility software 8 Using NWSetup Installation creates a shortcut to NWSetup on the desktop You can launch the program by double clicking the shortcut icon S Note When setting up NDS directory server make sure you are logged in under the correct tree and context before launching the program Selecting a Print Server 1 Onthe Start menu point to Programs and then Nwsetup 2 On the submenu that appears click NWSETUP This displays a list of all Network Cards available on your network 35 NWSetup Version 1 20 Lx Select a unit by doubleclicking on it 3 Clickthe serial number of the Network Card you wantto configure and then click Select button 35 NWSetup Version 1 20 Lx Select a unit by doubleclicking on it 4 The Print Server Settings dialog box appears This screen lets you set up your version of Novell NetWare for the Network Card See No vell NetWare Settings on page 8 40 Pi4700e 8 39 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card o D E o lt Network Interface Card 8 Using the utility software Novell NetWare Settings This section diui the contents of the Print Server Settings dialog box Prini yer Sei s has two screens for setting and you must input settings for both to ale a Network Card for Novell NetWare Each screen lets you set up your version of Novell Netware for the Network Card including directory and bindery services Print Server
14. n 3 Click the Pr ies button This shows the properties dialog box This method allows you to set the number of copies and paper for each document Note that the settings made on the properties dialog box accessed through the application are valid only for that particular application Tip To set the Device Options Setting which need not be changed unless device is changed open it from the Printers window to set To show a properties dialog box other than Setup click the corre sponding tab located on the top part of the screen S Note The steps to display a properties dialog box may be different depend ing on the application Follow the correct procedure according to the application The procedure above is based on the application Word Pad Pi4700e 2 7 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Windows 2000 XP 2 2 Windows 2000 XP Operating Environment This section explains the required environment for the printer driver Before installing the printer driver check that your computer meets the fol lowing requirements If it doesn t the printer driver may not function prop erly Personal computer IBM PC or compatible with Pentium 200MHz or higher CPU Operating system Windows 2000 English or Windows XP English Memory 64MB or more I O interface Parallel Centronics interface Conforming to IEEE1284 Network 1
15. Chapter 12 Appendix UNIX Configuration 4 Use the tar command to load the software from the CD ROM At this time the system displays a list of Network Card files copied by tar al Run the installation script for your system in accordance with appropri ate procedure below Selecting Filters There are a number of options available when executing the script for each type of system When you run an installation script it first asks if the printer is a PostScript printer If you reply no to this question the install script uses an input filter infilter that performs CR LF translation for printing of ASCII files on a PCL printer If you reply yes the printcap file references psfilter which provides easy ASCII to PostScript conversion Normal PostScript format files are not affected Proprietary and public do main filters are also available for more versatile filtering capabilities Selecting a Filter Manually The Network Card comes with an input filter named psfilter and an output filter named psbanner for printing of PostScript banners To use these fil ters you must change the infilter if and outfilter of entries in etc printcap The following shows an example of how this is done printer name Print Server Card printer lp dev nic lt printer name N if usr nic psfilter of usr nic psbanner sd usr spool lt printer name gt Solaris Version 1 OSF1 1 Type the following to run the in
16. E Printer TEST P Identification 5 Identification Name TEST P QUALITY ice abies Bu Assignments Description iB Configuration El Notification Network Address H Locilion BHA Features Department BE See Also dario B Printer Status oK Cancel Help Pi4700e NetWare configuration 8 2 Click the Assignments button and then click the Add button to dis play the Select Object window Selected Objects mesra Current Context QUALITY Hame Filter Directory Context Filter Objects SAMPLE3 Q Directory Context eae E ERES ME 3 From the Objects list select a print queue you just created and then click the OK button to add the print queue to the Print Queues box in the Printer window 4 Click the OK button again E Printer TEST_P Assignments Identification Print Server Print Queues Queue Priority Configuration TEST Q QUALITY 1 Notification Features LT m See Also Add Delete Priority E Printer Status Default Print Queue TEST Q QUALITY Ed Ok Cancel Help Pi4700e 8 13 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card NetWare configuration Chapter 8 Network Interface Card Assigning a Print Server Object 1 Atthe directory tree double click a print server objec
17. In stallable Options Folding may be disabled when Staple or Punch is specified Check the settings made See Function combination matrix p 12 1 p 12 4 p 12 7 Folding is not effect ed Folding cannot be effected if the type of paper is Thick Paper or OHP Check the type of paper Unable to print image properly Machine memory space avail able is not sufficient Add machine memory to expand its space or simplify the image to reduce the amount of data handled Unable to specify the exit port No exit port can be specified if the paper size is A6 or B6 or OHP Interleaving is specified Check the setting of the paper size and OHP Interleaving Unable to properly feed prints out to the specified port Prints with paper size of B6 or smaller cannot be fed out if pa per exit port is Mailbin Check the paper type and paper size Paper is not fed from the specified paper Source Paper may not be fed from the specified paper source if that pa per source is loaded with paper of a different size and direction Load the paper source with pa per of the appropriate size and in the appropriate direction Watermark is not printed Watermark may not be printed in graphics applications No watermark can be printed in this case Unable to print exact ly as set The paper size paper direction and other settings made on the application takes
18. Network Interface Card o D E o lt Network Interface Card Using the utility software BOOTP Windows BOOTP is a Windows utility for assigning IP parameters to a Network Card When BOOTP is run on a computer a BOOTP request from a Net work Card causes IP parameters that match the MAC address of the Net work Card to be assigned to the Network Card Requirements Computer must have TCP IP installed and enabled e Network Card must be connected to the same subnetwork as the com puter running BOOTP Operating system Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 or 2000 S Note See Appendix A Installing and Setting Up Network Protocol Win dows and the applicable Windows documentation for information about installing TCP IP under Windows BOOTP does not operate properly on a computer running a DHCP server Using BOOTP 1 Onthe computer you want to use maneuver to the directory you want and copy Bootp 32 exe to it o Booip 32 exe is located in the Bootp folder on the CD ROM 2 Double click Bootpl32 exe 3 On the BOOTP dialog select Configure from the Admin menu BootP Parameters POP Subnet Mask Cancel Default Gateway Hardware Address 4 Input the following parameters IP address assigned to the Network Card Subnet mask Must match subnet of connected network Default gateway Router IP address of connected network Network Card MAC address Recorded on a lab
19. Quality Allows you to set general items related to graphics such as resolution halftone processing and image process ing method Also allows you to set TrueType fonts p 4 21 Device Options Setting Allows you to set option equipment installed on the ma chine p 4 2 Job Management Sets the copy track function Allows you to lock a printing job Also allows you to print the distribution number p 4 24 PostScript PS driver only Allows you to make detailed settings related to Post Script p 4 31 Allows you to save and read the contents of the settings ona Setup Paper Quality Job Management Device Options Setting or PostScript tab p 4 5 S Note Refer to Chapter 2 for the procedure for displaying Properties Note that different settings must be made for each driver The differences between each driver are indicated based on the PCL6 version driver for Windows 98 Details of OS dependent functions are not given Pi4700e 4 1 Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings Device Options Setting tab Device Options Setting tab This tab allows you to set the options installed on the machine Make sure you select the options correctly Otherwise some functions may be unus able or printing errors may occur The settings must match the machine configuration PCL6 version Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties x Gener
20. the TCP IP software into it 1 Type the following to navigate to the iic directory cd usr nic Next type the following command to run the installation script nicsinst Once the operating system is identified the script downloads the ap plicable files to the usr nic directory and displays questions to prompt you for the information it needs Type cd usr spool lp model standard usr nic portl interface S Note The default interface is generally sufficient for most PostScript PCL and ASCII files To use a printer specific interface other than the de fault interface script named standard youn must have a copy of that printer interface edited and installed in the usr nic directory Next you must edit the printer interface program you created in step 3 Type cd usr nic Use a text editor to open and edit the port1_interface file TER 0 and insert the following line ATA CAT f Search for the expression F above or below the section FILTER usr nic infilter usr nic lt nicfilter print server name 10001 Pi4700e 12 47 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix UNIX Configuration S Note print serve name must be the same as the one recorded in eic hosts Optional arguments inserted between the 10001 entry and be fore the trailing 0 are banner user_name request_ ID and files For details see the System V Release 4 System Adm
21. 12 31 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix 12 UNIX Configuration BSD System This section describes how to set up a remote printer on the host that sends jobs to the Network Card using panier resident Ipd This is accom plished by adding an entry to the host s ntcap file for each printer you use 1 Use an editor to open e 2 Make entries that name the Network Card name as the remote host and assign any name to the remote printer The following is an example of typical printcap entries printer name gt Example Iprprinter lp rm remote host N Host name from ei 5 rp remote printer name gt Any name Sd usr spool lpd printer name gt Specifies spool directory for where the system can spool data and perform other spool control This entry sends jobs spooled in usr spool Ipd printer name gt to the printer specified by printer name for printing by the Network Card specified by remote host Create the spooling directory mkdir usr spool lpd printer name 4 Use the lpr command to print something lpr P printer name file name Installation is complete if the file you specify prints correctly 12 32 Pi4700e UNIX Configuration 12 AIX Version 2 5 This section describes how to set up a remote printer on the host that sends jobs to the Network Card using the Network Card s Ipd 1 At the prompt type smit spooler
22. 854 Printer MLT 504486 w Destination Print Cover Page amp None Q Before Document Q Rfter Document Cover Page Paper Source v sane seimas 1 Print Cover Page Select whether to add the Cover Page or not or how the Cover Page is to be added None Does not add a Cover Page Before Document Adds the Cover Page at the beginning of the document After Document Adds the Cover Page at the end of the document 2 Cover Page Paper Source Unavailable The same paper source as that selected for Paper Source in Printer Specific Options is used Tip The functions of LaserWriter itself are being used See the documen tation provided for LaserWriter 6 20 Pi4700e Print options 6 Color Matching The Color Matching property sheet allows you to make settings for color data output 8 5 1 Printer MLT_504486 v Destination H Print Color Color Grayscale v Intent Auto selection Save Settings 1 Print Color Select gray scale or monochrome Color Grayscale Prints with gray scale Grayscale This function is not supported Black and White Prints in monochrome e ColorSync Color Match Prints with color reproduction data ing PostScript Color Match Prints with printer color characteristics ing 2 Intent Sets matching style Setting Values Auto selection Perceptual matching Relative colori metric Saturation Absolute colorimetric 3 Printe
23. Print options Mac OS X Each print option allows you to make specific settings as detailed below For a detailed description of each function see the corresponding refer ence page Print Option Available Settings Bererence Page Copies amp Pages Allows you to set the pages and the number of copies for printing Layout Allows you to set the printing layout Error Handling Allows you to set the handling of error informa tion Paper amp Quality Settings Allows your to make the basic settings for print p 6 34 ing Paper Source Settings Allows you to set the paper source p 6 35 Job Management Allows you to print out a page of descriptive data p 6 36 about each print job Finishing Settings Allows you to set finishing capabilities including p 6 37 sort staple punch and folding for those occa sions when you need to make multiple complete sets of the original document Summary Displays a list of the current print settings p 6 39 Note The Copies amp Pages Layout Output Options and Error Handling set tings are supported by Print Center Refer to the document corre sponding to the operating system being used No conflict warnings will appear indicating that incompatible functions are specified Pi4700e 6 33 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh Ko D o Ren Printer Driver for Macintosh Print options Paper
24. Though the screen format differs from one driver to another the given pro cedure may be used as reference for a driver other than the Windows 98 PCL6 If a different procedure is applicable to a specific driver that is included with the text S Tips Different procedures apply to start a property sheet depending on the application This chapter is concerned only with the procedure to be used with WordPad Convenient Functions A single application may offer two or more different procedures to fol low to open a property sheet If for example WordPad is used on Win dows 98 PCL6 driver the text that follows will instruct you to open a property sheet by opening the Print dialog box with Print in the File menu Another procedure that may be used is Open the Page Setup dialog box with Page Setup in the File menu and then click the Print er button to open the Page Setup dialog box before opening a property sheet To open the dialog box with Windows 2000 select Print from File menu and select Minolta Di470 PCL6 from Printer selection in General Pi4700e 7 1 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions Printing on both sides of the paper 7 2 Printing on both sides of the paper Overview This section explains how to print a multi page document which has been created with an application using both sides of a sheet It also shows the steps to be followed when stapling the two sided pages To use this func
25. lo The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon start S Note If a paper size that does not match the paper loaded in the machine is selected the machine will display a message that prompts you to load paper in the manual feed port entering standby state Convenient Functions cannot be selected if Custom Paper is selected in Out e To enlarge or reduce the image directly input the ling put r zoom ratio in Pi4700e 7 9 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions Printing pages with watermarks 7 6 Printing pages with watermarks Overview This section explains how to print pages with text e g Confidential Draft in the background Watermark print Procedure Depending on environment used Watermark may not be edited If regis tration is necessary perform registration first referring to Appendix A p 12 1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the document Normally printing can be started by selecting from the File menu 2 The Print dialog box will appear Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in F er and click the Properties Button Note Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate Sort in the Print dialog box To ensure proper printing operation however turn OFF these items of the application and make the necessary settings in each tab of the printer driver The Minolt
26. ojojojo OJOJOJO OJOJOJO OJOJO O OJOJOJO Tray1 2 3 4 odo Manual Feed Uncollated Collated Half Folding O O x x AJOJOJOJO x x x x O x x x x Long Edge Short Edge Long Edge Short Edge OHP Interleaving Cover mode 1 sided 1up 2 sided 1up 1 sided 2 4 6 9 16up 2 sided 2 4 6 9 16up aounos Jadeg suondo oijloeds 1ejuud ZL saydeyo xipueddy Pi4700e 12 4 Function combination matrix Macintosh Layout gt x oO ojo e o o ae gt o o oO E EE DN oa S 2 aia t E lo v v v a9 99 9 9 9 Il o o o o S8 Oj O ja o0 q Auto x x OJOJOJO O Tray1 2 3 4 xlojojolojojo o 9 LCC x jojojojojo jo 8 LCT x oJofofofofo Manual Feed O O OJ A O AJO Uncollated Oj JO O O OJOJ O Collated O JO O O OJOJ O Sorted Oj JO O O OjJOJO Staple Off OIO O OjJO O O Corner x OlIOJOJOJO O 2 Long Edge x O JO O JOJOJO 2 Short Edge x O O O JO O O 2 Center x OlIOJOJOJO O S Punch Off o olololololo o Long Edge x O JO JO JOJOJO Short Edge x O O O O O O a Folding Off Oj JO O O OjJOJ O Z Fold x OlIOJOJ OJO O Half Folding x x O x O x O Crease x O O Oj O O OHP Interleaving x O x x x O Cover mode x O O Oj O O 1 sided 1up ojo X 50 ae 2 sided 1up x Ox Xxx i E 1 sided 2 4
27. sese 3 8 Poor print quality 2 rm eee he ea T 11 6 Port N tmber sist eel an ia uu BERE 12 30 12 62 Setting itecto deter ded tor ete trt bee De eed de 12 31 Ieri T 12 30 12 62 PostScript printer driver installing ca ni E 2 1 PostScriptitab 5 irruentes eite 4 31 wi 12 12 Pi4700e 13 5 Chapter 13 Index op i 9 on t lt Index Print option Installable options nataan ana 6 15 Print options Background Printing e rar rn 6 19 Golot Matching ert DH UP MS 6 21 Conflicts dialog DOX eeseeeeeneeeneeennen enne 6 32 Cover Page iue ee da 6 20 Error Handling civic 6 23 Finishing Settings ici rene ceste 6 37 General Tus insasi a tuit ed eret tete t teeth 6 18 Job Management isinisisi eaae aiie 6 36 Layout 7 icone pet e a eoi n Heo Rosa 6 22 Page Attributes a sci ipe pee n Ere Red 6 16 Paper amp Quality Settings sse 6 34 Paper Source Settings sse 6 35 PostScript ODtio 8 oi oce c iii 6 17 Printer Specific Options ssseee 6 25 Saves File onu en b Edna iege 6 24 SUMMA nee bela e tee A ee aie o Ud atk 6 39 Print options Mac OS X sese 6 33 Print options Macintosh OS 7 8 9 sse 6 14 printcap i qpansebescsde ease ies 12 31 12 37 12 42 BSD UNIX ced tie a 12 32 DEGUETA tide pete cte eto e is 12 45 O EU 12
28. the machine will give a message prompting you to add paper to Tray1 Tray2 or the manual bypass port and enter into a standby state c 7 o 2 c o in _ o 2 _ o 2 a D c a 6 16 Pi4700e Print options 6 PostScript Options The PostScript Options property sheet allows you to make visual effect and font related settings LaserWriter 8 Page Setup p PostScript Options y A A A ir i Visual Effects 1 O Flip Horizontal O Flip Vertical O Invert Image Seri Image 6 Text 2 d Substitute Fonts Bd Smooth Text Bd Smooth Graphics O Precision Bitmap Alignment y O Unlimited Downloadable Fonts 1 Visual Effects Allows you to turn over the image or apply other visual effects Flip Horizontal Prints the image as if the original were viewed in a mir ror Flip Vertical Prints the image upside down from the original Invert Image Reverses tonal arrangements of the original producing a negative image 2 Image amp Text Allows you to set the output quality of text and graphics and make font related set tings Substitute Fonts Sets font substitution if a printer font is similar to or un der the same name as the screen font It is enabled at installation Smooth Text Smooths bitmapped fonts It is enabled at installation Smooth Graphics Smooths the graphic image It is enabled at installation e Precision Bitmap Align Adjusts bitmapped images to
29. 1 Cl joo n6 2 zu 5 600 x 600 s H 33 C On Save T ES 7 1 1 1 i Page Layout C Printer Figure Cancel Apply Help 1 Resolution Select the printing resolution Setting range 600 X 600 dpi 2 Smoothing Correct the edges of the printed image Available settings On Off S Note for 2 This function is used with a document whose contents are mainly text Using the function with a photo image could even dirty the produced image Pi4700e 4 21 Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings Quality tab PS version 1 2 3 4 5 Minolta Di550 Di470 Di450 PS Properties Resolution Refer to PCL6 version Smoothing Refer to PCL6 version Brightness Perform brightness adjustment Setting range 0 to100 Half Toning Specify the method of dithering to express gray Reversal Specify reversal Negative or Mirror or both Negative Reverses black and white Mirror Reverses left and right 4 22 Pi4700e Quality tab Functions of the Halftoning dialog box Halftoning x 1 r Halftoning M Use printer s settings L C Use settings below 450 Screen angle 43 0 1 Halftoning Select the method to set halftones User Printer s settings Use settings below 2 Screen frequency Uses the setting value of the printer when the halftone image is pri
30. 3 9 Adding a Printer Manually eee 3 10 Peer to Peer Printing with IPX SPX 3 12 Configuration Procedure seen 3 12 To install the printer esee 3 12 IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program Windows 3 14 Installing the IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program 3 14 LPR Printing eeeeeeeeee eene 3 17 Configuration Procedure Windows NT 4 0 esssss 3 17 Installing the printer Windows NT 4 0 eenneene 3 18 Configuration Procedure Windows 2000 XP 3 19 Installing the printer Windows 2000 XP sssssss 3 19 IPP Printing cerise rne e nna rarae eain e Cono O 3 21 Configuration Procedure sese 3 21 Installing the printer eeeeeeeeneeerneeeeerernnnn 3 21 Specifying network settings from PageScope Light 3 23 AC sr osse cur m DOR OH RES 3 23 Operations diii on areae ae tet 3 23 Logging In to the Admin Mode se 3 23 Network TaD maa nier eee er elut E 3 24 Pi4700e Contents 4 Prop 4 1 Description of each tab eese 4 1 4 2 Device Options Setting tab esee 4 2 Mailbox Setting dialog box when Mailbin Finisher is installed
31. Amber LED flashes at Flash memory self Checksum test failed Auto Abnormal short interval for 10 test in progress matically enters download seconds Amber LED mode and waits for flash goes out green LED memory refresh flashes continuously Green LED flashes After power up goes Broken connection between Abnormal slowly into printjob standby NetWare and file server after a short while Green LED and amber Power up sequence Factory initial default reset Abnormal LED flash alternately complete complete Power down and move jumper JP2 to OFF po sition See Resetting to Fac tory Initial Defaults 8 46 Pi4700e Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Check the points described below whenever you experience problems with Network Card operation General Troubleshooting Checklist Is the Digital Copier on line Check whether the Digital Copier is on line Nothing can be printed while the Digital Copier is off line Is the Digital Copier control panel display normal See the documentation that comes with the Digital Copier for informa tion about its control panel Is the Network Card LED status indicator normal Check the LED indicators for abnormalities See LED Status Indica tors p 8 46 for more information Is the network cable connected securely Check to make sure the network cable is securely connected to the 10 100BaseT port Try changing to another cable to find out if
32. Orientation Orientation Portrait 15 9 33 Portrait e RO USE PageLocation i H t H PageLocation H i Horiz DEE RES UNE Horiz Epa a Ascending A Descending 6 p A NU ERE M M PEN Te 94 3 8 7 1 4 4 1 n 4 1 1 4 4 1 4 A A A ol N up 16up Orienta N up 16up Orienta tion tion Portrait i 2 3 d Portrait PageLocation gn ss PageLocation Horiz 8 Horiz Ascending Descending N up 16up Orienta tion N up 16up Orienta tion Portrait 15 9 13 Portrait PageLocation CE EE PageLocation Vert 2 9 10 14 Vert Ascending TAE MMC NE Descending 3 y dg ire Watermark NOE ED i 12 14 Pi4700e Preview Listing Printer Figure Value Defined for Print Setting Item Screen Specifica tions Value Defined for Print Setting Item Screen Specifica tions No Installed Options Dup 2way Tray Dup LCC or Duplex Cabinet LCT Dup LCC Mailbin Finisher Dup LCC Single Staple Finisher or Multi Staple Finisher Dup LCC Folding Finisher Dup LCC Pi4700e 12 15 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix Preview Listing Setting Preview Value Defined for Print Setting Item Screen Specifi cations Value Defined for Print Setting Item Screen Specifi cations Duplex Booklet Short Edge Bind ing Long Edge Binding Booklet Left Bind ing
33. Original Scan Size Image Type Resolution 100 600dpi 2 Select TIFF or PDF Scanner Mode Select the desired scanning file format S eee Scanning File Format ti i ei Note If HDD was selected as the recipi ent this selection is not available 3 Touch Enter 9 36 Pi4700e Mailbox Destinations 9 Scanning with resolution changed Press the Clear Key 2 Enter the resolution 100 dpi to 600 dpi from the 10 Key Pad Scanner Mode Address 4 Original Scan Size Image Type Ji J Resolution 100 4600dpi 600dp The operation of Capturing Images by TWAIN TWAIN is the interface that allows images captured by a specific device to be input through a computer of a different platform To use TWAIN it is necessary that a TWAIN driver be installed in the PC The function described in this step is valid only for use in network environment Installing the TWAIN Driver Compatible operating systems Windows 98 Me 2000 XP S Note With Windows 2000 and XP be sure to log in with administrator privi leges 1 Open the location of the printer driver CD ROM in which the TWAIN driver is stored N Execute SETUP EXE Pi4700e 9 37 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode 9 Mailbox Destinations Capturing Images by TWAIN 1 Select scan by TWAIN from the application 2 Click the Scanner change button and then click the Add button In Scanner Address type the IP
34. PORT 1 Check these settings and make sure they are correct If they are cor rect type yes and press E Otherwise type no and press Er 5 Configure a virtual printer using lt printer name gt as the physical de vice For lt printer name gt use the same printer name that you speci fied when installing the printer 6 Use the following command to shut down qdaemon stopsrc s qdaemon Pi4700e 12 51 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix UNIX Configuration 7 Edit usr ly to change the special file for device printer name from dev lt printer name gt to dev nic lt prir 1e gt gt Use the following command to restart the daemon Startsrc s daemon After this the installation script creates a named pipe and starts up a print daemon based on the printer name and Network Card information you supplied The AIX System Management Interface Tool SMIT does not accept the named pipe as a printer devices so the install script also creates a null character device in de gt Virtual Printer Commands Virtual printers can be added using SMIT or by using the mkvirprt com mand The device name printer name is entered for confirmation purpos es During this process you also select a particular printer type for the new printer which inherits the set of predefined attributes for that printer type The set of attributes is sufficient for most cases but settings can be changed using SMIT or the c
35. Pi4700e E mail Destinations 3 Touch Scanner Addr Input 4 Touch the key to be registered 5 Typeinthe name that will appear on the key for example NANCY Touch Next 6 Touch E mail f Touch Next memory F Job Memory aa LE PUT Job Image Scan Memory Input the address to Input Change ete Scanner Address rnputl 3 il E EI d nnnm Job Image Scan Memory Input Pi4700e 9 15 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode o2 LE o 2 o lt Scanner Mode E mail Destinations 8 Type in the destination S Note Type in the destination name that was entered when the E mail desti nation was specified with Page Scope Light In the screen shown at the right the name Nancy is en 1 E ES d E O a abba TEE a tered for the example with the E mail address nancy O foo bar in the screen shown on page 9 12 Or type in the E mail adaress directly without using PageScope Light 9 Touch Enter Checking changing registration touch panel of the digital copier 1 Press the Utility Key N Touch Job Image Scan Input 3 Touch Scanner Addr Input Utility Rewari wae Meter user s ESC L Count 4 Choice 4 Administr ator Mode y Toner He plenisher 9 16 Pi4700e E mail Destinations 4 Touch the address to be changed
36. QQ N e da Network Card On the menu select Client Servi 5 On the next menu select Add a Remot On the window that appears select Manag On the next menu select Remote Printer Q gt Printers Queue 6 Change the values on the window that appears to the settings for the The values that first appear on the window are initial defaults You must replace the short and long form filter values with the values shown below Item Example Input Data Description Name of queue to add printi Local printer name queue Destination Host printfast Network Card IP address Short Form Filter usr lpd bsdshort Required value Long Form Filter usr lpd bsdlong Required value Name of remote printer queue PORT1 Network Card queue You can use any name you want here Queue Name of device to add configuration Local queue name 7 After inputting all the values you want press to complete the Pi4700e 12 33 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix UNIX Configuration AIX 4 0 Use the following procedure to install a Network Card on an AIX 4 0 sys tem 1 on O 0 A WO M 9 Run SMIT Printer Select Print Spooling Select Add a Print Queue Select Remote Use Standard Processing Assign the queue name Use the Network Card host address for Remote System Assign an appropriate name like PORT1 for the qu
37. Save Edit Custom zta 4 Output Paper Size Jeh Uncollated 2 AR z I Fitto Paper Collated H 1 2x11in E paco 5 A pooo i I Unsoted 7 100 he 125400 eS sl l Orientation gt h Portrait 6 q C Landscape Page Layout C Printer Figure Cancel Aly Help 1 Original Document Size Sets the original size Papersize Select the original size Available settings Letter Legal Executive A3 A4 A5 A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 JIS B6 Invoice 11 X 17 11 X 14 FLS1 FLS2 FLS3 FLS4 Special sizes Edit Custom Used to set a special size For details see page 4 19 2 Output Paper Size Sets the size of the paper on which prints are to be made Output Paper Size Activates the specification of the size of printing paper Displayed only with the PS driver Paper size Select the size of the printing paper Available settings Letter Legal Executive A3 A4 A5 A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 JIS B6 Invoice 11 X 17 11 X 14 FLS2 FLS3 FLS4 Special size Fit to Paper The prints are output at a zoom ratio that matches the size of the printing paper Scaling Specify the print zoom ratio Setting range 25 to 400 3 Copies Specify the number of sets of prints to be made Enter the value either directly or by pressing A or V Setting range 1 to 999 sets 4 16 Pi4700e Paper tab 4 4 5 6 S S S S Collate Use this function when making multiple sets
38. Site ade Alen peint 5 2 5 2 Printer setting with X window System 5 4 Making general settings before using the printer 5 4 Redhat Linux emotion Aa aaa Traini 5 4 TUDO Lia E nt qure hien 5 7 Open Inu etie aerei bed ou HAE 5 10 SUSE LINUX o ettet ree Dr adi 5 12 How to display Printer Utility dialog box eeeee 5 15 AP CO MM sse tete eta needa es Bate dat 5 16 Printing method dilpr command eee 5 16 didialog command eeseeeeeenen meme 5 17 Pi4700e iii Contents 5 3 Properties settings esses enne nnn 5 18 Description of each tab sssssm m 5 18 Device Options Setting tab sse 5 19 Functions that are common to various tabs 5 21 Setu p tab zc i i cerent prece tt cene ri t ee eos 5 23 Paper tab e ecce e URL ee wie 5 31 Job Management tab essssseeeemem 5 33 Conflicts dialog DOX niesen neret cen en eee eei eS 5 35 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 1 Installing the printer driver eeeeeeeereeeenrnnene 6 1 Operating environment 6 1 Installation Macintosh OS 7 8 9 sese 6 1 Installation Mac OS X ssssseeeeeenennenn 6 9 6 2 Print options eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneee nennen nennen nnne 6 14 P
39. Sort in the Print dialog box To ensure proper printing operation however turn OFF these items of the application and make the necessary settings in each tab of the printer driver The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear Make sure that all setting items such as Original Document Size are correctly set on the Paper tab 7 18 Pi4700e Printing on OHP transparencies 7 5 Click the Setup tab and select the paper source for OHP transparen cies in Paper Source p Note Paper source for OHP film is Manual Feed only N x 9 12 on o lt 6 Click the Detail of Paper Source Detail of Paper Source dialog box will appear 7 Apply check mark to OHP Interleaving Convenient Functions 8 Selectthe with Image box if you want the OHP data printed on the in terleaves 9 Selectthe paper source for interleaves in Interleaving Paper Source S Note The same paper source as that used for OHP transparencies cannot be specified as paper source for interleaves 10 Click the OK button 11 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button 12 The Print dialog box will reappear Click the OK button 13 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon start Pi4700e 7 19 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions Adding a cover to each copy set 7 11 Adding a cover to each copy set Overview This section explains how to add a front cover and or a back c
40. The Directory Information Base DIB is used to store information about servers and services users printers gateways etc It is a distributed da tabase that allows access to data anywhere on the network regardless of where it is stored Pre 4 x NetWare versions provide the same data as DIB but the data is stored in the NetWare bindery 8 8 Pi4700e NetWare configuration 8 DIB is designed for more flexible access more specific security and be cause it is distributed a design that allows partitioning Unlike bindery s flat file structure the DIB directory uses an object oriented structure en abling network oriented access as opposed to bindery s server oriented access The bindery emulation mode provides the directory with downward com patibility with NetWare bindery This section explains operation of the print server with a 4 x NetWare system in bindery emulation mode Once bind ery emulation is enabled NDS receives bindery requests and responds just as if a bindery existed on the NetWare server being accessed It should be noted here that information obtained from a bindery query may not be stored on the server because the directory is a partitioned and distributed database Though a NetWare 4 x server is not operating from a bindery applications making bindery requests do not know the differ ence NWADMIN can be used to configure the printer in NDS Before printing you must use the procedures below to con
41. User Name The user name set in the printer driver is displayed as the job user name on the ma chine s touch panel Setting range 4 numbers max Nos Note If nothing is entered the setting is turned off Ko D o Ren Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 36 Pi4700e Print options Finishing Settings The Finishing Settings property sheet allows you to set finishing capa bilities including sort staple punch and folding for those occasions when you need to make multiple complete sets of the original document 1 2 3 4 Printer MLT_000031 Bi Presets Standard H3 Finishing Settings 13 OutputBins Auto a 1 Staple Off 3 2 Punch Off E 3 Folding Off 5 a OutputBins lt only when Mailbin Finisher is mounted gt Select the machine exit tray into which the prints are to be fed Available options are limited by the type of finishing option configured with the ma chine Setting range Auto Bin1 to Bin5 Staple lt only when Multi staple Finisher Single staple Finisher Mailbin Finisher or Folding finisher is mounted gt Select whether to staple each copy set of the document Off Does not staple the printed pages Corner Staples together each copy set at its corner Short Edge only when Multi staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is mounted Stapled along the short edge of the docu ment Long Edge only when Multi s
42. al 9 32 Pi4700e Mailbox Destinations 9 5 Select E mail HDD or FTP touch Scan Address and then in put the address Next press Enter If there are two or more addresses proceed to the next Direct Input page 2 5 and input the next ad dress Scan Address 1 6 Press the Start Key S Note For the destination FTP server address input the address whose set tings you configured with PageScope Light Scanning double sided original Double sided original can be scanned when Duplexing Document Feeder is attached 1 Touch Original Scanner Mode Address ee Scan Size Image Type Resolution 100 4600dpi 2 Touch Double Sided Scanner Mode N d a u oad g d e Original MM LLL LA Single E i Original F Doubie Sided Pi4700e 9 33 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode Chapter 9 Scanner Mode Mailbox Destinations 3 Touch Margin and select the file margin position of the original 4 Touch Enter 5 Touch Original Direction and se lect the direction of the original 6 Touch Enter f Touch Enter Scanning with size specified 1 Touch Scan Size Scanner Mode Top or Side Margin Scanner Mode Ndicate orientation Of thi original on the glass by selecting one of the ch
43. amp Quality Settings The Paper amp Quality Settings property sheet allows your to make the ba sic settings for printing 1 2 4 Printer MLT_000031 i Presets Standard B Paper amp Quality Set 15 Orientation Portrait m 1 Collate Collated 33 2 Sorting Unsorted H3 T 3 Smoothing Off Ex 4 Orientation Select the orientation of the image Setting values Portrait Landscape Collate Select whether printed pages are to be sorted into copy sets when printing more than one copy of the same document Collated Pages into copy sets For instance when printing 5 sets of a document consisting of 10 pages printed pag es are sorted by copy i e 5 sets of a 10 page docu ment are output Uncollated Prints the specified number of pages one page ata time For instance when printing 5 sets of a document pages are printed five times one page at a time Sorting Select the sorting method Unsorted Prints are not sorted Sorted Prints are sorted Smoothing Correct the edges of the printed image Setting values Off On 6 34 Pi4700e Print options 6 Paper Source Settings The Paper Source Settings property sheet set the paper source 1 Printer Presets MLT_000031 Standard 23 Paper Source Settin 1 Paper Source Auto 1 Duplex Print Off r 2 OHP Interleaving Off laa 3 Front Cove
44. and Ir ving Paper Source You can set Manual Feed only using Paper Sou OHP interleaving and two sided printing cannot be set simultaneously S Tip for 2 The OHP film tray is displayed in green on the Printer Figure Pi4700e Setup tab Functions of the Detail of Output Setting dialog box Settings can be made for finishing functions including stapling hole punching and folding 1 2 3 Detail Of Output Setting 2 x Staple Folding i 3 off S Off x Punch Off Punch Holes 3 7 Holes Staple when Mailbin Finisher Single staple Finisher Multi staple Finisher or Fold ing Finisher is installed This function allows you to staple one set of printed documents at a time Off Corner staple Long Edge Short edge Center Printed documents are not stapled Printed documents are stapled at their corners when Multi staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is in stalled gt The documents are stapled along the long edge lt when Multi staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is in stalled gt The documents are stapled along the short edge lt when Folding Finisher is installed gt The documents are stapled at the center Punch lt when Mailbin Finisher Multi staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is installed gt This function allows you to punch holes in the printed document Off Short Edge Long Edge Punch Holes Inch area only The document is n
45. characters is specified in points 1 72 inches Typeface is the distinctive design of types such as gothic while style is an ornament such as italic halftone Gradations of tones expressed by means of varying densities of dots hard disk drive A device that is contained in a computer and peripheral equipment and used to save data and files In the printer controller it is used to save fonts downloaded from the com puter Its data is retained even when the main power is turned OFF Stores the Scan to HDD data icon A graphic image on the screen that represents an element interface A standard that governs the ways for two different systems to exchange information It specifies the format of data to be transmitted communica tions protocols and physical configurations for connection IPX SPX The communications protocols used by NetWare landscape paper orientation A horizontal print orientation in which printing is oriented so that the long edges of a sheet of paper are on top and bottom local printer The printer that is directly connected to the computer being used A printer connected to a network is called the remote printer memory The place in a computer where data can be stored and retrieved The amount of data stored is expressed in bytes Memory can either be RAM or ROM Generally the data stored in RAM is lost when power is turned OFF while that in ROM is retained even when power is turned OFF but c
46. or Delete 5 Confirmation screen will appear If you touch an item to be changed you will change the content Registering LDAP Search Criteria S Note PageScope Light settings must be configured in order to perform an LDAP search 1 Press the Scan Key 2 Touch Address 3 Touch LDAPsearch Scanner Mode Address LL a Driginal Scan Size Image Type E Eco Resolution 100 600dpi 600dp Pi4700e 9 17 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode o2 LE 3 2 o Ren Scanner Mode E mail Destinations 4 o N Touch the item you want to search for Type the search text and then touch Enter Change the search condition as re quired touch Enter and then touch LDAPsearch Touch Addr Input select the ad dress you want to register Scanner Mode Item Full Name E mail Last Name First Name L Scanner Mode Scanner Mode Select a condition to search f Condition to Search 9 18 Pi4700e E mail Destinations Q 8 Select the on one touch button where you want to register the crite ria 9 Type the criteria name and then touch Enter Scanner Mode Input the name as you Wish it to E appear in the directory Deleting registration touch panel of the digital copier 1 Press the Utility Key 2 Touch Job
47. the message Password Error will appear and you might not be able to exit from the function Pi4700e 4 25 Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings Job Management tab S Notes for 3 When using this function in combination with the cover page function if you set printing of the cover page to No using the cover page func tion and set serial number printing to Yes a distribution number will be printed on the cover page The orientation of the screen sometimes fails to match the orientation of the distribution number S Tip for 3 When the distribution number reaches 999 the next number returns to 000 4 26 Pi4700e Overlay tab 4 4 8 Overlay tab This tab is only displayed with the PCL driver Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties x General l Details Color Management Sharing Setup Paper Quality Device Options Setting Job Management Overlay r Easy Set Watermark s NONE lt i Save Ja st page tin 1 Edit Watermark MAS T r Page Layout C Printer Figure 1 Watermark Prints a specific word in the background as a watermark Text Select the word to be entered as the watermark from the list Available settings NONE CONFIDENTIAL COPY DO NOT COPY DRAFT FINAL PROOF TOP SECRET or a word set by the user 1st Page Only Select whether to insert a watermark on only the first page or on all
48. 10 Select the paper source for the front back cover under Cover Paper Source S Note Paper sources for cover page are Manual Feed Tray 1 2 3 4 LCC and LCT 11 Click the OK button 12 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button 13 The Print dialog box will reappear Click the OK button 14 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon start Pi4700e 7 21 N _ D n Q lt Oo Convenient Functions Chapter 7 Convenient Functions 7 Using the lock job print PC confidential function 7 12 Using the lock job print PC confidential function Overview Lock Job allows you to keep a particular document confidential so that document can be printed only after a password is entered on the machine Job List input F Stat us Orig Copy TObg Fine Device e 9 I Tock Printer Procedure on the printer driver side 1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the document Normally printing can be started by selecting Print from the File menu The Print dialog box will appear Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer and click the Properties button Ser Note Some Applications allow you to set Copies and Collate Sort in the Print dialog box To ensure proper printing operation however turn OFF these items of the application and make the necessary settings in each tab of the print
49. 12 Appendix Setting Up IP Parameters printfast ht ether ha 00206BAABBCC ip 192 9 200 200 sm 255 255 255 0 N gw 192 9 200 254 Under SCO UNIX add the following line to activate the BOOTP dae mon vm rfc1048 Start up the BOOTP daemon bootpd s Power up the Digital Copier The Digital Copier initializes recognizes the IP address and stores it in non volatile memory After the Digital Copier is fully started power it down again Power up the Digital Copier again and use the following command to ping the Network Card ping IP address assigned to Network Card Example IP Address 192 9 200 200 ping 192 9 200 200 The following response is returned when the IP address is assigned 192 9 200 200 is alive After assignment is complete delete the lines you added to otptasb You can also stop the BOOTP daemon et c L S Note When the Network Card host name is already registered in the hosts file etc hosts you can use the host name in place of the IP address You cannot use BOOTP to assign an IP adaress if the Network Card has already been assigned an IP address by ATIP 12 58 Pi4700e Setting Up IP Parameters 12 Assigning IP Addresses Using the RARP Daemon For UNIX Power down the Digital Copier On a computer associated with the same network segment as the Dig ital Copier log on as root Edit etc ethers by adding the Network Card M
50. 14 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon start 7 28 Pi4700e Using the settings function 7 7 14 Using the settings function N x 9 b on o lt Overview Frequently used groupings of print settings can be stored and called up as necessary for application in actual print jobs Procedure Operations with Easy Set are storing calling up and deleting Depending on environment used number of registrations will be different Refer to Appendix A p 12 9 for details Convenient Functions Using the settings stored for a current print job 1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the document Normally printing can be started by selecting Print from the File menu 2 The Print dialog box will appear Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer and click the Properties button S Note Some Applications allow you to set Copies and Collate Sort in the Print dialog box To ensure proper printing operation however turn OFF these items of the application and make the necessary settings in each tab of the printer driver 3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 dialog box will appear 4 Click the down arrow W of Easy Set Name and from subsequent menu select the Title name to be used Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties Quality Device General Details Easy Set lz WaterFINAL Default 4upHa BookDupl
51. 46 E RP 12 40 SCO UNIX sete Et 12 38 SO0latis E T ONAA 12 43 Printer driver displaying a properties dialog box 2 6 2 13 2 21 general settings iriso n eae eagan ds 2 6 2 13 2 20 Printer setting with X window system Open LINUX EE AEE T 5 10 Redhat Lin iii 5 4 SUSE a Mi nescitis 5 12 Turbo Linux acid rado 5 7 printtool 2 5 5 nee itera eO UR 12 39 Properties settings account code EE AE E EE a 4 25 5 33 advanced PostScript 4 35 brighthess iio sata iii feret 4 22 collate enn feste cbe ie 4 17 5 31 compress bitmap images ococoocccnnncccnnonnconancnnnnn cnn nan nnn raro nn nananannnos 4 31 GCOPIOS iii lid Dg 4 16 5 31 13 6 Pi4700e 13 COVER page 1 ete Su ae ae ae custom paper device OPtiONS sious aprenan aa iaeaea ea aaa eSEE ann 4 3 5 19 CIStrIDULION E 4 25 5 33 Hol pce A 5 23 duplex booklet viii aid 4 8 easy set folding vertical Aaa i t epos tont substitution 3 tege de eie aor 4 33 A aea pie enaa half toning job owner lock OD acia cid mailbox setting N p des OHP interleaving orientation 4 17 5 31 original document size 4 16 5 31 output Paper SIZE ica a 4 16 output setting paper source PostScript header sepe gden hedge HUE 4 31 PostScript Output vit cin aia oie rt rere pete leaks 4 31 print PostScript error information sese 4 31 punch ziel
52. 6 9 16up O O x x x x 2 sided 2 4 6 9 16up xlo x x x Scale OJO x x x x The combination is possible The combination is impossible The settings made are rejected Cannot be used if the LCT rejects loading of paper in the lengthwise direction Does not function if special paper setting has been made Pi4700e 12 5 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix Function combination matrix Macintosh S Note Some combinations may not function properly depending on the size and direction of the paper Tip 1Side and 2Side of Layout mean the following 1Side Duplex Print Off 2Side Duplex Print 2 Short Edge or Long Edge 12 6 Pi4700e Function combination matrix Linux 12 3 Function combination matrix Linux esee cL Jerdeyo xipueddy O O DBuipjo4 HeH PIo3 Z Folding HO O x x x eBp3 uous x O O x x o6p3 6uo1 x x O OJOJ O Punch HO O x x O x x O Jejue2 x O xJOJO x x x Finishing eBp3 uous x x Oj O x OjJO x x o6p3 6uo1 X xX x O Oj O OJ O x x Staple 1 U109 x x x x OJOJO OJO JO O HO O x x x x OJO OJOJO JOJO pelos x OJOJO JO OJOJO JO OJOJOJO pajelo9 x JOJO x x x x O O JO JO JOJOJO paye jooun ojojojo pee enuey x O JOJOJO O OJO O O O
53. Access Number 8 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button 9 The print dialog box will reappear Click the OK button 10 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon start 7 16 Pi4700e Using the copy track function 7 S Note When Account Code is used printing may not take place unless the account number has been correctly set N x 9 b on oO lt To clear the Account Code function type any number in the Access Number box If no number is typed in the Access Number box the message Access Number Error will appear and you might not be able to exit from the function Convenient Functions Pi4700e 7 17 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions Printing on OHP transparencies 7 10 Printing on OHP transparencies Overview This section explains how to insert a sheet of paper interleaf between sheets of OHP transparencies when printing on sheets of OHP transpar encies This interleaf may be left blank or have the same data printed on it as the OHP transparencies Print data Printout Procedure Start printing from the application which has been used to create the document Normally printing can be started by selecting Print from the File menu The Print dialog box will appear Make sure that Minolta Di470 is displayed for Name in Printer and click the Pr ies button Note Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate
54. Atthe prompt type lpsystem t bsd Network Card host name recorded in etc hosts Some systems require input of the remote host IP address instead of the remote host name 2 Type the following command lpadmin p local printer name s Network Card host name remote queue name gt 12 38 Pi4700e UNIX Configuration 12 S Note Do not input a space after the remote host name Enable local printer name gt Accept local printer name Linux With Red Hat Print System Manager you can configure the printer on a graphical setup screen See Configuring the Printer Using the printtool Command for more information If your system does not have Red Hat Print System Manager installed you can configure the printer by editing the contents of the etc printcap file See Configuring the Printer by Editing the printcap File for more information Configuring the Printer Using the printtool Command 1 2 8 9 Start x terminal At the command prompt enter the printtool command This causes the Red Hat Print System Manager window to appear Click the Add button This causes the Add Printer Entry window to appear Choose Remote Unix Ipd Queue and click OK This causes the Edit Remote Unix Queue Entry window to appear Specify the printer name Select or add the spool directory typically usr spool lpd lt printer name In the Remote Host field specify the IP address of the Print
55. Firmware Update Local LF WARNING Admin Password File Name Browse Log in Send new Firmware to Printer Send Restore Factory Default Printer Controller FW Restore el TE Intemet zone A HDD Format Section HDD Format Use this section to format the hard disk drive Clicking the For mat button displays a confirmation screen Click Yes to format the hard disk Firmware Update Section File Name Send new Firmware to Printer Type in the full path to the firmware definition file you want to download to the printer controller You can also click the Browse button to display a dialog box for selecting the file Click the Send button to download the firmware to the printer controller Restore Factory Default Section Printer Controller FW Use this section to return printer controller settings to their initial factory defaults Clicking the Restore button displays a confir mation screen Click the Yes button to restore the initial factory default settings 10 15 10 Chapter 10 PageScope Light 1 0 Printer tab Local Interface This screen appears when you click the Local I F menu on the Printer tab Use this screen to view and configure local interface information Ele Edt View Go Favoies Help a On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network Seumas IEEE1284 AAA Timeout 15 sec 5 300 Test Print VO Buffer Size 32K byte Font Info PCL PS Bi Directional On Print
56. Image Scan Input 2 3 Touch Scanner Addr Input Utility Job Image Scan Input j eunt URS CE Administr Mode Toner He plenisher j Job Image Scan Memory Input Select H mathod for inputting hemor Pi4700e 9 19 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode 9 E mail Destinations 4 1 Touch the address to be deleted einige Select thi or Delete 5 Touch Delete Job Image Scan Memory Input o2 LE o 2 o lt SS the Delete Key to remove this address from the directory t Scan Address nancy foo bar Scanner Mode 6 Touch Yes and touch Enter Job Image Scan Memory Input Do you really want to delete this address from the directory Y or N Scanner Address Input 9 20 Pi4700e File destinations 9 4 File destinations S Note When registering a destination it must first be entered in PageScope Light and then registered from the touch panel of the digital copier This screen appears when you click the File Destinations sub menu un der the Destination menu It lists the File Destinations that are currently registered Ele Edt view Favorites Tools Help On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network Destinations File Destination List Et on E mail Destinations File Destinations Meg fle Bp 192 168 10 11 Bp pub SMTP FTP Configuration y External O
57. JIS B4 JIS B5 FLS1 FLS2 FLS3 and FLS4 Note for 5 Always set Collated in General screen to OFF eee Note for 6 When sorting is used set Tip for 6 If Elevator Tray is selected when the machine is equipped with a Multi staple Finisher Single staple Finisher or Mailbin Finisher sets or stacks will be stacked in a sawtooth manner so that each is easy to identify If Folding Finisher is mounted or if none of the finishing options is mounted sets or stacks will be stacked in a crisscross manner Pi4700e 6 27 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh Ko D o Ren Printer Driver for Macintosh Print options Following are the minimum requirements for enabling crisscross sort ing 8 9 10 Stacks of paper of the same size loaded in both lengthwise and crosswise direction Staple Punch or Front Cover Page is not set 8 5 1 Printer Destination p Printer Specific Options y reo Smoothing Off y Staple _on__ v Punch of v Folding Off y OHP Interleaving Front Cover Page Save Settings Staple only when Multi staple Finisher Single staple Finisher Mailbin Finisher or Folding finisher is mounted Select whether to staple each copy set of the document Off Does not staple the printed pages Corner Staples together each copy set at its corner Short Edge only when Multi staple Finisher o
58. Pi4700e Chapter 3 Network Settings 3 Peer to Peer Printing with TCP IP Installing the printer Windows 95 98 Me 1 Onthes t menu point to S igs and then click Printers N Double click Add Printer and install the printer Make the new printer the default printer See 2 Installing the Printer Driver p 2 1 for details about how to in stall it 3 Right click the new printer icon and select Pr ies from the menu 4 Display the Details tab e ES o 2 o Ren 5 Click the Print to the following port box and then select the port add ed by the IP Peer to Peer Printing Program 6 Click the Apt ly button of the Properties dialog box f Display the General tab and print a test page 8 If the test prints normally complete the procedure by clicking OK to close the Properties dialog box Network Settings After you finish installing a printer with the above procedure you can use it just as you would any standard local printer The printer can also be used as a network printer by other Windows computers on your network whose Windows 95 98 Me systems are configured the same way as de scribed above 3 6 Pi4700e Peer to Peer Printing with TCP IP 3 Configuration Procedure Windows NT 4 0 Install TCP IP under Windows NT 4 0 Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for more information 2 Assign the IP parameters See 3 2 Specifying the IP Address From the Pri
59. PostScript printer driver and the PPD file for the Digital Copi er O Seethe documentation that comes with the Digital Copier for infor mation about how to install it Select Chooser from the Apple menu Use the field in the upper left of the dialog box to select the appropriate printer driver for your Digital Copier 4 Use the field in the lower left of the dialog box to select the zone where the Digital Copier is connected o You do not need to select a zone if your network is configured with out using zones In the printer list on the right side of the dialog box select your Digital Copier The default name of this Digital Copier is MLT serial num ber Click the Creat have a e button If the dialog box on your screen does not button click the Setup button instead Pi4700e 8 27 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card 8 Using the utility software Close the Chooser This completes configuration of the network and printer The printer can now be used for printing from different applications Note that you do not need to open the Chooser and click the Setup button again once you complete the above procedure Network Card Configuration o D E o lt The Network Card comes with NIManage for AppleTalk which is a Mac intosh utility program for configuring the Network Card Except Mac OS X See NIManage for AppleTalk Macintosh for information about installing NIMa
60. Printer tab It provides on screen emulation of the printer controllers op erational panel E MEE Ele Edt View Go Favorites Help a On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network SERRE Printer Front Panel Operational Panel Offline Test Print Ready Lae leu Offline Proceed Printer Reset Maintenance Local LE Admin Password Log in el Intemet zone Z Display This area shows the printer controller message display Messag es are the same as the Status Display messages that appear in the upper part of the window Online Button line Proceed Button the controller Toggles the printer controller network connection on line and off Click this button to force printing of the job whose data is still in Pi4700e 10 11 Chapter 10 PageScope Light 1 0 Printer tab Test Print This screen appears when you click the Test Print menu on the Printer tab It lets you select a test print page and execute a test print operation Ele Edt View Go Favorites Help a On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network ESTOS Test print Operational Panel Config Page r EN PCL Font List n Urges maps PostScript Font List o Printer Reset Network Config r Maintenance Local LF Print Admin Password C Begin 2 on fa lt Ka El E iemet zone 2 D 0 o o o o Config Page Insert a check mark into the box to print the printer controller set oO up page a PCL
61. Server Card In the Remote Queue field specify PORT1 Optionally specify an input filter 10 When you finish click OK Pi4700e 12 39 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix 12 UNIX Configuration 11 Restart the daemon by choosing Ipd gt Re Manager d in the Print Server Configuring the Printer by Editing the printcap File Use an editor to open e 2 Make entries that name the Network Card name as the remote host and assign any name to the remote printer The following is an example of typical printcap entries printer name gt Example Iprprinter lp rm remote host N Host name from e osts rp remote printer name gt Any name Sd usr spool lpd printer name gt Specifies spool directory for where the system can spool data and perform other spool control This entry sends jobs spooled in usr spool Ipd printer name to the printer specified by printer name for printing by the Network Card spec ified by remote host Create the spooling directory mkdir usr spool lpd printer name Shut down and restart the Ipd daemon Use the lpr command to print something lpr P printer name file name Installation is complete if the file you specify prints correctly 12 40 Pi4700e UNIX Configuration 12 Host based Ipd Configuration You need the CD ROM that comes bundled with the printer controller to use host base
62. Shading Specify the density of the characters Setting range 5 to 100 in 5 steps Pi4700e 4 29 Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings Overlay tab 12 Angle Specify the angle of the characters with respect to the paper Fixed Angle User Setting 13 Position Standard fixed angle of the driver Available settings Horizontal Diagonal Vertical User Setting If you select User Setting from Fixed Angle you can set any desired angle Setting range 180 to 4 180 A minus value rotates the characters clockwise 0 leaves the char acters parallel to the paper and a plus value rotates the characters counterclock wise Specify the position at which you wish to print a watermark Center User Setting S Tips The watermark is printed at the center of the paper You can specify a position by entering numbers in the Horizontal and Vertical boxes Setting values Horizontal 999pt to 999pt in 1pt steps Vertical 999pt to 999pt in 1pt steps 72pt 1inch Specify the position from the center The Horizontal positive direction is to the right and the Vertical position direction is upward You can check the set contents using 1 Preview 4 30 Pi4700e PostScript tab 4 4 9 PostScript tab This tab enables you to set all items related to PostScript Minolta Di550 Di470 Di450 PS Properties x Gene
63. This screen appears when you clickthe Print Job Management menu on the Job tab Use this screen to manage print jobs sent from clients to the E fe EX View o Favates Heb Xm E ES SE IEEE nen FET ee pen a ae pp peus T Co 5 A E Fase Sl Jens res Ja fear EA m E ETE PN RE rife fence wee i ow rama ical i jee Ties a ES lin rS lei f ierni zone S Note A Secure Printing job can only be deleted by the administrator File Download This screen appears when you click the File Download menu on the Job tab You can use this screen to send a file directly from a client to the Dig ital Copier Pi4700e 10 7 Chapter 10 PageScope Light e T i 0 ex lt iS PageScope Light 1 0 Printer tab 10 6 Printer tab The Printer tab shows information and settings for printing on the Digital Copier Settings Sub menus appear when you click the Settings menu on the Printer tab Click the sub menus to display screens for changing the printer setup e Paper Handling This screen appears when you click the Paper Handling sub menu under the Settings menu Use this screen to configure the input tray and output bins Eie Edt View Go Favoiles Help Ba ns System Job Printer Scanner Network OEEXuS Input Raper Halting Copies 7 1 999 fepe Las Priority Source Auto T Pri
64. a E aE Ea aai 9 5 Necessary Devices servers cccceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeneeeeaeeteeeeeeetnees 9 5 Network Setting cocina lia 9 6 Accessing to PageScope Light ssssseeeeeee 9 6 Operatoria 9 6 Logging In to the Admin Mode se 9 6 SMTP amp FTP Configuration eene 9 7 HDD GConfig ration se sctin Stet rap LDAP Settings aui NEQU ES E mail Destinations Configuring an E Mail destination esee 9 13 Checking changing registration PageScope Light 9 14 Deleting registration PageScope Light sss 9 14 New registration touch panel of the digital copier 9 14 Checking changing registration touch panel of the digital COPIST inicios EE 9 16 Registering LDAP Search Criteria sssesessss 9 17 Deleting registration touch panel of the digital copier 9 19 File destinations eese cnn cercare 9 21 Configuring a File Destination 9 22 New registration touch panel of the digital copier 9 24 Checking changing registration touch panel of the digital roe MH LE 9 25 Deleting registration touch panel of the digital copier 9 26 Mailbox Destinations eese 9 28 New registration touch panel of the digital copier 9 28 Checking chang
65. all applications Displaying a Properties dialog box from an Application Menu As an example the procedure for the PCL6 printer driver is described below 1 Select Print from the File menu of the application r of the G ral is Minolt 5 is not listed click Y and from the menu T 2 e sure that the Si If Minolt Kin vil then appear select N ta Di L6 This method allows you to set the number of copies and paper for each document Note that the settings made on the properties dialog box accessed through the application are valid only for that particular application S Tip To set the Device Options Setting which need not be changed unless device is changed open it from the Printers window to set To show a properties dialog box other than Setup click the corre sponding tab located on the top part of the screen S Note The steps to display a properties dialog box may be different depending on the application Follow the correct procedure according to the appli cation The procedure above is based on the application WordPad With PostScript printer driver the contents are different between when the properties dialog box is accessed from Print Manager and when it is accessed from an application Pi4700e Windows NT 4 0 2 3 Windows NT 4 0 Operating Environment This section explains the required environment for the printer driver Before in
66. and then press If you want to use the default spooler directory shown on the screen press without inputting anything Specify the remote system name and then press Enter oo 9 Typean appropriate name like PORT1 for the remote system printer and then press ener 10 From the list that appears on the display select the printcap symbol name Next type the following o E 11 This displays the configuration If it is correct type Y If something is wrong type N The following table shows some sample settings Item Input Data Description Ip line printer rm remote host Network Card host name rp remote printer PORT1 You can use any name you want here sd spooler directory usr spool lpd7 12 36 Pi4700e UNIX Configuration 12 12 Add any comments you want to the printcap file For example you could type something like the following Dick s printer is down the hall 13 Select exit to save your settings and then press ene to complete the procedure SCO UNIX Use the following procedure to set up a remote printer on the host that sends jobs to a Network Card using Ipd 1 At the prompt type mkdev rlp S N 6 N Note You cannot run mkdev rip twice To add another printer use the rlp conf command Type the responses shown below for the questions that appear Do you want to install or remove a remote printer T
67. can check the stapling positions using the icons in the dialog box S Notes for 2 Number of punch holes can be specified only when Multi staple Fin isher is installed nch Holes is not displayed for Metric area You cannot punch certain sizes of paper Also you may be unable to punch the paper at certain positions For details refer to the User Man ual of the machine If you select Long Edge in the manual bypass take up mode the paper may sometimes fail to be punched Punch and OHP interleaving cannot be set simultaneously Punch and Booklet cannot be set simultaneously Pi4700e Setup tab 4 S Tip for 2 The punching positions are displayed on the icons in the dialog box S Note for 3 If Folding is combined with Hole Punch or Staple the Hole Punch or Staple function to be used is restricted depending on the specific type of the Folding function combined For details see Appendix A page 12 1 for details Pi4700e Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings 4 Paper tab 4 Paper tab The Paper tab allows you to make basic printer settings Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties x Quality Device Options Setting Job Management Overlay General Details Color Management Sharing l Setup Paper 1 Espe Original Document Size Copies 3 fned Letter 8 1 2 11 in Y 1 copy 1 999
68. for one page the machine starts printing ac cepting no other job for copying This means that less time is available to you for copying but you do not have to wait long before a particular print job is done On Line Ready e OnLine key This function is the same as that available in ordinary printers as On Line Off Line Select On Line normally A lit lamp indicates that the machine is in the On Line mode e Ready Lamp Data can be transferred while this lamp stays lit up The lamp remains blinking while data is being transferred 1 8 Pi4700e Installing the Printer Drivers 1 1 5 Installing the Printer Drivers To make 100 use of the functions offered by the machine mounted with the controller install the attached printer drivers in your computer The controller is furnished with the following printer drivers PCL6 printer driver for Windows 95 PCL6 printer driver for Windows 98 Me PCL6 printer drive for Windows NT 4 0 PCL6 printer driver for Windows 2000 XP PS printer driver for Windows 95 98 Me PS printer driver for Windows NT 4 0 PS printer driver for Windows 2000 XP PPD file for Macintosh PPD Plugin for Mac OS X PS print utility for Linux Redhat SUSE Turbo Open Install the printer driver suitable for the operating system that runs on your computer For installation procedures see the relevant page as detailed below e Installing the Windows printer driver Windows 95 98 Me p 2 1 Windows 2000 XP
69. icon will appear to the left of the printer name Chooser AppleShare LaserWriter 8 15 Click the Setup button 16 Click the Configure button Select a PostScript Printer MLT_504486 Active Q Inactive 155 AppleTalk Je Current Printer Description File PPD Selected E Minolta Di470U PS PPD Auto Setup J Select PPD Printer Info J Configure J 6 6 Pi4700e Installing the printer driver 6 17 Set the operating environment of the controller and click the OK but ton Ka Current Printer Description File PPD Selected Minolta Di470U PS PPD allable Opti i Installed Trays Duplex Cabinet w LCT Not Installed w Finisher Not Installed v Tip For details of the screen components see Print options on page 6 14 18 Click the OK button Pi4700e 6 7 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh Installing the printer driver 19 The Chooser dialog box will reappear Close the Chooser dialog box AppleShare Chooser Select a PostScript Printer Active Q Inactive 755 AppleTalk 20 A printer icon will appear on the desktop Macintosh HD SER MLT 504486 6 8 Pi4700e Installing the printer driver 6 Installation Mac OS X This section explains the installation procedure for the Macintosh pri
70. includes the distinguished name 8 42 Pi4700e Using the utility software 8 Example When user Susan is to be notified about errors on a bindery server named OLD_SERVER this list shows the entry OLD_SERVER SUSAN When user Albert of NDS context ENGINEERING CORP is to notified of errors on a printer this list shows the entry ALBERT ENGINEER ING CORP Double clicking an entry in the list displays its Notify Setting dialog box See Setting Up Notification p 8 44 for more information S Note The Network Card supports notification in bindery mode only e Add Queue Click this button to display the Adding a Queue dialog box which con tains the fields described below o Connection Server Specifies the server connection This list includes NDS connections associated with the current user and all bindery file server connec tions NDS connections are always listed first by default Selecting a new connection automatically updates the list O NDS Context Specifies the NDS context of the queue It lists all of the contexts or sub contexts of the Queue field This field is activated only when NDS support is enabled By default NDS Context should be set to the of ten used NDS connections from among those specified in the Print Server Settings dialog box O Queue Lists the names of all the queues of the currently selected connec tions When an NDS connection is specified the queue names of the selected c
71. installed Trays Set the tray configuration of the machine Setting values Dup 2way Tray Dup LCC Duplex Cabinet 2 LCT Set whether the Large Capacity Cassette is installed or not Setting values Not Installed Installed 3 Finisher Set the specifications of the finishing option installed on the machine Setting values Not Installed Mailbin Finisher Folding Finisher Multi staple Finisher Single staple Finisher S Note If installed Trays has not been properly set it may be impossible to select Finisher properly Pi4700e 6 15 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 Print options Page Attributes The Page Attributes property sheet allows you to make the basic settings for printing LaserWriter 8 Page Setup r Page Attributes Y o Format for MLT_504486 y 1 Paper Letter v 2 j Orientation 3 Scale 100 4 1 Format for Specify the name that represents Pi4700e set up with the NIC 2 Paper Select the size of the paper to be used for printing Setting values Ledger 11x14 Legal Letter Executive Invoice A3 A4 A5 A6 JIS B4 JIS B5 JIS B6 FLS1 FLS2 FLS3 o FLS4 _ 2 3 Orientation Select the orientation of the image with the corresponding icon 5 Setting values Portrait Landscape 4 Scale Specify the image size of the print Setting range 25 to 400 Note If you select a size of paper not loaded in the machine or Manual Feed
72. it to the available printer resources of Windows clients as follows To add a printer from a Windows NT 4 x workstation 1 Choose Start Settings Printers Double click Add Printer Select Network Print Server and click the Next button bb oo N Select NDPS Printers find the name of your printer and click the OK button Pi4700e 8 25 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card 8 NetWare configuration O For example DK Printer Public ri_ndpscontained 330 Cancel Shared Printers IV Expand by Default Help xf Microsoft Windows Network a HOME 8 MASTER WORKGROUP age NDPS Printers Af NDPS Controlled Access Printers 38 NDPS Public Access Printers ti ndpscontained age Netware Network o D E o Ren p Printer Information Description Status Ready Documents Waiting 0 5 Finish your printer configuration Network Interface Card 8 26 Pi4700e Macintosh configuration 8 8 6 Macintosh configuration This chapter describes how to configure for network printing in a Macin tosh environment Setting Up AppleTalk Use the following procedure to make AppleTalk settings 1 On the Apple menu point to Control Panel and then select Apple Talk Select Ethernet Close the AppleTalk dialog box Selecting and Setting Up the Printer You must use the following procedure to configure the driver before print ing for the first time 1 Install the
73. lt Back Cancel Help Enable NDS Mode Enables and disables support off directory services by the Network Card O Checking this option enables directory services support o Unchecking this option disables directory services support and caus es all other settings on the dialog box to appear dimmed e Preferred NDS Context Input a character string showing the NDS directory context to be used by the Network Card when logging into the network This field accepts input of up to 128 characters S Note Input the entire context regardless of type e Preferred NDS Tree Input a character string showing the NDS tree to be used by the Net work Card when logging into the network This field accepts input of up to 48 characters e Enable Bindery Mode Enables and disables bindery NetWare network services by the Net work Card O Checking this option enables bindery Pi4700e 8 41 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card o D E o lt Network Interface Card Using the utility software S Note Disabling this option also disables the Primary File Server field e Primary File Server Specifies the NetWare file server used by the Network Card as the pri mary file server When no primary file server is selected yet or when the selected server cannot be used for some reason the first file serv er on the list is selected automatically Print Server Settings Use the settings on this di
74. machine User Manual If the original document for a print job contains a page of a different size from the others and this document is printed the Staple setting may be canceled If the original document for a print job contains a page with a different orientation from the others care should be used because the stapling position is determined according to the direction of the first page It is possible that an option cannot be selected because of the paper size For details see the User Manual of the machine Pi4700e 6 29 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh Ko D o Ren Printer Driver for Macintosh Print options S Note for 9 If the Folding function is to be used turn Off Punch and make the Punch setting under It is possible that an aoken cannot be selected because of the paper size Some paper sizes do not allow you to select the hole position For details see the User Manual of the machine Holes may not be punched if Long Edge is selected with manual feed copying The Multi staple Finisher for the inch areas offers three punch holes S Note for 10 If Staple or Punch is to be used with Folding be sure to turn Off S or Punch S Note for 1 1 es when using OHP Interleaving Use Pa ce to specify OHP transparencies The paper source that can be selected is Manual Feed The same paper source cannot be selected for OHP g and Pap
75. mode Tektronix 4695 4696 inkjet plotter Send EOF after job to eject page _t Fix stair stepping text al Text only printer Xerox XES printers OK 8 v4 v 2 1 pages per output page Margins in pts 1 72 of inch HELP Right Left 18 Top Bottom 18 Extra GS options 9 Click the OK button 10 Click the OK button in edit window of the printer to complete setting Edit Local Printer Entry Names namel name2 Prn55ppn Spool Directory var spool Ipd Prn55 File Limit in Kb 0 no limit b Printer Device dwi Input Filter auto PostScript W Suppress Headers OK Cancel Pi4700e Printer setting with X window System 5 Turbo Linux With Turbo Linux execute command from Terminal window for setting printer The following shows the display method of the setting screen First execute turboprintcfg command from Terminal window Termi nal window will change to printer setting screen Select the Add button File Edit Settings Help TurboPrintCfg v2 0 2 C 1999 Turbolinux Configure Printers Select the printer that you wish to modify or use the Add Remove buttons to add or remove a printer The fi and R keys are shortcuts to add and remove respectively Type Queue Name Printer Type lt TAB gt lt ALt TAB gt between elements lt SPACE gt Selects lt F1 gt Help Select Local P for printer typ
76. of prints of the same document to spec ify whether or not to print one set at a time Uncollated All of the pages are printed one after the other For ex ample if you make five sets of prints each page is printed in sequence five copies at a time Collated Prints are output one set at a time For example if you make five sets of prints of a 10 page document the prints will be output one set at a time Sorting Select the sorting method Unsorted Prints are not sorted Sorted Prints are sorted Orientation Select the orientation of the image You can check the selected direction using Page Layout Portrait Printing takes place lengthwise Landscape Printing takes place crosswise Note for 1 Depending on environment used contents of Save Delete will be dif ferent Refer to Appendix A p 12 11 for details Notes for 2 If you select a size of paper not loaded in the machine or Manual Feed the machine will give a message prompting you to add paper to Tray Tray2 or the manual bypass port and enter into a standby state e does not match the r selected the ma If the setting made in Original Dc size specified in the application with Fit to Pz chine takes the paper size set in the application a is selected in O be selected if Ct Note for 3 When using the OHP interleaving function set the number of sets of prints to 1 Note for 4 Keep Collate Sort on the application
77. one side of a sheet of pa per 2 up The same procedure is applicable when you want to perform 4 up 6 up 9 up or 16 up printing Print data 2up printout Procedure Start printing from the application which has been used to create the document Normally printing can be started by selecting Print from the File menu The Print ap e will bea eR Make sure aa Ite gt is displayed for Name in Printer and click the S button Note Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate Sort in the Print dialog box To ensure proper printing operation however turn OFF these items of the application and make the necessary settings in each tab of the printer driver The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear Make sure that me size of the document crgated y NI the application is displayed in il Document Size on the Paper tab Click the Setup tab Select 2 up in N up Click N up style to open the dialog box and set the Page Location 7 6 Pi4700e Specifying N up printing 7 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button N x 9 b on oO lt The Print dialog box will reappear Click the OK button 0 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon start S Note Void image and image overlap may result in printing of a document that contains pages of assorted sizes and directions Convenient Functions Pi4700e 7 7 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions P
78. only or All Pages 8 Specify the starting distribution number for Starting Number 9 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button Convenient Functions 10 The Print dialog box will reappear Click the OK button 11 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon start Pi4700e 7 15 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions Using the copy track function Using the copy track function Overview It is possible to keep track of the number of prints produced by each ac count Setting of the machine specifies 100 account management or 1000 ac count management Procedure 1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the document Normally printing can be started by selecting Print from the File menu 2 The Print dialog box will appear Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer and click the Properties button S Note Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate Sort in the Print dialog box To ensure proper printing operation however turn OFF these items of the application and make the necessary settings in each tab of the printer driver 3 3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear Make sure that the size of the document created with the application is displayed in Original Document Size on the Paper tab A al Click the Job Management tab 6 Apply check mark to Account Code 7 Input
79. or Apple Talk Reset Unit Select this menu item to reset the Network Card Note that resetting the Network Card initializes the network interface without effecting the printer interface 12 62 Pi4700e Using Telnet to Make Settings 12 Restore Factory Defaults Select this menu item to restore the Network Card to its initial factory de faults All of the parameters stored in NVRAM are restored to their initial factory defaults S Note Initial factory default values do not take effect until you finish the Telnet session or power the Network Card down and then power it up again Change Password Select this menu item to change the password used for Telnet connection and access to the HTTP server In response to the New Password prompt type in up to eight characters for the new password and then press E In response to the Retype New Password prompt input the new password again for confirmation and then press Ere S Note The password you specify here is used for both Telnet and Web page access Changing the password using one type of access Telnet or a Web browser also changes the password for the other type of access Exiting Telnet Exit Inputting E while at Main Menu after changing settings causes the menu shown below to appear The Configuration Utility Unit Serial no 460121 V5 04 Exit 1 Save Changes and Exit 2 Save Changes and Reset 3 Exit Without Saving Changes Select 1
80. pag es are sorted by copy i e 5 sets of a 10 page docu ment are output Uncollated Prints the specified number of pages one page ata time For instance when printing 5 sets of a document pages are printed five times one page at a time 6 Sorting Select the sorting method Unsorted Prints are not sorted Sorted Prints are sorted 7 Smoothing Correct the edges of the printed image Setting values Off On S Note for 1 It is possible that an option cannot be selected because of the paper size For details see the User Manual of the machine S Tip for 1 The paper source is set with Inst Ko D o Ren The paper source options to be selected are limited depending on the function or functions to be used e g OHP Interleaving Front Cover etc Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 26 Pi4700e Print options S S S S S S S S ecc Note for 2 It is possible that an option cannot be selected because of the paper size For details see the User Manual of the machine Tip for 2 The finishing option is set with In Note for 3 Staple and Punch positions will not be correct if this function is select ed improperly Tip for 3 Rotated Landscape is handy for positioning Punch or Staple on the op posite side Tip for 4 The paper sizes that enable Duplex Print are Ledger 11 x 14 Legal Letter Executive Invoice A3 A4 A5
81. port other than Auto is selected Booklet is specified OHP Interleaving is specified Uncollated is speci fied Check the setting of the paper size paper source exit port Booklet OHP Interleaving and Collated Pi4700e Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 11 Unable to Print Symptom Possible Cause Action Unable to staple properly No stapling can be effected if the type of paper is thick paper or OHP transparencies Check the type of paper When Mailbin Finisher or Multi staple Finisher is installed no stapling can be effected if num ber of prints to be made exceeds 50 When Single staple Finisher is installed no stapling can be ef fected if number of prints to be made exceeds 30 No stapling can be effected if the number of pages to be printed is 50 or more when a Folding Fin isher is mounted Center Staple is also disabled if the number of pages to be printed is 15 or more No stapling can be effected if original document contains pag es of different sizes Check the number of prints to be made The stapling position is opposite to what is expected The paper direction and N up do not match the setting made for Orientation Change the setting for Orienta tion Unable to specify Punch Either a Multi staple Finisher Mailbin Finisher or Folding Fin isher must be mounted to enable the setting of Punc
82. printer See 2 Installing the Printer Driver p 2 1 for details about how to in stall it Pi4700e Peer to Peer Printing with IPX SPX 3 3 Right click the new printer icon and select Proper ies from the menu 4 Display the Details tab 5 Click the Print to the following port box and then select the port add ed by the IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program 6 Click the Apply button of the Properties dialog box f Display the General tab and print a test page 8 If the test prints normally complete the procedure by clicking OK to close the Properties dialog box After you finish installing a printer with the above procedure you can use it just as you would any standard local printer The printer can also be used as a network printer by other Windows computers on your network whose Windows 95 98 Me systems are configured the same way as de scribed above Pi4700e Chapter 3 Network Settings 3 IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program Windows 3 6 IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program Windows Use this program for peer to peer printing under IPX SPX Just by install ing this program you can specify an IPX based printer on the network as a printer port Requirements e Computer must have IPX SPX compatible protocol installed S Note Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for information about installing IPX SPX under Windows e ES o 2 o Ren Installing the IPX Pee
83. setting screen but it is not necessary to change from default value 6 Specify printer name paper and color Te D o Ren i Konsole m ii i File Sessions Options SuSE APSfilter Setup Choose your printer definition Defined c7 v Device dev lpO Special not necessary Jack to previous menu 1 Change printer interface Which printer driver Which paper type Monochrome colorfull Settings for your printer Reset the printer definition Add the printer definition Overwrite the printer definition Delete the printer definition Printer Driver for Linux KK gt lt Cancel gt 5 14 Pi4700e Printer setting with X window System 5 f Select the Add button for complete Confirmation screen will appear File Sessions Options Printer entry est na letter mono 600 Prn55ppn ascii 11p15 PS_Prn55ppm letter ascii mono 600 PS_Prn55ppm letter ascii o ele IPS Prn55ppn letter auto mono 600 PS Prn55ppm letter auto mono 60 0 PS_Prn5SSppm raw I1p17 1PS_Prn55ppn letter rauw IPS_PrnSSppm letter raw O A How to display Printer Utility dialog box Ifyou use X window printer utility setting can be specified from dialog box Dialog box can be displayed only with command operation so didialog command is used here Input the following command on the Terminal window and execute The dialog box will appear opt diutil bin didialog m Mode
84. status of the file server and queue to which the network interface card is attached Ele Edit View Go Favorites Help Summary TCP IP Configuration NetWare Configuration NetWare Setting NetWare Status AppleTalk Configuration IPP Configuration WINS Configuration Reset Maintenance On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network NetWare Queue Status FILE_SERVER Not Connected eJ d meme Z File Server Name of the NetWare server to which the printer is currently at tached File Server Status Status of connection to NetWare server Queue Name Name of NetWare print queue to which the printer is currently allocated Queue Status NetWare print queue status Pi4700e 3 29 Chapter 3 Network Settings e ES o 2 o Ren Network Settings 3 Specifying network settings from PageScope Light AppleTalk Configuration This screen appears when you click the AppleTalk Configuration menu on the Network tab It lets you change a number of AppleTalk environ ment settings Ele Edit View Go Favorites Help On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network Summary A password is required to perform this function TCP IP Configuration Password NetWare Configuration F Enable AppleTalk AppleTalk Configuration IPP Configuration Printer Name Minolta Product Name WINS Configuration Zone Name Reset
85. termi nated next scan job If the error does not cancel nor mally contact the LDAP server administrator This manual contains the specifications for the controller Refer to the doc umentation provided for the machine for the machine specifications A 19xx code appears only during an LDAP search Code Description 1901 operationsError 1902 protocolError 1903 timeLimitExceeded 1904 sizeLimitExceeded 1907 authMethodNotSupported 1908 strongAuthRequired 1909 reserved 190A referral 190B adminLimitExceeded 190C unavailableCriticalExtension 190D confidentialityRequired 190E saslBindInProgress 190F reserved 1910 noSuchAttribute 1911 undefinedAttributeT ype 1912 inappropriateMatching 1913 constraintViolation 1914 attributeOrValueExists 1915 invalidAttributeSyntax 1916 1919 reserved 1920 noSuchObject No searchable object Pi4700e Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 11 Unable to Print Code Description 1921 aliasProblem 1922 InvalidDNSyntax 1923 reserved 1924 aliasDereferencingProblem 1925 192F reserved 1930 inappropriateAuthentication 1931 invalidCredentials Wrong password 1932 insufficientAccessRights 1933 busy 1934 unavailable 1935 unwillingToPerform 1936 loopDetect 1937 193F reserved 1946 reserved 1948 194
86. the CD ROM drive of your computer f Click the Browse button select the file corresponding to the type of printer driver to be installed and the operating system being used and then click the OK button 8 A Printers list appears Select the driver to be installed and click the Next gt button S Tip PS driver is different for each model Select according to model of the machine used 9 A window that prompts you to select the port will appear Select the port normally LPT to which the printer cable has been connected then click the Next button Add Printer Wizard Click the port you want to use with this printer and then click Next Available ports Communications Port Infrared Serial COM Port Creates a file on disk Infrared Printing LPT Port Configure Port lt Back Cancel 10 A window that asks you to confirm the printer name will appear Check the printer name If you want to designate this printer as the default printer select Yes Click the Next gt button 11 A screen that allows you to select printing of a test page will appear If you want to print a test page select Yes recommended If you elect not to select No It is recommended that a test page be printed to ensure that the printer driver has been installed properly Now click the Finish button 2 4 Pi4700e Windows 95 98 Me 2 12 Installation will start When all the files have been co
87. the WINS server to match the NetBIOS name with an IP ad dress Most users will find it easier to remember the NetBIOS name for the printer rather than its IP address File Edit View Go Favorites Help On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network Summary A password is required to perform this function TCP IP Configuration Password Dot Ware Configuration WINS Net BIOS Configuration AppleTalk Configuration IPP Configuration Eos Ma WINS Configuration Primary WINS Server n92 ree ro n Reset Ne Secondary WINS Server nee fee rs roo Primary Server Logged in Ngr Server Secondary Server Logged in Apply Clear Ej Intemet zone Z Password Input the password assigned to the network interface card The initial factory default is sysadm Clicking the Apply button after inputting the wrong password displays a password error mes sage without changing the settings NetBIOS Name The NetBIOS name for the network interface card is shown on this screen The default NetBIOS name is the Network Inter face Card s serial number for example MLT 995243 unless you previously configured a name for the network interface card with DHCP You may change the NetBIOS name here by entering a new name The name can be up to 15 characters long Primary WINS Server If you previously configured a DHCP server to provide the net work interface card with the IP address of the primary WINS s
88. the server by the bindery services mode If it doesn t install in the NDS mode Bindery context is required to install the Network Card in the bindery em ulation mode Use the following procedure to confirm whether your server has bindery context o LE D o lt 1 On the NetWare 4 x server type load install 2 Select Maintenance Selective Install from the menu 3 Onthe Installation Options menu select NCF File Options 4 From the menu of available NCF file options select Edit AUTOEX EC NCF Network Interface Card 5 Search the file and check to see if it contains a statement similar to the one shown below SET BINDERY CONTEXT OU ENG OU ENG is an example file server context Use your own file server context in place of OU ENG 6 At the console prompt type the SET BINDER CONTEXT statement exactly as you entered it in your AUTOEXEC NCF file S Note The command you type at the console prompt takes effect immediate ly The contents defined in the AUTOEXEC NCF file take effect when the server is shut down and then restarted 8 6 Pi4700e NetWare configuration Configuring in the Bindery Mode After you confirm that your server has a bindery context use the following procedure to configure the Network Card 1 Log into the server where you want to install the print server as super visor or as a user with equivalent privileges 2 Type PCONSOLE and press to display the Available Op
89. then press e 8 Press to move the cursor to New print queue type the print queue name and then press E 9 Press to move the cursor to Printer type and then press E From the printer type list select Other Unknown and then press E 10 After all the settings are the way you want press to save the con figuration Repeat steps 5 through 10 for each file server that the print server ser vices After you are finished select Print Queues or Print Servers on the Available Options screen when you want to view delete or edit print server or queue settings Configuration Using Novell Directory Services Novell Directory Services NDS provides a more advanced approach to network management than previous versions of NetWare It stores and tracks all network objects A Version 4 x or 5 x server must have NDS in stalled in order to function This means every NetWare 4 x or 5 x server is a directory server because it services printers print servers print queues and other named directory objects With appropriate privileges you can create a print server object and assign them network wide contexts or locations which eliminates the need to perform troublesome setup of print servers on each individual network server NDS provides true enterprise networking based not on individually defined physical sites but rather on a shared network database The result is vast ly improved print server setup and management
90. turn off this option Select the name of the server you want to attach to Log in to this server at the prompt D _ i O o o i o D E x p o E o Z 8 Double click the server you want to use A list of queues available on that server appears in the Queues list If you are not attached you must authenticate to that server Yes Note To complete this procedure you must have rights to the print queue you are referencing and a bindery object of the same name as the one you are using must exist on that server If no queue names appear no queues have been defined on that server Select the queue for which you want to create a reference and click the OK button This causes the Create Print Queue dialog box to appear again 10 Click the Cr The bindery reference queue now appears in your NDS tree ite button 1 1 Return to Step 10 of the procedure for configuring a queue based printer as a controlled access printer See Configuring Queue Based Printers on page 8 17 Now that this queue is created you can configure a Printer Agent to ser vice jobs from a queue or to submit jobs to a queue 8 20 Pi4700e NetWare configuration 8 Configuring the Queue Based Printer Option at the Server Console 1 Do the steps described in Creating Public Access Printers in Net Ware Administrator Choose Connection Type Queue Based Printer This causes the Port Handler Configuration Queue
91. x xlO x x O x x xlO xlOx lO x x O x xruJejewM 010 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 10 0 O0 0 0 O O O ojo Jequiny uonnquisig O OJO OJO x O x OJO OJO OJOJOJOJOJOJOJOJO OJOJOJOJO Ox Oo ypyoog JO OO O x xlO x lO xx x OlO x xlO x xi lOxix x x OJo x 0 egog O O O 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 O O O OJO x x x x x O JOJO O 2 dng 6 9 zpapis3 O OJOJO lt O O O OJOJOJOJO O OJOJOJO x O x x x x x O O x O 8 ano 69 v epepsa Olololololololololololololololololololo x 1x x xlolololo dn pepis 3 O OJOJO lt OJOJOJO O OJOJOJOJOJOJOJO xJO x xiIx x x O O x O dni pepis O O O OO JO O O O O O 0 0 0 0O O O O O O xx x x OJOJO O O o o gt Els El oe alel 13 z clej c lt o Lg9 6 8 3 5 G o 3 o O N ilS os oF Gc E 3 Y olo Y Y 5 7 PIS ajala z Bl A yll D olololo elsizxi2 13 elglo 2 8 38 6 E 5 818 582 3 S 8 22 5 8 lolo S c o o S 3 o o o o lololojlal z i I P 1 1 2 5 0O 0 0 a uw wa wq O GD E o 9 o S II O eoJnog Jedeqd suondo oyioedg jejuud ynoke7 al jojo Pi4700e 12 2 Function combination matrix Windows 12 The combination is possible The combination is impossible The settings made are rejected Cannot be used if the LCT rejects loading of paper in the lengthwise direction Does not function if special paper setting has been made Can be set on the PS driver but not on the PCL driver gt gt ex 0 S Note Some combi
92. 0 100BaseT UTP Free space on hard disk 10MB or more PCL6 2MB or more PS e Windows 95 98 Me For the operating environment and installation procedure for the Win dows 95 98 Me printer driver see page 2 1 e Windows NT 4 0 For the operating environment and installation procedure for the Win dows NT 4 0 printer driver see page 2 15 2 8 Pi4700e Windows 2000 XP 2 Installing This section explains the installation procedure for the Windows 2000 XP printer driver S Note When starting up the operating system log in with administrator privi leges Before starting to install the printer driver be sure first to quit all other applications A Tip The following procedure assumes that the machine is a Digital Copier and that the printer driver is PCL6 Read the specific proper names ac cordingly if the machine is a model other than the Digital Copier and if for example the OS is Windows XP and the printer driver is PS Click the Start button From the menu that appears select Se then click Printers 2 The Printers window will appear Double click the Add Printer icon Start the Add Printer Wizard Click the Next gt button Pi4700e 2 9 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Windows 2000 XP Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver 4 A screen that allows you to select the type of connection made of the printer will appear If the printer is directly connected to the computer select Lo
93. 1 Unable to Print Symptom Possible Cause Action Continued from the previous page Print ing does not start de spite the completion of printing setup on the computer The print job is locked Refer to the Job List on the ma chine control panel to see if the print job in question is locked If SO unlock it The connection of the controller to the network has not been es tablished Consult the network administra tor The print job was canceled Check the status on the Incom pleted Job Queue of Page Scope Light Machine memory space avail able is not sufficient Add the machine memory to ex pand its space If the copy track function is en abled an illegal access number might have been entered Enter the correct access num ber Multiple copy sets are mistakenly sorted and stapled together as a single large set The settings in certain DTP soft ware applications may conflict with the printer driver settings In the application turn OFF Col late and set the copy count to one In the printer driver make the desired Collate Sorting and Copy count settings A large number of copies are mistakenly printed The settings in certain DTP soft ware applications may conflict with the printer driver settings In the application turn OFF Col late and set the copy count to one In the printer driver make the desired Collate Sorting and copy co
94. 2 OSX 5 0GB 4 4GB Free 4 9GB 4 9GB Free 5 0GB 3 1GB Free Installing this software requires 412KB of disk space You have selected to install this software on the disk OSX 4 ES i b Go Back Continue 9 Click the Install button The plugin for Di470PPD is installed Ko D o Ren eotc Install Minolta PPD Plugin Easy Install Introduction Select Destination 8 Installation Type Click Install to perform a basic installation of this Installing software package Finish Up Printer Driver for Macintosh Go Back Install 6 10 Pi4700e Installing the printer driver 6 10 Click the Close button This completes the installation of the PPD plugin Next install the printer driver 11 Double click the MacOSX icon on the desktop 12 Click the Application icon 13 Double click the Utility folder 14 Double click the PrintCenter icon 15 Click the Add button f SEES Printer List ce E ke Default T i You have no printers available 3 Would you like to add to your list of printers now Ferna 16 Select Other beside Printer Model 500 Printer List E f AppleTalk l f Layout E se lt gt A Type MLT 504486 PostScript printer Character Auto Select Lexmark Tektronix Xerox Pi4700e 6 11 Chapter 6 Printer Driver
95. 4341 7704 02 wwom User Manual Pi4700e Printer Controller Contents Contents N Before Using the Printer Driver 1 1 Features of the Controller eese 1 1 1 2 AAA mas nae siae naaraan eina io aui araok sih 1 6 1 3 Connecting the Controller eee 1 7 1 4 Settings Made on the Machine eee 1 8 Priority Device uto ecd ete pai 1 8 Ori Line Ready sic ceil Oe ee ERE aie 1 8 1 5 Installing the Printer Drivers eere 1 9 Installing the Printer Driver 2 1 Windows 95 98 Me eene nnne 2 1 Operating Environment ssssssseeeeeneeeenenenn 2 1 Installing etre op PRU HRC OE ORRIMIDNE 2 2 Making General Settings Before Using the Printer 2 6 Displaying a Properties dialog box eene 2 6 Displaying a Properties dialog box from the Printers window 2 7 Displaying a Properties dialog box from an Application Menu 2 7 2 2 Windows 2000 XP ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenen enne nennen nennen 2 8 Operating Environment sesssseeeeeenneneenennne 2 8 Installing a a det dn re t e tace 2 9 Making General Settings Before Using the Printer 2 18 Displaying a Properties dialog box 2 13 Displaying a Properties dialog box from the Printer Folder 2 14 Displayin
96. 4700e 9 23 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode 9 File destinations New registration touch panel of the digital copier 1 Press the Utility Key 2 Touch Job Image Scan Input Utility Riad teal Meter user s ESC L Count 4 Choice 4 Administr ator Mode j Toner He plenisher o2 LE o 2 o lt 3 Touch Scanner Adar Input Job Image Scan Memory Input Select a method for inputting memor Scanner Mode 4 Touch the key to be registered Sa mage Scam Wonory Input qa Select the address to Input Change or Delete Scanner Address rnputl 3 5 Typeinthe name that will appear on the key for example ANNIE ERE y 9 24 Pi4700e File destinations 9 o Touch FTP 7 Touch Next 8 Typein the destination Y annie_file eee Address Input Note Type in the destination that was en tered when the file destination was fay Thiet specified with PageScope Light In AMABRAA 5 the screen shown at the right the destination ftp 192 168 10 12 pub is entered for the example with the name annie file in the screen shown on page 9 21 9 Touch Enter Checking changing registration touch panel of the digital copier Press the Utility Key 2 Touch Job Image Scan Input Utility Rewari eae Meter user s ECC Sd Count 4 Choice 4 Administr ator Mod
97. 5 After installation is complete the screen shown below will appear oot k pc18 root Fite Edit Settings Help Croot k pcl8 root rpm ivh diutil 2 0 rpm diutil IHHHHHHHBE JHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHHE diutil c link usr l diutil link usr link usr ots If an error is output during installation execute the following commands in sequence rpm ivh diutil pack file nodeps In s usr lib libtcl8 0 so usr lib libtcl so In s usr lib libtk8 0 so usr X11R6 lib libtk so ldconfig n usr lib ldconfig n usr X11R6 lib S Note Input file name to diutil pack file By executing the above commands in sequence installation can be per formed correctly Pi4700e 5 3 Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux Te D o Ren Printer Driver for Linux Printer setting with X window System Printer setting with X window System Making general settings before using the printer The printer driver requires setting of items that are common to all print jobs including the port to which the printer cable is connected and any op tional devices configured with the machine Note that these settings must be made only after the printer driver has been installed See page 5 19 if you refer to Device Options Setting in dialog box Redhat Linux With Redhat Linux setting is performed from Printer Configuration in the control panel The following shows how to displa
98. 53 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card Specifications g JejdeuS p1e2 eoepnelu WOMEN Pi4700e 8 54 Outline EE Scanner Mode 9 9 1 S Note You can search for E mail addresses registered on the LDAP server In order to use the scanning function the optional network interface card must be installed Outline There are two scan modes you can use with this machine Use the one appropriate to the network environment and purpose of use E Mail Scan to E mail Transmits scanned document as attached file with E mail Suitable for sending low resolution data Environment of Network with Mail server is necessary Acquires scan data with mail software Mail Server C lient PC EE Intranet Client PC Internet Pi4700e 9 1 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode o2 LE o 2 o lt Scanner Mode Outline FTP Scan to Server Transmits scanned document to the specified by FTP server Suitable for sending high resolution data Environment of Network with FTP server is necessary Acquires scan data with FTP client software FTP Server Internet FTP Server 9 2 Pi4700e Outline URL Transmits scanned document to the specified by FTP serve
99. 9 9 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode Chapter 9 Scanner Mode Network Setting LDAP Setting Ele Edt view Favorites Tools Help Destinations SMTP amp FTP Configuration External Open Link HDD Configuration LDAP Setting Admin Mode Logout On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network LDAP Setting LDAP Function OFF Y LDAP Server Address 192 168 10 200 Port Number 389 Search Root dc ldapsvi341 Search Timeout s 60 Max hit of Number 100 E Anonymous Login Login Name Dn Password Check LDAP settings Restore Factory Defaults Apply Clear 4 Internet LDAP Function Use this setting to turn LDAP search on or off The setting you make here does not go into effect until you turn the copier off and then back on again The initial default setting is OFF LDAP Server Address Input the LDAP server address The initial default setting is blank Only an IP address can be typed in Port Number Enter the LDAP server port number The initial default setting is 389 Search Root Input the search start point The initial default setting is blank Search Timeout s Input a timeout value seconds for LDAP communication The initial default setting is 60 seconds Max hit of Number Input a value that specifies the maximum number of hits that can be accepted for LDAP search results The initial default setting is 100 Anonymous Login Selecting this ch
100. 92 9 200 200 00 20 6b aa bb cc This stores the MAC address and IP address data in the cache Next type the command shown below ping IP address assigned to Network Card Example IP address assigned to Network Card 192 9 200 200 ping 192 9 200 200 This command sends the IP address to the Network Card A timeout message is returned until the Network Card recognizes this IP address and restarts The Network Card waits for auto reset Otherwise restart the Digital Copier After the Network Card restarts type the command from step 3 again ping IP address assigned to Network Card Example IP Address 192 9 200 200 ping 192 9 200 200 Repeat step 5 until a response is returned IP address assignment is complete when a response is returned Pi4700e Setting Up IP Parameters 12 S Note ARP can be used to assign an IP address only Other IP parameters must be set using Telnet or a Web browser For details see 12 8 Us ing Telnet to Make Settings p 12 61 and PageScope Light for Pi5501 Operator s Manual There are problems with the ARP command in earlier versions of Win dows 95 so the command may not function properly if the ARP entry is blank To check for and prevent such problems enter the following at the MS DOS prompt arp a If the ARP entry is blank ping another valid device on the network as shown below ping valid IP address for device other than the Net work Card Next per
101. AC address and the IP address you want to assign Example MAC Address 00 20 6B AA BB CC IP Address 192 19 200 200 00 20 6B AA BB CC 192 19 200 200 If the RARP daemon is already running stop it Power up the Digital Copier The Digital Copier initializes recognizes the IP address and stores it in non volatile memory After the Digital Copier is fully started power it down again Power the Digital Copier back up and use the following command to ping the Network Card ping lt IP address assigned to Network Card gt Example IP Address 192 9 200 200 ping 192 9 200 200 The following response is returned when the IP address is assigned properly 192 9 200 200 is alive Atter onda is complete delete the lines you added to s You can also stop the RARP daemon Note When the Network Card host name is already registered in the hosts file etc hosts you can use the host name in place of the IP address RARP can be used to assign an IP address only Other IP parameters must be set using Telnet or a Web browser For details see 12 8 Us ing Telnet to Make Settings p 12 61 and PageScope Light for Pi5501 Operator s Manual Pi4700e 12 59 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix Setting Up IP Parameters You cannot use RARP to assign an IP address if the Network Card has already been assigned an IP address by ATIP Using the DHCP Daemon For UNIX Under DHCP Dynamic Host Configurati
102. Based Print ing Mode screen to appear Select Distinguished Queue Name press Enter and type an exist ing queue name This is the name of the print queue where you want the Printer Agent to place jobs O If you press Enter or Insert again you can browse the network tree to search for a queue Highlight User Name press Enter or Insert and type the name of the user who will manage the queue just specified O To browse the network tree for a valid user press Enter or Insert Click Accept and Exit This causes Printer Agent with its associated Print Device Subsystem PDS and Port Handler string to be loaded The Port Handler config uration utility closes and control returns to the NDPS Manager Configuring an NDPS Gateway for IP Configuring Remote Printers Running in Ipr Mode S Note LPR mode works only if TCP IP is configured correctly See the docu mentation on configuring TCP IP on a NetWare server From the browser s Object menu for the organization or organization al unit choose Create This causes the New Object dialog box to appear Choose Object Create NDPS Printer This causes the Create NDPS Printer dialog box to appear Type a name of your choice in the NDPS Printer Name field Pi4700e 8 21 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card o D E o Ren Network Interface Card NetWare configuration 9 Atthe Printer Agent Source field select Create a N
103. Bold Oblique Courier Oblique Eurostile Eurostile Bold Eurostile Extended Two Eurostile Bold Extended Two Geneva Gill Sans Gill Sans Italic Gill Sans Bold Gill Sans Bold Italic Gill Sans Condensed Gill Sans Bold Condensed Gill Sans Extra Bold Gill Sans Light Gill Sans Light Italic Goudy Goudy Italic Goudy Bold Goudy Bold Italic Goudy Extra Bold Helvetica Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold Oblique Helvetica Oblique Helvetica Condensed Helvetica Condensed Oblique Helvetica Condensed Bold Helvetica Condensed Bold Oblique Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique Helvetica Narrow Oblique Hoefler Text Regular Hoefler Text Italic Hoefler Text Black Hoefler Text Black Italic Joanna MT Joanna MT Italic Joanna MT Bold Joanna MT Bold Italic Pi4700e 12 21 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix Preview Listing Letter Gothic Letter Gothic Slanted Letter Gothic Bold Letter Gothic Bold Slanted Lubalin Graph Book Lubalin Graph Book Oblique Lubalin Graph Demi Lubalin Graph Demi Oblique Marigold Monaco Mona Lisa Recut New York New Century Schlbook Bold New Century Schlbook Bold Italic New Century Schlbook Italic New Century Schlbook Roman Optima Optima Italic Optima Bold Optima Bold Italic Oxford Palatino Roman Palatino Italic Palatino Bold Palatino Bold Italic Stempel Garamond Roman Stempel Garamond Italic Stempel Garamond Bold S
104. Booklet Booklet Right Binding Orientation Landscape 12 12 Pi4700e Preview Listing Value Defined for Print Setting Item Screen Specifica Value Defined for Print Setting Item Screen Specifica N up 2up Orientation Portrait N up 2up Orientation Landscape N up 4up Orientation Portrait PageLocation Vert Ascending N up 4up Orientation Portrait PageLocation Vert Descending N up 4up Orientation Portrait PageLocation Horiz Ascending N up 4up Orientation Portrait PageLocation Horiz Descending N up 6up Orientation Portrait PageLocation Horiz Ascending N up 6up Orientation Portrait PageLocation Horiz Descending N up 6up Orientation Portrait PageLocation Vert Ascending N up 6up Orientation Portrait PageLocation Vert Descending Pi4700e 12 13 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix Preview Listing Value Defined for Screen Specifica Value Defined for Screen Specifica Print Setting Item tions Print Setting Item tions N up 9up N up 9up Orientation Orientation Portrait 1 4 7 Portrait qw qo PageLocation J PageLocation H H i Vert ERa PR PUN diame Vert EE HEUS Sere Ascending 2 P Me Descending 8 P 2 SUM Nats WM Ne CPC eae 378 795 3 9 83 1 1 4 4 1 4 4 1 4 4 1 4 4 1 IA IRA i ed DIESE AS IEEE N up 9up N up 9up
105. Booklet Right Bind ing Detail of Output Setting Staple Corner Staple ri Center Long Edge Short Edge Detail of Output Setting Punch Long Edge i ui Short Edge 12 16 Pi4700e Preview Listing Value Defined for Print Setting Item Screen Specifi cations Value Defined for Print Setting Item Screen Specifi cations Detail of Output Setting Folding Justify Output Size Z fold Half folding Crease Collate Uncollated Collated Unsorted Orientation Portrait Landscape All Raster Pi4700e 12 17 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix Preview Listing Value Defined for Print Setting Item Screen Specifi cations Value Defined for Print Setting Item Screen Specifi cations Smoothing Off On 12 18 Pi4700e Preview Listing Specifications for the controller The basic specifications for Pi4700e are given below Model Name Type Printer Language Print Speed CPU ROM RAM Transfer Image Density Interface on host Networks Network Protocol Network Management Power Requirements Power Consumption Exterior Dimensions Weight Operating Environment Temperature Humidity Fonts 4 Ibs 1 8 kg PCL5e PCL6 80 Pi4700e Built in controller PCL5e PCL6 PostScript level 3 Emulation Determined
106. F reserved 1950 other 1951 195A reserved Pi4700e Function combination matrix Windows 12 Appendix Function combination matrix Windows 12 1 O eseol cL Je1deu xipueddy O x x x 0 Buipjo4 HeH X x X x x x A X x ploJd Z Folding HO O eBp3 uous x O OJ O x x o6p3 Buo7 ojojojojojo ojojojojojo ojyojojojojo OJOJOJO x x O x OJO O x x x O OJOJ O O O O x x Punch HO Jejue2 x OJOJO O OJOJ O x O x O x O O x xo x O Finishing eBp3 uous O x x x x ojojo o6p3 Buo7 X x x x x O X x X x x X x X X x O x x xx X x O O x x xx x x O O x x O x X x x O x x O x Staple 19U109 x x HO O pelos x OJOJOJO OJO ojo ojojO OJOJO OJOJO x O O Oj O OJjJO x x O O x O x peieloo x O O x ojojojojo ojojojo pereioour x O JO O OJOJO OJO O JOJO OJO O O x OJOJO OJO JO 0 O OOO O x x O x O pee jenuey x O OIO OJIOJ O x x OJjJO x x 191 OO O O OJO OJOJOJ O ojojopjojo OJO O OJOJOJOJO ojojojojo ojJo O JOJOJO JOJOJO JO OJO ojojojojo oJo O OJOJO JOJOJO JO OJO ojojo X x X x X x 907 x x x x OJO OJOJO x v E Z LAEL x Paper Source x x x x x ony
107. Font List Insert a check mark into the box to print the PCL font list PostScript Font List Insert a check mark into the box to print the PostScript font list Network Config Insert a check mark into the box to print the network configura tion Print Button Click this button to execute a test print operation 10 12 Pi4700e Printer tab 10 Font Information This screen appears when you click the Font Info menu on the Printer tab It shows a list of PCL fonts and PostScript fonts built into the printer controller Ee got Yon Settings Operational Panel Test Print Guy System Job Printer Scanner Network PCL Internal Font PS Top Number Font Mame Lecati gt Font Info PCL PS Cosi oM Printer Reset Comum Ou puse 2 CG Times Bold ROM Local VF ROM lee aN ae 86 Line Printer 2M ROM gem 87 Line Printer SN ROM PCL Download Font Name Fond ID PCL Top PostScript Internal Font Name Albertus MT Light Alberas MT Copperplate Gothic ThirtyThree BC Hoefer Text Omaments PostScript Download Font Name PCL Top PS Top el E inernet zone PCL Internal Font PCL Download Font PostScript Font PostScript Download Unique control number for each downloaded font Font controller Font Name Font name Font ID Font Downloaded font number Location Storage location of the font ROM RAM HDD PCL fonts built into the printer controller PCL fonts downloaded from the computer to the p
108. If there is a PostScript error Set the method for handling error information No special reporting Does not display Error information Summarize on screen Displays Error information on the screen Print detailed report Prints Error information Tip The functions of LaserWriter itself are being used See the documen tation provided for LaserWriter Pi4700e 6 23 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 Print options Save as File The Save as File dialog box allows you to choose settings for file format when you save data as a file but without printing 85 1 Printer MLT_504486 w Destination 1 Format PostScript Job y 2 H PostScript Level amp Level 1 Compatible Level 2 and 3 3 Data Format 6 ASCII i Q Binary 4 Font inclusion None y 1 Format Specify the file format Setting Values PostScript Job EPS Mac Standard preview EPS Mac Enhanced preview EPS No Preview Acrobat PDF Ko 2 PostScript Level o Specify the version of PostScript a Setting values Level 1 Compatible Level 2 and 3 2 3 Data Format 9 Specify the data format ASCII Saves as a text file Binary Saves as a binary file 4 Fontinclusion Set the font to be saved in the file Setting Values None All All But Standard 13 All But Fonts in PPD file Tip The functions of LaserWriter itself are being used See the documen tation provided for Lase
109. JOLO x x O 191 x x OJOJO JO OJO x x OJO x O x O x 991 x x x OJO OJOJO O OJOJO JO OJO x O O v E Z LAIL Paper Source x x x x OJO O JOJO O O JO JO JO OJOJO JO O ony x X X X x OjJO OjJO O O JOJOJOJO x OJoOjOoJjo OJO x ojojojojojojojo OJOJOO A x O x x O OJOIOJ A x O x x x Ol O x G6 x O x x x x OJ O xjGO6 x O x x x x x ojojoJo OJOJOJO OJOJOJO O OJOJOJO AJOJOJOJOJOJO x x x OJO x eE A OJOJOJOJO x O x x x ojofjojJo O OJOJOJOJO OJOJOJO O JO O x x x x OJOJOJO O JO x x O O x x OJO x eEe AJOJOJOJO x x xJOJO x x x x x OjoOjoOJO AJOJOJO JOJOJO x OJOJO x OJO x OjojoOJO AJOJOJO JOJO xJOJOJO x OJO x x OjojoJo O xJO x OJOJOJO OJOJO O OJOJOJO x x x x OJO x OJO x x x x O x x O x x x x O JO O O JOJOJO O JOJO JO OJO JOJOJO x x O Auto Tray1 2 3 4 Manual Feed oj Uncollated Collated Sorted Staple Off Long Edge Short Edge Center Off Long Edge Short Edge Corner Off Z Fold Half Folding O O x x AJOJOJO JO x x x x O x x x x Crease Punch Folding Long Edge Binding Short Edge Binding aounos Jaded suondo oyioedgs jejuud 3 a 3 a Distribution Number OHP Interleaving Cover mode 12 7 Pi4700e Chapter 12 Appendix Function combination matrix Linux e x 5 2 O 0 0
110. Job List Orig Copy T ne Fine ue Device 999 52 10 05 Lock Printer 3 Input passwo Unlock Nak Note rd To unlock your Job enter your Pa rd s Password it All jobs whose preprogrammed passwords match the password en tered are unlocked 4 The job is unlocked and printing will start 7 24 Pi4700e Using the lock job print PC confidential function 7 Procedure on the machine side Deleting a job After the data has been transferred to the machine it can be deleted with out being printed N x 9 hi on o lt 1 Press the Job List key on the control panel Job List B Convenient Functions 2 Touch the Delete key S Note If the Job List does not appear touch Next or Back Up Job List Orig Copy T ne Fine s Device OLN ST Tock Printer tee Time En Pi4700e 7 25 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions Using the lock job print PC confidential function Select job to be deleted Stat us Input Fi Orig Copy Fhe Fina Device Enter a 4 digit password from the 10 key Pad Job Delete To unlock your Job enter your Po Ord Password it This deletes the job from the job list 7 26 Pi4700e Using the folding function 7 7 13 Using the folding function N x 9 M o3 oO lt Overview A multi page document prepa
111. Jumper switch OP2 can be used to reset all Network Card parameters to their initial factory default settings The function of OP2 is to reconfigure 8 50 Pi4700e Jumper switch setting 8 NVRAM Reset the Network Card before moving the printer to another en vironment or any other time is becomes necessary to reconfigure it to suit another environment Network Card Reset Procedure Power down the Digital Copier and unplug it from its power outlet Disconnect the network cable from the Network Card Remove the Network Card from the printer by performing the steps in Setup Instructions in reverse Locate the reset jumper switch labeled OP2 on the Network Card See the illustration under Network Card and Jumper Pin Positions Change the OP2 jumper switch to its F 1 and 2 gt T position OP2 set to pins 6 Use the procedures in Setup Instructions to re install the Network Card Do not connect the network cable to the Digital Copier at this time Plug in the Digital Copier and power it up The Network Card performs a self test indicated by the green LED flashing three times following by the green LED and amber LED flash ing alternately After the green and amber LEDs start to flash power down the Digital Copier and unplug it from its power outlet Remove the Network Card from the Digital Copier again 9 Return the OP2 jumper switch to pins 2 and 3 4 1 O Use the procedures in Setup Instructions to re i
112. Maintenance ABER EGRE a ite E Intemetzone 7 Password Input the password assigned to the network interface card The initial factory default is sysadm Clicking the Apply button after inputting the wrong password displays a password error mes sage without changing the settings Enable AppleTalk Check this option to enable AppleTalk on the network interface card Printer Name Input the printer name you want Zone Name Input the name of AppleTalk zone in which you want to locate the printer Apply button Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this point Clear button Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this point 3 30 Pi4700e Specifying network settings from PageScope Light 3 IPP Configuration This screen appears when you click the IPP Configuration menu on the Network tab It lets you change Internet Printing Protocol IPP settings You can configure the printer functions that are controlled by IPP and the printer information that can be seen from IPP clients E BEE VAT amp On line pers System Job Printer Scanner Network Summary A parco to pasform this function TCPMP Configuration Password o NetWare Configuration AppleTalk Configuration TPP Configuration WINS Configuration E persons Supported F Prnt Tob F Cava Job F Cet Taba F Valise Teb F Get Tob Attributes E Get Printer antes Docmem Tomat Suppo
113. NS Configuration Reset Maintenance el zx O Emme 700 Password Input the password assigned to the network interface card The initial factory default is sysadm Clicking the Apply button after inputting the wrong password displays a password error mes sage without changing the settings Restore Factory Defaults Click the Restore button to restore the network interface card to its initial factory defaults S Note After performing a Reset or Maintenance turn the digital copier off then on again Pi4700e 3 35 Chapter 3 Network Settings Chapter 3 Network Settings Specifying network settings from PageScope Light 3 36 Pi4700e Description of each tab 4 Properties Settings 4 1 Description of each tab Each tab enables you to change the settings indicated below For a de tailed description of each function see the corresponding reference page Property tab Outline of settings that can be changed Reference page Setup Allows you to set the paper take up tray and paper exit tray Also allows you to set high level printing functions such as two sided printing booklet creation N up print ing OHP interleaving Watermark Cover Mode Staple Punch and Folding p 4 7 Paper Allows you to set basic printing items such as number of copies paper size print orientation and print zoom ratio Also allows you to set functions related to sorting p 4 16
114. Name x Easy Set Name Tip If the same Easy Set Name already exists a dialog box asking wheth er it should be over written or not will appear Convenient Functions f Click the OK button 8 The Print dialog box will then reappear To start printing immediately click the OK button The data will be transferred to the machine and printing will soon start If printing is not to be done now click the Can cel button S Note Settings can be stored from the printer properties dialog box opened from the Printers window With PS it is not possible to save the settings if the function has been activated from the application Start the function using the printer icon The same procedure also applies when the printer properties dialog box is used However be sure to click the Cancel button to close the properties dialog box If it is closed by clicking the OK button the set tings will become the default values when the properties dialog box is accessed from the application Pi4700e 7 31 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions 7 Using the settings function Deleting settings which have been stored 1 Start printing from the application which has been used to create the document Normally printing can be started by selecting Print from the File menu 2 The Print dialog box will appear Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer and click the Properties button S Note Some Applica
115. O O Distribution Number o gt HHBE HEHEE SIEIEIEIE ps t als 35558 o Auto ojo x x 5 Tray1 2 3 4 olololxlo 9 LCC OJO x O SLOT ololo x o E Manual Feed AIA ojo Uncollated Ojo xjojo Collated Ojojo xo Sorted Ojo xjojo Staple Off ojojojojo 2 Corner O O O x O H Long Edge O x O x O Z Short Edge x oJo x o 9 Center O OJ O x O Punch Off olo ololo Long Edge O x O x O a Short Edge xlolo x o Folding Off ojojojojo Z Fold O x O x x Half Folding x x O x x Crease O O O x O 3 Long Edge Binding x Ox O E Short Edge Binding x O x O Distribution Number ojo x O OHP Interleaving x x x x Cover mode O O O x DO xo The combination is possible The combination is impossible The settings made are rejected Cannot be used if the LCT rejects loading of paper in the lengthwise direction Does not function if special paper setting has been made 12 8 Pi4700e Number of registrations 12 12 4 Number of registrations Number of registrations Usable range for Easy Set Windows 95 98 Windows 2000 XP NT 4 0 Registration Use Registration Use Printer icon 16 1 driver O Application 16 1 driver Administrator Printer icon Application Power Users Printer icon 16 1 driver Application 16 1 driver Printer icon 32 1 driver Application Administrator Printer ic
116. Outline The following shows the general outline of this chapter e Getting ready e Setting up the network card Read the section that covers your particular network environment e Windows configuration e NetWare configuration e Macintosh configuration Refer to these sections as required e Using the utility software Read the following sections when necessary e Troubleshooting e Jumper switch setting e Specifications 8 2 Getting ready This Network Card is a multi protocol network card that provides Ethernet connection for the Minolta Pi4700e printer controller and offers the follow ing features e Automatic Ethernet type detection 10BaseT 100BaseT e Fully transparent AppleTalk printing support for the Macintosh includ ing support for binary PostScript printing e Peer to peer printing program allows printing on a network without go ing through a server O Peer to Peer Printing with TCP IP Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 O Peer to Peer Printing with IPX SPX Windows 95 98 Me e Novell NetWare PSERVER support under bindery base or Novell Di rectory Services NDS e Ipr lpd functions under TCP IP e SNMP control using MIB II and private MIB SNMP support using standard MIB on a compatible printer or printer specific MIB Pi4700e 8 1 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card 8 Getting ready e Onboard HTTP server allowing configuration of network function set tings using a Web browser e Direct p
117. Page This function is used to print a document with front and back cover pages You can 9 print on the front cover or leave it blank 2 Front Cover Page Activates the front cover function c with Image Prints on the front cover lt O Front Cover Page Back Cover Page Adds a back cover with Image Prints on the back cover Back Cover Page Cover Paper Source Select the tray for the front cover and back cover pa a pers 6 Available settings Tray1 to Tray4 LCC LCT Manual e Feed g 2 Interleaving Paper E This function inserts sheets interleaving sheets between sheets of OHP film when a printing on OHP film You can either leave these sheets blank or print the same image D as that printed on the OHP film t OHP Interleaving Activates the OHP interleaving function A with Image Prints an image on the interleaving sheet e Interleaving Paper Select the tray for the interleaving paper Source Available settings Tray1 to Tray4 LCC LCT S Note for 1 When using special paper such as thick paper the paper sometimes fails to be exited to the selected paper exit destination You can set Tray1 to Tray4 LCC LCT and Manual Feed using Paper Source 5 26 Pi4700e Properties settings 5 S Tip for 1 The tray containing the paper on which the body of the document is to be printed is displayed in green on the Printer Figure S Note for 2 When using the OHP interleavi
118. Printer Driver for Linux 5 Properties settings S Note If the Dup 2way Tray Dup LCC and Duplex Cabinet are not cor rectly selected it may not be possible to select the Finisher correctly Mailbox Setting dialog box when Mailbin Finisher is installed Allows you to set the names of the mailbins in Mailbin Finisher Mailbox Setting Option Name Mailbin Finisher Mailbox Name Mai Bin 1 Mail Bin 1 Mail Bin 2 Mail Bin 3 Mail Bin 4 Mail Bin 5 Cancel Te D o Ren x lt Eo o HAM 1 MailBox o This is the bin name editing box 2 Setting range max 32 characters a 2 Apply D Press to finalize a changed name t 3 Binlist E a Displays a list of names of currently set bins To change the name of a bin select the name to be changed 5 20 Pi4700e Properties settings Functions that are common to various tabs These functions are common to tabs from Setup tab to Job Management tab Setup Paper Device Options Setting Job Management r Easy Set Device Options User Name Default 4 Installable Options 1 Dup LCC Duplex Cabinet ISingle staple Finisher Mailbin Finisher Folding Finisher Adding or removing an opiton causes all settings to restore default settings Installed Options Dup 2way Tray LCT
119. Queue Name and Print Queue Volume fields and then click the Create button O f you do not know the print queue volume name the name of the hard disk you will be accessing click the icon to the right of the Print Queue Volume field to display the Select Object window shown below Objects lists volumes that you can choose O If you cannot find the volume you want in the list click Directory Context items until you find the volume where you want the queue to reside Selected Object LEFT SYS Current Context QUALITY Hame Filter Directory Context Filter Objects Directory Context o MAIN SYS LEFT SYS RIGHT SYS MAIN SYS B maur svs oK Cancel Change Context Help Pi4700e Chapter 8 Network Interface Card Chapter 8 Network Interface Card NetWare configuration 5 Click the object hard drive you want and it appears in the Selected Object field 6 Click OK and the full volume appears in the Print Queue Volume field Finally click the Create button Create Print Queue Directory Service Queue C Reference a Bindery Queue Print Queue Hame TESTO Print Queue Volume LEFT SYS QUALITY Define Additional Properties I Create Another Print Queue Assigning a Printer Object 1 Navigate to the directory tree and double click a printer object you just created This displays the Printer window
120. Settings x Print Server Name Print Server Password Print Queue Scan Rate EA j 1 Ethernet Frame Type Auto Sense C Ethernet Il C 8022 C 8023 C 802 2 SNAP Jack Cancel Help e Print Server Name Specifies the NetWare print server name This name is used when the Network Card logs into NetWare Make sure the name you input is dif ferent from anything in the network directory and server bindery This field accepts input of up to 48 characters e Print Queue Scan Rate Specifies the rate when the Network Card polls the print queue Spec ifying 1 for this field for example polls for a new print job once every second You can specify a value within the range of 1 to 250 e Print Server Password and Print Server Password Retype Specifies the password when the Network Card logs into NetWare Changing the contents of this field changes the password for both Net Ware and the Network Card This field accepts input of up to 32 char acters This dialog box does not close if the contents of the Password and Password Retype fields are not identical 8 40 Pi4700e Using the utility software 8 e Ethernet Frame Type Specifies the Ethernet frame type used as the default by the NetWare protocol stack Only one frame type can be selected Clicking the Next button displays the screen show below Print Server Settings Enable Bindery Mode Preferred NDS Context Primary File Server NONE Y Preferred NDS Tree
121. a Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear 7 10 Pi4700e Printing pages with watermarks 7 4 Make sure that all setting items such as Original Document Size are correctly set on the Paper tab N x 9 2 on o lt 5 Click the Setup tab and select DO NOT COPY in Watermark 6 Select the page on which to print the watermark f If you want to change the position or style of an existing watermark click the Edit button Watermark dialog box from which you can edit text will appear Specify Text and text style Angle and Position Tip If you cannot find an appropriate watermark click New button You can create new watermark Convenient Functions For the position specify the distance from the center 8 After the settings have been made click the OK button to close the di alog box 9 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button 10 The Print dialog box will reappear Click the OK button 11 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon start S Note This function may not be effective in some applications Pi4700e 7 11 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions Specifying booklet printing 7 7 Specifying booklet printing Overview This section explains how to layout and print four pages of a document on both sides of a single sheet of paper so that the printout may be folded at its center to form a booklet To use this fun
122. a proper print queue assigned to the printer We recommend that you do not assign a print queue that is also as signed to other printers Doing so can cause a print job to be sent to another printer Fe r Unknown selected as the printer type E settings are correct the problem may be due to a break in the connection between the Digital Copier and network Power down the Digital Copier start up PCONSOLE and wait until the Not ted message appears Next power the Digital Copier back up again The connection is normal if the displayed message changes to r Job Otherwise there is a problem with the connection A Is there enough disk space on the file server and is the server operat ing normally 5 Is the printer associated with the correct file server Use PCONSOLE to check 6 Do you have the proper privileges for setting up printers 7 Are the file server and print server communicating normally On any computer on the network run the NetWare CC to check for proper communication Are there sufficient user positions on the file server The print server logs on as a user 9 Is bindery context set up on the file server With some versions of NetWare you must set up the bindery context on the file server even when you are using the NDS Mode 10 Is the network loaded on the client computer See the NetWare documentation for more information 11 Are client application settings correct For example check to
123. able dialog box Font Substitution T able fx 1 For this TrueType font Use printer font Courier New Courier Frame5 Font Don t Substitute Impact Don t Substitute Lucida Console Don t Substitute Don t Substitute Symbol Don t Substitute Times New Roman Don t Substitute z wehdinas Dian t Suhstihite AaBbCel 23 2 p nterfontfor Times New Roman Times New Roman y Cancel Help Defaults 1 For this TrueType font Used to display and select the substitution table settings 2 Printer font for Select the substitution printer font Pi4700e 4 33 Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings 4 PostScript tab Functions of the Send Fonts As dialog box Send Fonts As _2 x TrueType fonts 1 Send TrueType fonts as Outlines wi 2 ae Threshold to switch between downloading bitmap or outline fonts measured in pixels in pixels size at the current resolution 100 pixels Cancel Help Defaults 1 TrueType fonts 2 Select the method of sending TrueType fonts Available settings Don t Send Outlines Bitmaps Type42 Set the reference font size of the TrueType font for changing over from a Bitmap font to an Outline font Setting range 0 to 999 pixels 4 34 Pi4700e PostScript tab Functions of the Advanced PostScript dialog box 1 2
124. address of the printer controller and then specify an appropriate name in Scanner Name S Note The Scanner Name box can be left blank o2 LE o 2 o lt Click the OK button and then click the Connect button x Scanner Address 172 16 0 62 Scanner Name controller ce Scanner Mode 3 In Box Number type the four digit address that was entered when the document was scanned with the digital copier and then click the Re newal of Mail box button Di470 Scanner Driver a x Connection Scanner controller 172 16 0 62 Scanner change Mailbox Box Number 9999 Renewal of Mailbox Paper 470 0305150934 2003 05 15 09 34 06 1 A4 Portrait 600 470_0305151210 2003 05 15 12 08 42 1 AA Portrait 600 Page Delete File All Page C Page Select Taking In About Close 9 38 Pi4700e Mailbox Destinations 9 S 4 Note Box numbers entered as 1 01 001 or 0001 will be treated as the same box Select the file and then click the Taking In button The data is downloaded and the scan data is displayed in the applica tion Under reading E 17 1 E gt gt Cancel The scan image data is automatically deleted after the specified length of time has passed To delete the data select the file and then click the Delete File button Pi4700e 9 39 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode 9 How to input characters
125. ageScope Light 3 NetWare Configuration Sub menus appear when you click the NetWare Configuration menu on the Network tab Use the sub menus to display and configure the network interface card settings for NetWare printing E BEE File Edt View Go Favores Help On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network Summary A password is required to perform this function TCP IP Configuration Password NEUES pP F Enable NetWare NetWare Setting NetWare Status Punt Server Name AppleTalk Configuration Print Server Password IPP Configuration WINS Configuration Password Retype Reset Preferred File Server Maintenance Preferred NDS Context Preferred NDS Tree Print Queue Scan Rate 1 Ethernet Frame Type Auto Sense Y Disable Bindery r Angl cies e OK Intemet zone E NetWare Setting This screen appears when you click the NetWare Setting sub menu un der the NetWare Configuration menu It lets you change a number of NetWare environment settings Password Input the password assigned to the network interface card The initial factory default is sysadm Clicking the Apply button after inputting the wrong password displays a password error mes sage without changing the settings Enable NetWare Check this option to enable IPX SPX on the network interface card The NetWare environment is disabled while this option is unchecked Print Server Name Input the print server name you want The default print
126. ageScope Light for Pi4700e screen to appear Operation PageScope Light for Pi4700e operation is identical to that for Internet Web pages Clicking a hot link jumps to the link destination and the Back and l d buttons scroll through pages backwards and forward Logging In to the Admin Mode After you log in to PageScope Light in the Admin Mode you can change the configuration of the Digital Copier settings Type the administrator password into the Admin Password box The initial default administrator password is sysadm See Preference for information about how to change the password Click the Log in button to log in to the Admin Mode When you want to log out click the Log out button Note Log out is performed automatically if no operation is performed for more than 10 minutes On the Network tab a password input text box appears on each set ting screen You must be able to input the correct password in order to change Network tab settings The password you should input here is the same as the Admin Password you input on other tabs Pi4700e 3 23 Chapter 3 Network Settings e ES o 2 o Ren Network Settings 3 Specifying network settings from PageScope Light Network Tab Use the Network tab for configuring the Pi4700e network interface S Note On the Network tab you must type the password into the Password box that appears on the setting screen you select on
127. al l Details l Color Management Sharing Setup Paper Quality Device Options Setting Job Management Overlay 1 Easy Set c Device Options Installable Options Save C Page Layout Printer Figure PS version Minolta Di550 Di470 Di450 PS Properties General Details Sharing Setup Paper Quality Device Options Setting Job Management PostScript 1 Easy Set Dup 2way Tray LCT Duplex Cabinet Mailbin Finisher Multi staple Finisher Single staple Finisher A k Le Dire des C Installed Options Dup LEC User Name Device Options Untitled had C Page Layout Printer Figure Installable Options Dup LCC LCT Multi staple Finisher Single staple Finisher A Add Installed Options Duplex Cabinet Es Adding or removing an option causes all settings to restore the default settings 4 2 Pi4700e Device Options Setting tab 1 Device Options Set the options installed in the machine Installable Options Add Remove Installed Options Mailbox Setting 2 User Name The user name set in the printer driver is displayed as the job user name on the ma chine s touch panel Setting range 8 characters max 3 About Click to display the manufacturer and version number of the printer driver S Note This is a list of installable options Select the d
128. alled gt The documents are stapled at the center 2 Punch when Mailbin Finisher Multi staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is installed This function allows you to punch holes in the printed document Off Short Edge Long Edge Punch Holes Inch area only The document is not punched The document is punched along the short edge The document is punched along the long edge Set the number of holes to be punched 3 Folding when Folding Finisher is installed Select the desired paper folding function Off Just Output Size Z Fold Half Folding Crease Printed pages are not folded Printed pages are folded into three parts Printed pages are folded in two at their center A crease is made in printed pages 5 28 Pi4700e Properties settings 5 S Note for 1 If Staple is set printed pages are fed out into the Elevator Tray The stapling position is either the top left corner or the top right corner depending upon the direction of the paper and the printing direction If the capacity of Mailbin Finisher Single staple Finisher Multi staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is exceeded the stapling operation may be canceled Refer to the User Manual of the machine If you print a document consisting of pages of different sizes in the same printing job stapling may be canceled Be careful when printing a document consisting of pages facing differ ent directions because th
129. alog Box Number of registrations Depending on environment used number of registra tions will be different Refer to Appendix A p 12 11 for details 3 Edit Edits Custom Paper selected in 1 When it is selected the dialog box changes to the Custom Paper Setting Dialog Box 4 Delete Deletes Custom Paper selected in 1 Pi4700e 4 19 Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings Paper tab Custom Paper Setting dialog box Edit Custom Paper Setting dialog PCL 6 version box PS version Custom Paper sd Edit Custom Paper 5 few Papert K ven Fa z m Cancel 4076 11111 inch Help Ce ww pn 5 Name Untitled Paper 0 Size wan fe a fo sans 14 11 12716 6 Heh fit fo a6 512 16 17 5 Name Enter the Name of the Custom Paper Setting range Max 20 characters 6 Size Set the paper size Setting range Width 4 to 11 11 16 Unit inch 100 to 297 Unit mm Height 5 13 16 to 17 Unit inch 148 to 432 Unit mm 7 Unit Switches input units of paper size between inch and metric 4 20 Pi4700e Quality tab 4 4 6 Quality tab PCL6 version Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties x General Details Color Management Sharing Setup Paper Quality Device Options Setting Job Management Overlay Easy Set 34 E Resolution Smoothing
130. alog box from an Application Menu As an example the procedure for the PCL6 printer driver is described be low 1 Select Print from the File menu of the application 2 Make sure that the Name of Printer is Minolta Di470 PCL6 If Minolta Di470 PCL6 is not listed click W and from the menu that will then ap pear select Minolta Di470 PCL6 3 Click the Properties button This shows the properties dialog box This method allows you to set the number of copies and paper for each document Note that the settings made on the properties dialog box accessed through the application are valid only for that particular application Pi4700e 2 21 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Windows NT 4 0 S Tip To set the Device Option Setting which need not be changed unless device is changed open it from the Printers window to set To show a properties dialog box other than Setup click the corre sponding tab located on the top part of the screen S Note The steps to display a properties dialog box may be different depend ing on the application Follow the correct procedure according to the application The procedure above is based on the application Word Pad With PostScript printer driver the contents are different between when the properties dialog box is accessed from Print Manager and when it is accessed from an application 2 22 Pi4700e Introdu
131. alog box to configure a print server printer This information is normally input using the NetWare NWADMIN or the PCON SOLE utility NWSetup can also be used to make Network Card printer settings even though it does not include the above NetWare utilities The following explains each of the settings e Enable Printer Enables and disables a Network Card and printer support O Checking this box enables the printer O Unchecking this box disables the printer and causes all other fields on this dialog box to appear dimmed e Printer Name Queues Serviced by Printer Shows the printer name You cannot change the content of this field It lists all the queues serviced by the printer O Abindery connection queue is shown using the syntax bindery server name queue name O An NDS connected queue entry includes the distinguished name Example When the printer services a queue named YOURPTR_Q on a bindery server named OLD SERVER this list shows the entry OLD SERVER YOURPTR Q When the printer services a queue named ENGINEERING Q on an NDS server with the distinguishing name ENGINEERING CORP this list shows the entry ENGINEERING Q ENGINEERING CORP e User Groups Notified by Printer This field lists all of the users and user groups to which notification is sent when a printer error is detected O A bindery connected user or user group is shown using the syntax bindery server name user group name O AnNDS connected user or user group entry
132. an apsfilter entru K Ik gt Cancel Pi4700e Printer setting with X window System 5 3 Printer interface setting screen will appear Select Parallel gm s i i File Sessions Options Help Do you have a serial or a parallel printer interface arallel printer interfacel Serial printer interface to an other queue bypass printer forvarding queue I ak gt Cancel Nu Note When network is used select Remote instead of Parallel Then set HostName and printer queue Input PORT1 for printer queue 4 Make sure that Interface is set to parallel port Konsole 5 File Sessions Options Help SuSE APSfilter Setup What s the device name for your parallel printer interface Device Name Major Minor I O address dev 1p0 6 0 Ox3bc 1 parallel device dev lp1 6 T 0x378 2 parallel device dev 1p2 6 2 0x278 3 parallel device Type in the full path name i e dev lpi serae Cancel Pi4700e 5 18 Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux 5 Printer setting with X window System 5 Screen for specifying each setting will appear Select Postscript for printer type For which printer type do you want to setup apsfilter Back to main menu or a real PostScript printer For a HP deskjet printer Another non PostSript printer Free definition of driver name IC ak gt Cancel A Screen will change to resolution
133. annot be rewritten Network Interface Card NIC An optional card to which network interface can be added used for con necting a printer to network environment 12 26 Pi4700e Preview Listing 12 offline The state of the printer controller in which it does not receive data or ex ecute any processing online The state of the printer controller in which it is capable of receiving data and processing jobs operation system A program or group of programs that control the functions of the computer and its peripheral devices such as the printer parallel interface A type of standards that govern the ways for two different systems to ex change information in which multiple bits are transmitted at one time Be cause of that synchronization is necessary which makes the scheme not right for data transmission over a long distance The most common paral lel interface is Centronics port A connector through which data is exchanged between a computer and peripheral equipment The parallel port permits multiple bit data to be transmitted at one time commonly used in printers The serial port is generally used to connect a modem or other device portrait paper orientation A vertical print orientation in which printing is oriented so that the short edges of a sheet of paper are on top and bottom PostScript font A scalable outline font standard widely adopted in the printing industry By downloading Po
134. ap file The following shows an example entry printer name gt Print Server Card printer lp dev lt printer name N if usr nic infilter sd usr spool lt printer name gt All printcap entries start with a tab except for the first The script creates a spool directory in usr spool and starts a daemon for the newly configured printer At this time the script displays the path you should use if you ever need to restart the daemon Example usr nic lpr print dev nic printer name print fast 10001 amp Run the ps command to view all your Ipd Ipr processes ps ax grep lpd Pi4700e 12 43 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix UNIX Configuration 9 Next input the following to kill all your Ipd Ipr processes kill 9 Process ID This stops all printing 10 Next type the following to restart the daemon usr lib lpd 11 This completes installation In response to the message about wheth er you want to install another printer input yes or no and then press Ping the Network Card to test communication DEC ULTRIX 4 3 1 Type the following to run the installation script nicinst The script automatically downloads the appropriate Network Card util ities for your system and displays questions to prompt you for the in formation it needs N What is the node name of the Print Server Unit Input the host name recorded in etc hosts For example type print fast and then pr
135. appears and then press fener 1 AT amp T SVR4 386 2 SCO UNIX System V 3 None of the above What is the node name of the Network Card Input the host name recorded in etc hosts and then press Enter For example type printfast What is the printer name for this Network Card linked printer Type the printer name and press Eve Here the script displays the information you have input up to this point Node name of the Printer Server Card printfast Printer name to be used lt printer name gt The printer is attached on PORT 1 Check these settings and make sure they are correct If they are cor rect type yes and press Eve Otherwise type no and press Ever 3 Is this printer PostScript Type yes and press Ee if the printer is a PostScript printer Other wise type no and press Ere Pi4700e 12 49 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix UNIX Configuration The script automatically starts the daemon for the newly configured printer At this time the script displays the path you should use if you ever need to restart the daemon usr nic lpr print dev nic lt printer name print fast 10001 amp The above example reflects the name supplied to the script earlier After the installation script is complete you must configure the printer and make it known to the Ip system The SCO UNIX Ip system uses the Ipad min command used to configure a printer There is no le ntcap file The
136. ard Disk Drive in Copier is installed Specifies to add a distribution in the background during printing and also sets the conditions for adding distribution number A distribution number is added for each set of prints Distribution Number Select the distribution number function 1st Page Only Select whether to print the distribution number on only the first page or on all pages Starting Number Specify the starting number of the distribution numbers to be printed Setting range 001 to 999 Pi4700e 5 33 Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux Te D o lt Printer Driver for Linux Properties settings S Note When using this function in combination with the cover page function if you set printing of the cover page to No using the cover page func tion and set serial number printing to Yes a distribution number will be printed on the cover page The orientation of the screen sometimes fails to match the orientation of the distribution number Tip When the distribution number reaches 999 the next number returns to 000 5 34 Pi4700e Properties settings 5 Conflicts dialog box The Conflicts dialog box like the one shown below appears when a set ting that conflicts with another made previously is made on a tab When the following dialog box appears it shows that the currently select ed settings conflict with each other Conflicts Your current select
137. at the machine printing may sometimes fail to take place until the access number designated at the machine is correctly set Enter the access number set in the machine Setting range 0 to 9 for each box Password If Lock Job is to be used enter a four digit lock job password Entering 0 for all four digits indicates that there is no password A locked printing job will be printed when it is unlocked using the Job List display on the panel of the machine In this case a password is necessary Enter the password of the lock job Setting range 0 to 9 for each box Pi4700e 6 31 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 Print options 15 User Name The user name set in the printer driver is displayed as the job user name on the ma chine s touch panel Setting range 4 numbers max S Note If nothing is entered the setting is turned off Conflicts dialog box A message as shown below will appear when functions that are incompat ible with each other are specified It appears when you have made a wrong selection o This option is not available when Paper Source is set to Tray1 If you wish to continue Paper Source will be set to Manual Feed The message gives the detail of the functions that are incompatible with each other Check the detail and click Continue or Cancel to exit the mes sage Ke D o Ren Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 32 Pi4700e Print options
138. ayout paper size to be used when printing is performed without a paper size specified by the client Duplex Use this setting to turn two side printing on and off and to spec Restore Factory De fault Button Apply Button Clear Button ify either long edge binding or short edge binding Click this button to return settings to their initial factory defaults Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this point Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this point Pi4700e 10 9 Chapter 10 PageScope Light e y ex lt iS PageScope Light 10 Printer tab e Printer Setting This screen appears when you click the Printer Setting sub menu under the Settings menu Use this screen to configure the printer controller Ble Edt View Go Favorites Hep Y Settings Paper Handling Page Layout Printer Setting Operational Panel Test Print Font Info PCL PS Printer Reset Maintenance Local LF Admin Password DA 3 On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network Printer Settings Printer Language Auto y Download Font PS Header Hold on A RAM PostScript Setting Error Print r PCL Settings Orientation Landscape Portrait Font Size 12 Font Pitch 10 00 Font No 1 0 44 Symbol Set Roman 8 y Form Length 60 Restore Factory Default Apply Clear Internet zone Z Printer Settings Section P
139. ble below click Resolve To return to the previous selection click CANCEL Item New Selection OHP Interleaving Off Cancel When the Conflicts dialog box appears it shows the settings that could not be combined with each other Check the details and click the Resolve button or the Cancel button to quit Some settings which are defied by the machine for the restricted com binations of different functions can at times be accepted by the printer driver If a print command is issued from the personal computer with such settings made the machine does not produce the output correct ly or abandons the job to produce nothing Make sure that you make correct settings The dialog box looks slightly differently from this one when Device Op tions Setting is being set or the PS driver is being used 4 36 Pi4700e Installing the printer driver EE Printer Driver for Linux 5 5 1 Installing the printer driver Operating environment This section explains the required environment for the printer driver Before installing the printer driver make sure that your computer meets the following requirements If it does not the printer driver may not func tion properly Personal computer IBM PC or a compatible with a Pentium 200MHz or higher CPU Operating system Redhat Linux ver 6 1 6 2 Turbo Linux ver 4 0 6 0 Open Linux ver 2 3 2 4 SuSE Linux ver 6 3 6 4 Memory 64MB or m
140. bound Convenient Functions f Ifyou want to staple the printed pages click Detail Of Output Setting to open the dialog box and select Corner Staple in Staple Then click the OK button S Note When Long Edge Binding is selected Short Edge cannot be selected for punch hole When Short Edge Binding is selected Long Edge cannot be selected for punch hole Tip To make holes in the printed pages select Long Edge or Short Edge in Punch on Detail of Output Setting 8 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button 9 The Print dialog box will reappear Click the OK button 10 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon start Pi4700e 7 3 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions Printing more than one copy ata time 7 3 Printing more than one copy at a time Overview This section explains how to print two or more copies of a document that has been created with an application Most applications allow this function to be executed from the Print dialog box This section explains how to print two or more set copies of documents created with an application Most ap plications allow this function to be executed from the Print dialog box The steps described in the following are use to print two or more collated sets of copies by using the Collate function on the printer driver Print data Printout 15 EN I1 Procedure Start printing from the application which has b
141. bs from the Setup tab to the Job Man agement tab and also the Overlay tab or the PostScript tab Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties x General Details Color Management Sharing Setup Paper Quality Device Options Setting Job Management Overlay Easy Set _ Device Options 3 Tnstallable Options Dup 2way Tray LCT 1 2H8 Save Duplex Cabinet Mailbin Finisher Multi staple Finisher Single staple Finisher Y u in Panior Add Remove Installed Options Dup LCC 2 C Page Layout Printer Figure 1 Easy Set Allows you to call and use the settings stored in each tab Easy Set Name Allows you to call the settings stored in each tab e Save Delete Used to save delete the settings of tabs When you touch the Save button to save the contents of a tab the Save Easy Set Name dialog box appears For details See page 4 6 When you touch Delete the stored set contents are de leted 2 Paper preview Machine preview Allows you to display change over the paper preview and machine preview Page Layout The layout of the printed data on a single page is dis played as an image This allows you to checkthe status for N up printing and two sided printing for example See page 12 12 for the Page Layout list Printer Figure When the paper take up tray and the paper exit tray are set the paper take up tray and pape
142. by selecting the Printer Type and Port Han dler Type and click the OK button This starts the Configure Novell Port Handler configuration wizard 8 Inthe Connection Type field click Forward Jobs to a Queue and then click the Next button The Port Type options are grayed out when you select the Queue connection type This displays a screen with the Queue Name and Queue User Name fields 9 Provide the queue name and queue user name Pi4700e 8 17 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card 8 NetWare configuration Browse for the target print queue If no queues are listed no queues exist in the current context Browse the tree to find a queue in a differ ent context The queue you select must exist in the current tree oth erwise you will need to create a bindery reference queue in your own container to allow access to the actual queue See Bindery Reference Queues on page 8 19 S Note The user you specify may need to log in to the server on which this o D E o lt queue resides This user must have full privileges to manage this queue 10 Click the Finish button This causes the Select Printer Drivers dialog box to appear 11 Select the printer driver for each client operating system Network Interface Card O When users install this printer these drivers will be automatically downloaded to their workstations O If the driver you need is not listed rather than adding t
143. by the specifications of the digi tal copier PowerPC 740 200 MHz 8 MB 32 MB on Board Max 160 MB DIMM 600 x 600 dpi Centronics Interface 10 100BaseT UTP TCP IP IPX SPX AppleTalk To be managed from SNMP compatible Web browser 5V 5 5A max 3 3Vx396 2A max 20W max Width 8 5 8 in 220 mm x Depth 12 5 8 in 820 mm x Height 2 3 8 in 60 mm Chapter 12 50 F 10 C to 95 F 35 C 15 to 85 RH no condensation Appendix Adobe PostScript Level 3 Emulation Type 1 font 136 Symbol Set 8 12 19 Chapter 12 Appendix Preview Listing Font PCL font 80 Courier CG Times CG Times Bold CG Times Italic CG Times Bold Italic CG Omega CG Omega Bold CG Omega Italic CG Omega Bold Italic Coronet Clarendon Condensed Univers Medium Univers Bold Univers Medium Italic Univers Bold Italic Univers Medium Condensed Univers Bold Condensed Univers Medium Condensed Italic Univers Bold Condensed Italic Antique Olive Antique Olive Bold Antique Olive Italic Garamond Antiqua Garamond Halbfett Garamond Kursiv Garamond Kursiv Halbfett Marigold Albertus Medium Albertus Extra Bold Arial Arial Bold Arial Italic Arial Bold Italic Times New Roman Times New Roman Bold Times New Roman Italic Times New Roman Bold Italic Symbol Wingdings ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic Courier Italic Courier Bold Courier Bold Italic Letter Gothic L
144. cable Configuring the network card You must first configure the Network Card and your computer before you can print using the Network Card The settings you need to make depend on the configuration of your network environment sections 4 through 6 of this chapter describe configurations for the environments listed below Follow the configurations procedure for the operating system you are us ing e Section 4 Windows configuration Network printing in a Windows 95 98 Me 2000 XP NT environment e Section 5 NetWare configuration Network printing in a NetWare environment e Section 6 Macintosh configuration Network printing in a Macintosh environment Pi4700e Windows configuration 8 8 4 8 5 Windows configuration Refer to 3 Network Settings p 3 1 for details on how to perform net work printing in a Windows environment NetWare configuration This section provides details on how to configure a Novell NetWare server in order to print from a NetWare client Follow the procedures listed below to configure the NetWare server from a NetWare client Using NWSetup NWSetup is a utility program that comes bundled with the Network Card which simplifies configuration of the NetWare file server and Network Card See NWSetup Windows p 8 38 Using NetWare Client e NetWare 4 x configuration in bindery services emulation This section describes how to configure the Network Card with Net Ware 4 x bindery ser
145. cal Printer and click the Next button S Note When installing the printer driver in a computer connected to the ma chine via a network be sure to consult the network administrator Add Printer Wizard Local or Network Printer Is the printer attached to your computer If the printer is directly attached to your computer click Local printer If it is attached to another computer or directly to the network click Network printer Local printer Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer C Network printer tees 5 A window the prompts you to select the port will appear Select the name of the port to be used and click the Next gt button Add Printer Wizard E Select the Printer Port Computers communicate with printers through ports Select the port you want your printer to use If the port is not listed you can create a new port Use the following port LPT1 Printer Port LPT2 Printer Port LPT3 Printer Port COM1 Serial Port COM2 Serial Port COM gt Serial Pork Y Note Most computers use the LPT1 port to communicate with a local printer C Create a new port lose lt Back Cancel Pi4700e Windows 2000 XP 2 6 A window will appear prompting you to select the manufacturer and model of your printer Click the Have Disk button on the lower right part of the screen Add Printer Wizard Add Printer Wizard The manufacturer and model deter
146. cally renews its registration with the WINS server before its lease expires Reset This screen appears when you click the Reset menu on the Network tab Use this screen to reset the network interface card so new settings can take effect E ic x Ele Edt View Go Favorites Help On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network ar A password is required to perform this function TCPAP Configuration Password NetWare Configuration m Apple Talk Connguration Network Interface Reset TPP Configuration WINS Configuration Reset Maintenance zi dede pe dresse Z Password Input the password assigned to the network interface card The initial factory default is sysadm Clicking the Apply button after inputting the wrong password displays a password error mes sage without changing the settings Reset button Click this button to reset the network interface card 3 34 Pi4700e Specifying network settings from PageScope Light 3 Maintenance This screen appears when you click the Maintenance menu on the Net work tab Use this screen to restore the network interface card to its initial factory default settings Ele Edt View Go Favorites Help On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network Summary A password is required to perform this function TCP IP Configuration Password PEA ato Restore Factory Default AppleTalk Configuration Webeonc A BUS IPP Configuration WI
147. chine from a computer to which the controller is connected The printer driver which is used during printing is equipped with various functions that make the most out of the features of the machine They enable you to use the same functions as those offered by the machine When actually running a print cycle you can specify various functions of the machine on your computer screen S Note When using the controller be sure to set the machine to the On Line state Some functions offered by the machine cannot be combined such as Staple and Hole Punch and some others may not be used because of a paper size involved The functions that cannot be selected appear dimmed Further if functions that are incompatible with each other are speci fied the Conflicts dialog box will appear prompting you to change the settings When this dialog box appears check the details and reselect the functions to ensure function compatibility Some settings which are defied by the machine for the restricted com binations of different functions can at times be accepted by the printer driver If a print command is issued from the personal computer with such settings made the machine does not produce the output correct ly or abandons the job to produce nothing Make sure that you make correct settings Pi4700e 1 1 Chapter 1 Before Using the Printer Driver Chapter 1 Before Using the Printer Driver Features of the Controller Va
148. ck Printers Double click Add Printer and install the printer Make the new printer the default printer See 2 Installing the Printer Driver p 2 1 for details about how to in stall it Right click the new printer icon and select Properties from the menu Display the Ports tab Click Add Port This displays a list of enabled port types Select LPR Port and then click New Port On the Add LPR compatible printer dialog box type the IP address of the Network Card into the Name or address of server providing Ipd box If the network you are on uses DNS Domain Name Services type in the DNS name instead of the IP address Type PORT 1 into the Name of printer or print queue on that server box and then click OK to close the dialog box Click the Close button of the Printer Ports dialog box and then click the OK button of the Properties dialog box to close it 10 Right click the printer icon again to display its Properties dialog box display the General tab and then print a test page 11 If the test prints normally complete the procedure by clicking OK to close the Properties dialog box After you finish installing a printer with the above procedure you can use it just as you would any standard local printer The printer can also be used as a network printer by other Windows computers on your network whose Windows NT 4 0 systems are configured the same way as de scribed above Pi4700e LPR Printing Con
149. ck settings guest guest 2 To change settings sysadm sysadm This displays the Main Menu shown below The Configuration Utility Unit Serial no 460121 V5 04 Main Menu 1 IP Parameters 2 LPD Printers 3 Protocols 4 Reset Unit 5 Restore Factory Defaults Pi4700e 12 61 Chapter 12 Appendix Using Telnet to Make Settings 6 Change Password E Exit 5 Input the number of the menu item you want check set or change and then press Ene Menu Items IP Parameters Select this menu item to change the Network Card IP address subnet mask default gateway and base port number Whenever the Network Card detects that IP parameters have been changed it automatically starts a soft reset S Note The base port number is a number that is one less than the actual TCP IP port number used by the printer To set a port number of 10001 for example you would specify 10000 as the base port num ber The Telnet connection is cut when a soft reset is performed Because of this you should make other settings first and leave IP parameter settings until later LPD Printers Select this menu item to specify the emulation printer interpreter lan guage supported by the printer Changing this setting lets you make changes so Ipd can print for other emulations Protocols Select this menu item to specify the emulation printer interpreter lan guage supported by the printer You can also disable NetWare
150. croll through pages backwards and forward Logging In to the Admin Mode After you log in to PageScope Light in the Admin Mode you can change the configuration of the Digital Copier settings 1 Type the administrator password into the Ad S d box The initial default administrator password is S See raferdnce p 10 6 for information about how to change the password 2 Click the Log in button to log in to the Admin Mode When you want to log out click the Log out button Pi4700e Network Setting 9 S Note Log out is performed automatically if no operation is performed for more than 10 minutes On the Network tab a password input text box appears on each set ting screen You must be able to input the correct password in order to change Network tab settings The password you should input here is the same as the Admin Password you input on other tabs Contact your network administrator for full details about each of the settings SMTP amp FTP Configuration This screen appears when you click SMTP amp FTP Configuration on the Scanner tab Use this screen to make SMTP and FTP settings Ele Edt view Favorites Tools Help On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network Destinations SMIP amp FTP Configuration External Open Link HDD Configuration LDAP Setting SMTP Configuration SMTP Server Address 192 168 10 12 Default Subject for E mail Attachment From Digital Copier Default Subje
151. ct for FTP Notification File updated from Digital Copier Reply Address admin foo bar iter ii SMTP Connection Timeout 80 sec 1 120 Definit Compression mg FTP Proxy Configuration FTP Proxy Server Address Remote Port Number of Proxy Clear Internet SMTP Configuration Section S Note The SMTP Server Address and FTP Proxy Server Address are dis played only when you are logged into the Admin Mode Pi4700e 9 7 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode o2 LE o 2 o lt Scanner Mode Network Setting S Important You must provide information for the s when you are using the Send to E mail function E mail S r piy Adi A rAd A s and cannot be sent if these settings are left blank SMTP Server Address Type in the IP address of the SMTP server Default Subject for E mail Attachment Type in the default subject when distributing scanner data as E mail attachments Default Subject for FTP Type in the default subject when informing by E mail the URL Notification of the FTP site where scan data is left Reply Address Type in the mail address for a mail replay showing the error message when a send error is generated SMTP Connection Time out Input the SMTP server connection timeout in seconds You can input a value from 1 to 120 seconds Default Compression Select the default compression method to be used when dis tributing sca
152. ction a Dup 2way Tray Dup LCC or Duplex Cabinet must be mounted on the machine Print data Printout Lea gt 15 5 aL Py Procedure Start printing from the application which has been used to create the document Normally printing can be started by selecting it from the File menu The Print dialog box will appear Make sure that Minolta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer and click the Properties button Note Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate Sort in the Print dialog box To ensure proper printing operation however turn OFF these items of the application and make the necessary settings in each tab of the printer driver The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear Make sure that the size of me document created with the application is displayed in al Document Size on the Paper tab Select Collated for Collate Click the Setup tab 7 12 Pi4700e Specifying booklet printing 7 Select Booklet Left Binding in Duplex Bo N x 9 b on v lt Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button The Print dialog box will reappear Click the OK button 10 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon start S Note If the original document for a printing job contains a page of a different size or different direction from the others and this document is printed a void image or overlapped image could result Convenient Fun
153. ction 3 ES 3 Network Settings 3 1 Introduction Though this Network Card does not support NetBEUI protocol it supports TCP IP and IPX SPX which provides plenty of connection flexibility for the Windows computer This chapter consists of the sections listed below 1 Specifying the IP address from the printer s touch panel S Note In order to specify the IP address in a TCP IP environment the BootP and Map Utility are used in addition to entering the address from the printer s touch panel For details refer to 8 7 Using the utility soft ware on page 8 28 2 Using the printing functions Windows 95 98 Me Peer to peer printing with TCP IP See 3 3 Peer to Peer Printing with TCP IP on page 3 5 Peer to peer printing with IPX SPX See 3 5 Peer to Peer Printing with IPX SPX on page 3 12 Windows NT 4 0 Peer to peer printing with TCP IP See 3 3 Peer to Peer Printing with TCP IP on page 3 5 e LPR printing See 3 7 LPR Printing on page 3 17 Windows 2000 XP e LPR printing See 3 7 LPR Printing on page 3 17 e IPP printing See 3 8 IPP Printing on page 3 21 3 Specifying network settings from PageScope Light Pi4700e Chapter 3 Network Settings 3 Specifying the IP Address From the Printer s Touch Panel A Windows 95 98 Me network printer can be used by going through a No vell NetWare or Windows 2000 NT server This Network Card however can be configured w
154. ctions Pi4700e 7 18 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions Printing pages with a distribution number 7 8 Printing pages with a distribution number Overview This section explains how to print a distribution number in the background for each copy set To use this function a Hard Disk Drive in Copier must be mounted on the machine Print data Printout gt gt gt Note The orientation of the distribution number may not match that of the print image Procedure Start printing from the application which has been used to create the document Normally printing can be started by selecting Print from the File menu 2 The Print dialog Box will appear Make sure that ta Di470 PCL6 is displayed for Name in F and click the Prope button Note Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate Sort in the Print dialog box To ensure proper printing operation however turn OFF these items of the application and make the necessary settings in each tab of the printer driver The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear 7 14 Pi4700e Printing pages with a distribution number 7 4 Make sure that all setting items such as Original Document Size are correctly set on the Paper tab N x 9 2 on o lt 5 Select Collated for Collate 6 Click the Job Management tab and check the Distribution Number f Select the page on which to print the distribution number either 1st Page
155. d must be returned to Minolta for repair or replacement at Minolta s discre tion Warranty Coverage Minolta Corporation warrants this product to be free from defects in work manship and materials for a period of one year from the date of receipt of the unit If the unit fails to function as written in the User s manual Minolta will repair or replace the unit at no charge Minolta will ship at their ex pense an exchange unit overnight to replace the defective unit The remedies provided herein are the customer s sole and exclusive rem edies In no event shall Minolta Corporation be liable for any lost profits direct or indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or other legal history Pi4700e Xi Foreword User Instructions For the U S A Users FCC Part 15 Radio Frequency Devices This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must ac cept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital de vice pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial en vironment This equipment generat
156. d Ipd It contains install scripts for various types of UNIX This section describes how to install TCP IP printing to the Network Card on any of the operating systems listed below DEC ULTRIX 4 3 RISC System V Release 4 Solaris Version 1 x 2 x SCO UNIX OSF1 ALPHA IBM AIX e HP UX Once the Network Card has its IP parameters loaded you must perform the following steps to enable host based TCP IP printing Load the print server software on your workstation This software is provided as a tar file in the TCP IP directory Run the appropriate installation script if one is available Complete the configuration of your operating system Loading the Program The following procedures are necessary only when using the supplied host based lpr You do not need to load the software if you are using print er based Ipr Chapter 12 Login as superuser to the system that spools directly to the print server Load the CD ROM that comes with the printer controller into the CD ROM drive of the computer you want to use Appendix 3 Create a program installation directory and copy the program to it For example type the following mkdir usr MLT_install S Note If you already have a Network Card printer at your site and you are now installing another one delete the files in the installation directory not usr nic If these files remain they can prevent the installation of a subsequent print server Pi4700e 12 41
157. d settings appears Delete Deletes text selected in 2 4 28 Pi4700e Overlay tab Watermark detailed settings 6 7 8 9 10 11 Watermark x Watermark E dit Name Watermark Name 1 j 6 Sting Watermark Sting 7 Font Type Face Times New Roman 8 Size 72 zi Point 8 200 7 9 Style P Bold I Italie 10 Shading 20 x 5 100 11 II Angle f j Position 1 a 2 Diagonal y Center AA 1 3 E User Setting User Setting izontal o E4 Z degree Horizontal 180 A 7 z E 180 180 Vertical E Cancel Help Name Enter the name under which you wish to register the watermark Number of registrations Depending on environment used number of registra tions will be different Refer to Appendix A p 12 10 for details Number of characters max 20 characters String Enter the text to be printed as a watermark Number of characters PCL6 max 63 characters PS max 255 characters Type Face Face Specify a font from String to be printed as a watermark PCL6 Specify a font from the fonts PC font installed in the OS PS Specify a font from device fonts controller font Size Specify the font size of the characters Setting range 8pt to 200 pt in 1pt steps Style Specify the font style of the characters Bold Prints bold characters Italic Prints italic characters
158. dded to the Printers window This completes the installation fexerinters ox File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Ea Add Printer Minolta Di 70 2 object s Pi4700e Windows 2000 XP Making General Settings Before Using the Printer The printer driver requires setting of items that are common to all print jobs including the port to which the printer cable is connected and option al devices configured with the machine These settings must be made us ing property sheets available from the Properties command after the printer driver has been installed or whenever the operating environment is changed The most common settings were made when the printer driver was in stalled meaning that you do not usually bother to change them Some items must however be changed in the following cases Cases where changes are necessary Applicable property tab You want to add a comment to distinguish the printer from others You want to share the machine with other computers connected to the same network this setting must be made on the computer directly connected to the ma chine The computer s connecting port has been changed You want to change the conditions for the display of a timeout error You want to designate a port to which the machine is connected via a network this setting must be made on a computer connected to the machine via a net work You want to restrict use con
159. ddress is setup correctly Network Card IP address is alive AS 400 When working with the output queue description WORKOUTQD you must provide information for a number of fields in order to allow the Net work Card to function properly as a remote printer device 1 o a A Ww When prompted for the remote system type INTNETADR so the AS 400 system recognizes the device as an IP device Input an appropriate name like PORT1 for the remote printer queue name Connection type must be IP Internet address must be the Network Card IP address Destination Type must be OTHER In response to the message asking if you want to convert SCS to ASCII type YES This tells the AS 400 system to convert text For Manufacturer type and model specify the printer driver that comes with the printer controller Pi4700e 12 35 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix 12 UNIX Configuration DEC ULTRIX 4 3 RISC OSF1 ALPHA Use the following procedure to set up a remote printer on the host that sends jobs to a Network Card 1 At the prompt type lprsetup 2 Select add Type a printer name and then press Eve 4 When the following message appears press E Do you want more information on specific printer types 9 This displays a list of printers supported by ULTRIX Type the follow ing remote 6 Type the printer synonym alias and then press Er N Specify the spooler directory
160. ddress stored in NVRAM when the card is powered up Apply button Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this point Clear button Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this point Pi4700e 3 25 Chapter 3 Network Settings 3 Specifying network settings from PageScope Light S Note Use only IP parameters that have been specified or approved by your network administrator The network interface card does not send DHCP requests when DHCP is disabled If mere is no E address assigned to the network interface card or if IP Ac ii AM is turned off the network interface card sends a BOOTP rediek A DHCP request is sent when the network interface card is reset or powered up while DHCP is enabled ang no IP address assigned to the network interface card or if IP Addr n M is turned off e ES o 2 o lt When DHCP is enabled an IE addrass is assigned to the network in terface card and IP I it M is turned on the network in terface card uses the IP address stored in NVRAM In this case the network interface card does not send a DHCP request In a DHCP environment it is necessary to specify an unlimited lease period for the IP address assigned to the network interface card or the IP address must be reset a fixed address within a range that is not leased Network Settings 3 26 Pi4700e Specifying network settings from P
161. dition of printer You want to change settings in spool condition You want to change OS dependent settings This setting is not related to printing You want to restrict access to the machine You want to check the accounts of the machine users This setting is not related to printing For the details of Device Options Setting tab see page 4 2 Displaying a Properties dialog box You have two different steps to take to display a properties dialog box The contents of a particular properties dialog box slightly differ depending on how you access it Select the appropriate one according to your need 1 To display a properties dialog box from the Printers window 2 To display a properties dialog box from an application menu Below are the detailed procedures for each approach Pi4700e 2 13 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Windows 2000 XP Displaying a Properties dialog box from the Printer Folder 1 Click the Start button and select Settings Then click Printers 2 Click the appropriate printer icon ex Minolta Di470 PCL6 3 To display the General dialog box Click Pro from the File menu Pel lt To display Printing Preferences dialog box gt Click Prir Pi ences from the File menu It allows you to set the environment in which you will use the printer The settings made through this method are valid in
162. e Terminal File Edit Settings Help TurboPrintCfg v2 0 2 C 1999 Turbolinux Select t What type of printer do you want to add fidd Rem keys ar Remote LPD Queue Tupe SMB LAN Manager Printe lt TAB gt lt ALt TAB gt between elements SPACE Selects lt F1 gt Help S Note When network printer is to be used select Pi4700e 5 7 Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux Te D o lt Printer Driver for Linux Printer setting with X window System Specify optional name for printer queue Baa PEJE le Edit Settings Help TurboPrintCfg v2 0 2 C 1999 Turbolinux E Configure Printers Select the prin Remove buttons to add shortcuts to add and rem Enter the name of the new print queue Type REMOTE TAB gt lt Alt TAB gt between elements lt SPACE gt Selects lt F1 gt Help Iri Make sure that positions where SPOOL directory is to be prepared and printer device are specified After checking is complete select the button erminal ile Fie Edit Settings Help TurboPrintCfg v2 0 2 C 1999 Turbolinux Edit Printer Settings Enter the required information in the spaces below Press F1 for help Queue Name EEES Spool Directory Ipd Prn55ppm File Limit in KB Printer Device dev 1p0 Suppress Headers fe ene KTAB gt lt ALt TAB g
163. e Manual Feed Tray1 to Tray4 LCC LCT Specify the paper source for the cover Pi4700e 6 35 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 Print options Job Management The Job Management property sheet allows you to print out a page of de scriptive data about each print job Printer MLT_000031 _ m Presets Standard HJ Job Management 13 Access Number F4 84 1 Lock Job Password 4 a 4 LL 2 User Name 0 Y 0 4 0 4 fo 4 F 3 A Preview Save As PDF Cancel 1 Access Number If the copy track function is to be used enter a four digit access number An access number is attached to each printing job enabling you to carry out management at the machine In order to use this function copy track function must be set at the machine When the copy track function is set at the machine printing may sometimes fail to take place until the access number designated at the machine is correctly set Enter the access number set in the machine Setting range 0 to 9 for each box 2 Lock Job Password If Lock Job is to be used enter a four digit lock job password Entering 0 for all four digits indicates that there is no password A locked printing job will be printed when it is unlocked using the Job List display on the panel of the machine In this case a password is necessary Enter the password of the lock job Setting range 0 to 9 for each box 3
164. e UNIX Configuration 12 12 6 UNIX Configuration Printing is possible with this Network Card by using the LPD LPR com mands which are general commands in the following UNIX system For details on creating print data in UNIX refer to your UNIX system ad ministrator S Note Only PostScript or text files can be printed from UNIX All UNIX systems supporting Ipd Ipr System V Rel 4 386 Platform DEC ULTRIX RISC Versions 4 3 4 4 DEC OSF 1 Versions 2 0 3 0 Solaris Version 1 1 3 SunOS 4 1 3 Version 2 3 SunOS 5 3 Versions 2 4 2 5 HP UX 700 800 Series Versions 9 01 10 0 IBM AIX Version 3 2 5 SCO UNIX Version 3 2 AS 400 Either of the two connection configurations described below can be used Host based Ipd In this configuration a supplied line printer daemon is run on one or more workstations and print data is sent to the Network Card via a TCP IP port Digital Copier c MLA p Network Card TCP IP LPD TCP IP Pi4700e 12 29 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix UNIX Configuration 11001 4 Printer based Ipd In this configuration the printer appears as a host running a line printer daemon Digital Copier ERIS D TU iw
165. e 2000 or Windows NT 4 0 and the Novell 32 bit client The IP Peer to Peer utility requires Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 Me The IPX Peer to Peer utility requires Windows 95 98 Me The MAP utility requires Windows NT 4 0 Windows 95 98 Me 2000 MAP also requires a browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer or Netscape TCP IP setup and maintenance may be done with Telnet Mon itoring and maintenance with HTTP requires a suitable Internet Web browser program supporting HTML AppleTalk printing requires printer PPD appropriate to the Dig ital Copier AppleTalk NIManage Utility Program is provided for setup and maintenance except Mac OS X Hardware Support for 10 or 100 megabit Ethernet networks 10 100BaseT twisted pair cables and hardware CD ROM drive Pi4700e 8 3 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card o LE D o lt Network Interface Card Setting up the network card Setting up the network card Connecting a network cable 1 Make sure that Digital Copier power is turned off 2 Connect the network cable to the Network Card Network cable 10 100BaseT port O Insert the plug into the 10 100BaseT port on the rear panel of the network card and press it in until you hear it click securely into place 2 3 Power up the Digital Copier and check for abnormalities S Important Use only Category 5 shielded 10 100BaseT
166. e Digital Copier Output Tray In shows the current status of all the Output Trays installed on the Digital Copier Pi4700e 10 5 Chapter 10 PageScope Light o D E o lt PageScope Light 10 System tab e Hard Disk It shows the status of the hard disk installed on the printer controller This information is not displayed when there is no hard disk installed on the printer controller e ROM Version It shows version of firmware installed on the Digital Copier and printer con troller e Interface Info It shows information about network interface and local interface e Consumable It shows the current status of Digital Copier consumables Preference The environment settings such as the refresh rate time and the system language can be specified O Save Setting This screen appears when you click the S ing menu on the Sys tem tab You can use the screen that appears to save the Digital Copier setup to a file Note that only settings you can make with PageScope Light are saved to the file Saved setups can be recalled to set up the Digital Copier when required O Online Assistance Enter information concerning product support and check it when neces sary 10 6 Pi4700e Job tab 1 0 10 5 Job tab You can use the Job tab for managing print jobs sent to the Digital Copier from clients and for sending files directly from clients for printing Print Job Management
167. e page 2 8 e Windows NT 4 0 For the operating environment and installation procedure for the Win dows NT 4 0 printer driver see page 2 15 Pi4700e 2 1 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver 2 Windows 95 98 Me Installing This section explains the installation procedure for the Windows 98 printer driver S Note Before starting to install the printer driver be sure first to quit all other applications 3 Tip The following procedure assumes that the machine is a Digital Copier and that the printer driver is PCL6 Read the specific proper names ac cordingly if the machine is a model other than the Digital Copier and if for example the OS is Windows 95 and the printer driver is PS 1 Click the Start button From the menu that appears select Settings then click Printers 2 The Printers window will appear Double click the Add Printer icon 3 The Add Printer Wizard will appear Click the Next gt button Add Printer Wizard This wizard will help you to install your printer quickly and easily To begin installing your printer click Next 2 2 Pi4700e Windows 95 98 Me 2 4 Awindowwill appear asking how the printer is to be connected If your computer is directly connected to the machine select Local printer and then click the Next gt button Add Printer Wizard How is this printer attached to your computer If itis directly a
168. e stapling position will be determined by the direction of the first page You cannot set certain sizes and kinds of paper For details refer to the User Manual of the machine S Tip for 1 You can check the stapling position by using the icon in the dialog box or Page Layout S Note for 1 Number of punch holes can be specified only when Multi staple Fin isher is installed You cannot punch certain sizes of paper Also you may be unable to punch the paper at certain positions For details refer to the User Man ual of the machine If you select Long Edge in the manual bypass take up mode the paper may sometimes fail to be punched Punch and OHP interleaving cannot be set simultaneously s is not displayed for Metric area Pi4700e 5 29 Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux 5 Properties settings S Tip for 2 You can check the punching positions by using the icon in the dialog box or Page Layout S Note for 3 If Folding is combined with Hole Punch or Staple the Hole Punch or Staple function to be used is restricted depending on the specific type of the Folding function combined For details see Appendix A p 12 7 Te D o lt Printer Driver for Linux 5 30 Pi4700e Properties settings Paper tab The Paper tab allows you to make basic printer settings 1 2 3 4 1 2 4 5 Setup for
169. e using AppleTalk Enabling and disabling of status page output Error log referencing Enabling and disabling of other protocols along with display of TCP IP address subnet mask and default gateway address all of which can be changed Operating System Macintosh System 7 5 3 to 9 x except Mac OS X Using NiManage 1 2 On the computer you want to use copy AppleTalk NIManage Utility Program to the folder you want O AppleTalk NlManage Utility Program is located in the APPLTLK folder on the CD ROM Double click the AppleTalk NIManage Utility Program to start up the program and display the screen shown below Select a Unit Zone Device TP GP MLT 995243 iis TP GT TP JOUKAN TP PSD 222 ESR ESR5505 222 ESA HQ ATM 222 HQ ASCS ATM 222 H0 H05505 0 222 H0 1TM ATM 22Z H0 KINKI1 o Zone shows the names of the zones on the network O Device shows the Network Cards available in each zone S 3 Note The Device display panel is blank if there are no zones on the network On the Zone display panel select a zone name 8 34 Pi4700e Using the utility software 8 4 On the Device display panel select this Network Card O Selecting this Network Card on the Device display panel enables the Options menu bar which you can use to select various func tions A command is appears dimmed on the Options menu when itis not available for some reason Co
170. e y Froner pienisher Pi4700e 9 25 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode o2 LE o 2 o lt Scanner Mode 9 File destinations 3 Touch Scanner Adar Input memory 4 Touch the address to be changed Select the addr or Delete f Scanner Address Inputl 3 5 Confirmation screen will appear If you touch an item to be changed you will changed you will change the content Deleting registration touch panel of the digital copier 1 Press the Utility Key 2 Touch Job Image Scan Input Utility Rewari eae Meter users ERA Count 4 choice 4 Administr ator Mode y Toner He plenisher j 3 Touch Scanner Addr Input 9 26 Pi4700e File destinations 4 Touch the address to be deleted 5 Touch Delete 6 Touch Yes and touch Enter Job Image Scan Memory Input Select the address to Input Change lt or Delete Job Image Scan Memory Input Select she item to change Press the Delete Key to remove this address from the directory Scanner Input Direct Name MLTMH d Scan Address 4 Job Image Scan Memory Input Do you really want to delete this address from the directory Y or N Scann er Address Input Pi4700e 9 27 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode o2 LE o 2 o lt Scanner Mode Mailbox Destinations Mailbox Destination
171. eaving Paper This function inserts sheets interleaving sheets between sheets of OHP film when printing on OHP film You can either leave these sheets blank or print the same image as that printed on the OHP film S OHP Interleaving with Image Interleaving Paper Source Notes for 1 When using special paper such as thick paper the paper sometimes fails to be distributed to the selected paper exit destination m Interleaving Paper 2 OHP Interleaving Jo with Image Interleaving Paper Source Trayl Y Cancel Help Activates the front cover function Prints on the front cover Adds a back cover Prints on the back cover Select the tray for the front cover and back cover pa pers Available settings Manual Feed Tray1 to Tray4 LCC LCT Activates the OHP interleaving function Prints an image on the interleaving sheet Select the tray for the interleaving paper Available settings Tray1 toTray4 LCC LCT You can set Manual Feed Tray1 to Tray4 LCC and LCT using Paper Source Pi4700e Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings Setup tab S Tip for 1 The tray containing the paper on which the body of the document is to be printed is displayed in green on the Printer Figure S Notes for 2 When using the OHP interleaving function set the number of sets of prints to 1 You cannot select mes same paper take up port for both P
172. eck box enables configuration of anonymous login settings If the Anonymous Login check box is selected Login Name and Password become unavailable Login Name Dn Input the user name Password Input the password Check LDAP settings Click this button to check whether the server can be accessed logged into using the currently configured settings If the server is accessed but the settings are incorrect an error appears Refer to the Error List on page 11 6 9 10 Pi4700e Network Setting Supported LDAP Servers LDAP Server Supported Operating Systems Microsoft Exchange 5 5 Windows NT Server 4 0 Exchange 2000 on ActiveDirectory Windows 2000 Server Lotus Domino Server 5 x 6 x Windows 2000 Server or Windows NT Server 4 0 Novell eDirectory 8 6 8 7 Windows 2000 Server Groupwise 5 5 6 and NetWare 5 or 6 Pi4700e Chapter 9 Scanner Mode Chapter 9 Scanner Mode 9 E mail Destinations 9 3 E mail Destinations S Note When registering a destination it must first be entered in PageScope Light and then registered from the touch panel of the digital copier This screen appears when you click the E mail Destinations sub menu under the Destination menu It lists the E mail Destinations that are cur rently registered Ele Edt View Favorites Tools Help Dy On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network TED ae E mail Destination Li
173. ed access printer on your network you must meet the following prerequisites v Have at least Read Write Modify and Create privileges for the desti nation container where its associated Printer object will reside v Be designated as a manager of the NDPS Manager that will control this Printer Agent v Have a Broker running v Have an NDPS Manager object v Have a public access printer created 1 In NetWare Administrator select the container where you want the printer to reside 2 Choose Object Cr nta NDDG Pr ite NDPS Printer This causes the Create NDPS Printer dialog box to appear Type a name in the Pri gt field te nter Agent Source field select Public Access Printer 4 Inthe Pi 8 24 Pi4700e NetWare configuration 8 5 When the Select Public Access Printers list appears click the Cre ate button A warning message appears saying that all clients will need to reinstall this printer after it is converted 6 Click the OK button f Selectthe public access printer you want to convert to a controlled ac cess printer and click the OK button 8 Click the Create button S Note Novell NetWare Client 4 7 for Windows NT displays a transport error when you try to add an NDPS Manager or an Agent using Netware Ad min This problem does not exist with Client 4 6 for Windows NT Adding NDPS Printers from Windows Clients Once an NDPS printer had been created you can add
174. ed to use the scanner functions 1 3 Connecting the Controller The controller is installed inside the machine The installation procedures are to be performed by service personnel The controller is connected to the computer by a printer cable or network cable Power to the controller is supplied from the machine Tip If you cannot print from your computer make sure that the printer ca ble or network cable is connected to the corresponding connectors Pi4700e 1 7 Chapter 1 Before Using the Printer Driver Chapter 1 Before Using the Printer Driver Settings Made on the Machine 1 4 Settings Made on the Machine The following functions must be set on the machine using its Utility Mode as they relate to the controller Priority Device Select the priority use of the machine either as a copier or printer e Copier The machine is used as a copier The machine starts the print cycle only after it has received the entire data of a particular print job The machine can be used for copying since it starts printing only after it has received the entire data of the job for printing This means that more time is available to you for copying but you have to wait for a longer time before a particular print job is done e Printer The machine is used as a printer The machine starts the print cycle before it completes receiving the en tire data of a particular print job On receiving the data
175. eee 12 12 Printer Figure aa 12 15 Setting Preview elector dete trt cs 12 16 Specifications for the controller sees 12 19 ACCOSSO oio eH rait 12 24 GlOSSary soe chu E ao dee deat das ee a ee 12 25 12 6 UNIX Configuration eres 12 29 Host based Ipdr oo e cere ce eg emet 12 29 Printer based AA 12 30 Printer based Ipd Configuration eeeeeeeeeese 12 31 BSD Syste tac ero HE RI NH PN E 12 32 AIX Version 2 5 poa ei ett egre dana 12 33 PUK AO ser att ea D ecl ate ate 12 34 llus c 12 34 AS A00 ERA ed Ug bn ORE 12 35 DEC ULTRIX 4 3 RISC OSF1 ALPHA eee 12 36 SCO UNIX en 12 37 System V Release 4 Solaris 2 X ccccccceeeesseeeeeeeeseeeeeseneeeenees 12 38 LPSYSTEM Installation eene 12 38 BI cM 12 39 Configuring the Printer Using the printtool Command 12 39 Configuring the Printer by Editing the printcap File 12 40 Host based Ipd Configuration eseeseese 12 41 Loading the Programm cceseceesesceeeeseceneeeeeeeneneneneneeneseensneeetes 12 41 Selecting Filles o eed e da 12 42 Selecting a Filter Manually se 12 42 Pi4700e ix Contents 12 7 12 8 Solaris Version 1 OSF1 ooooooccccccccnnnncncnnnnnoninanananan nono oonnnnnonononons 12 42 DEGULTRIX4A Besson eee
176. een used to create the document Normally printing can be started by selecting Print from the File menu The Print dialog box will appear Make sure that Minolta PCL6 is displayed for Name in Printer and click the Properties button Note Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate Sort in the Print dialog box To ensure proper printing operation however turn OFF these items of the application and make the necessary settings in each tab of the printer driver 7 4 Pi4700e Printing more than one copy at a time 7 3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear If the Paper tab is not displayed click the Paper tab 4 Make sure that the size of the document created with the application is displayed in Original Document Size 5 n Copies set the number of copies to be printed 6 In Collate select Collated so that the printed pages will be sorted into copy sets Tip When Uncollated is selected printed pages will be sorted into groups of identical pages 7 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button 8 The Print dialog box will reappear Click the OK button 9 The data will then be transferred to the machine and printing will soon start Pi4700e N _ D n Q lt Convenient Functions Chapter 7 Convenient Functions Specifying N up printing 7 4 Specifying N up printing Overview This section explains how to print two pages on
177. el on back of the Network Card 0000 8 32 Pi4700e Using the utility software 8 S Note Use colons to delimit each octet in the MAC adaress as shown on the Network Card s status page 5 Reset the Digital Copier by powering it down and then back up again The above step outputs a fixed period BOOTP request 6 Click the Go button on the BOOTP dialog Wait for about five minutes until the Network Card resets Select Verify from the Admin menu You should get a response that in dicates whether or not your unit is active O If you get a message stating that the unit is active you should be able to ping to the Network Card using the steps below O If you get a message stating that the unit is not active check whether TCP IP is enabled on the status page 9 Display the MS DOS prompt and type the following ping Network Card IP address gt 10 Repeat step 8 until a response is received ee is complete when a response starting with the words F om is returned 11 Quit BOOTP S Note You cannot use BOOTP to assign an IP adaress if the Network Card has already been assigned an IP address by ATIP Pi4700e 8 33 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card Chapter 8 Network Interface Card Using the utility software NIManage for AppleTalk Macintosh This program lets you change Network Card settings on a Macintosh It provides the following functions Modification of printer name and zone nam
178. emon Configure the printers connected to your computer or network fe ome Generic postscript printer OK Cancel Pi4700e 5 11 Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux Te D o Ren Printer Driver for Linux Printer setting with X window System SuSE Linux With SuSE Linux command should be executed from Terminal window to set printer 1 Execute command shown below from Terminal window with current directory var lib apsfilter SETUP Terminal window will change as shown below after execution of com mand File Sessions Options copyright C 1996 2000 SuSE GmbH Author Werner Fink lt werner suse de gt copyright Andreas Klemm 1993 1994 1995 andreas knobel gun de co author Thomas Bueschgens sledge hammer oche de This script creates a printer entry serial parallel and remote printers in etc printcap Spool directories will be created under var spool lpd filters will be linked under var lib apsfilter bin There is a global configuration file etc apsfilterrc together with printer specific configuration etc apsfilterrc Xgs mode after creating a printer entry press return to continue J 2 Screen will change as shown below by pressing the return key Select Entry Device For which printer type do you want to setup apsfilter Exit apsfilter setup List all apsfilter entries NTRY E lel ENTRY e lter D Fast delete
179. eneem em 10 7 File Download 3 terrre eret recette hi rens 10 7 Printer tab iii 10 8 Seti Sit A EH ien 10 8 Printer Front Panel cisco ciel atin cxtra o E Ys 10 11 Test Print secet ee pt pee encre vot e eg red 10 12 Font Information crest estere coiere e ia tii 10 13 Printer Reducida iia i eee E Ido eques 10 14 Mairitenance iii nice eet oce cessa a Pra eae eva ave ak EE dn e aAA Td Y 10 15 Local Interface ooocccccccccnccooooonnononnnnnnnnnnnonononronnnnnnnnononononnonnnnnns 10 16 Scanner Lab oic is ica re co ona E CRa vk d GF GR E Dn a EB GR ERE UN FER KEY NV EK AR 10 17 Network tab esses eeeeeee eese nnn nenne nena nnne nnn nn nnns 10 18 viii Pi4700e Contents Poor Print Quality coco aa 11 6 aedes 11 6 12 1 Function combination matrix Windows 12 1 12 2 Function combination matrix Macintosh 12 4 12 3 Function combination matrix Linux eess 12 7 12 4 Number of registrations ecce eennnnnnnnnnnnn 12 9 Number of registrations Usable range for Easy Set 12 9 Number of registrations Usable range for Watermark 12 10 Number of registrations Usable range for Custom Paper 12 11 12 5 Preview Listing eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeee nnne 12 12 Page Layout eie cH aH
180. er lailbin Finisher Folding Finisher aga Bere Installed Options Dup 2way Tray LCT Multi staple Finisher Hard Disk Drive in Copier ees y Setup Paper Device Options Setting Job Management User Name Adding or removing an opiton causes all settings to restore default settings About Profile root diutil PrnSsppm dipjire ok Cancel Apply Help 1 Device Options Set the options installed in the machine Installable Options Add Remove Installed Options Mailbox Setting 2 User Name The user name set in the printer driver is displayed as the job user name on the ma chine s touch panel Setting range 8 characters max 3 About Click to display the manufacturer and version number of the printer driver This is a list of installable options Select the desired options from this list Available settings Duplex Cabinet Dup 2way Tray LCT Dup LCC Mailbin Finisher Multi staple Finisher Single staple Finisher Folding Finisher Hard Disk Drive in Copier Pressing this button adds the selected option Pressing this button removes the selected option This is a list of currently installed options Select it when you wish to remove an option lt when Mailbin Finisher is installed gt You can add a name to each mailbin of Mailbin Finish er For details see page 5 20 Pi4700e Chapter 5
181. er Reset Timing Ack in Busy Maintenance gt Local VF Restore Factory Default Apply _ Clear Admin Password x Log in 9 on a lt ka El IE iemet zone Z o 0 Q o ij Timeout Input a value specifying how much time in seconds should be o allowed to pass after data is received through the parallel port m before it is decided that a job is finished VO Buffer Size I O buffer size Bi Directional Bi directional communication setting Timing Printer data read timing 10 16 Pi4700e Scanner tab 1 0 10 7 Scanner tab The Scanner tab contains settings for configuration of the Digital Copier scanner function For details about the scanner function see the 9 Scanner Mode section Pi4700e 10 17 Chapter 10 PageScope Light 1 0 Network tab 10 8 Network tab The Network tab contains settings for configuration of the Digital Copier Network function For details about the network function see the Printer Driver section p 3 23 o D o lt PageScope Light 10 18 Pi4700e Unable to Print 11 11 11 1 Troubleshooting Unable to Print This section explains about the troubleshooting procedures for possible malfunctions Perform the troubleshooting procedures given below in that order when the machine is unable to print even if you execute a print com mand from your computer Symptom Possible Cause Action A messa
182. er Sc 9er ot S Tip for 11 The interleaves are blank pages S Note for 12 This function differs from LaserWriter standard Cover Page function p 6 20 Use Pa ce to specify OHP transparencies The paper source can be selected from Manual Feed Tray1 to Tray4 LCC and LCT If thick paper or other special paper is selected the machine may not feed prints out into the selected exit tray 6 30 Pi4700e Print options S Tip for 12 The covers have data printed on them No back covers are available 1 3 i Access Numbert v gt 14 1 f Password v 85 1 Printer MLT 504486 v Destination f Printer Specific Options w Access Number y Access Number2 Access Number3 y Password0 y i PasswordZ v Comme 85 1 Printer MLT 504486 v Destination f Printer Specific Options v NA AAA TZ Password y 14 i Password v 15 UserNamel 13 14 _Password3 ___v UserName0 0 UserName2 Ekk _ UserName3 Access Number If the copy track function is to be used enter a four digit access number An access number is attached to each printing job enabling you to carry out management at the machine In order to use this function copy track function must be set at the machine When the copy track function is set
183. er Size is loaded Prints on paper loaded in the specified paper source Prints on paper loaded in the Multi Manual Feed Tray Select the machine exit tray into which the prints are to be fed Available options are limited by the type of finishing option configured with the ma chine e Mailbin Finisher Except Mailbin Finisher Auto bin1 to bin5 Auto Pi4700e 6 25 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 Print options 3 Orientation Select the orientation of the image on the paper Portrait Prints the document across the narrower dimension of the paper Landscape Prints the document across the wider dimension of the paper Rotated Landscape Outputs landscape orientation upside down 4 Duplex Print only when the Dup 2way Tray Dup LCC or Duplex Cabinet is mounted Select the desired duplex print function The results of the specified duplex print can be viewed on the paper preview Off Does not perform duplex printing Short Edge Binding Prints on both sides of each page so that the printed pages can be bound along the short edge Long Edge Binding Prints on both sides of each page so that the printed pages can be bound along the long edge 5 Collate Select whether printed pages are to be sorted into copy sets when printing more than one copy of the same document Collated Pages into copy sets For instance when printing 5 sets of a document consisting of 10 pages printed
184. er driver The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear Make sure that all setting items such as Original Document Size are correctly set on the Paper tab Click the Job Management tab Apply check mark to Lock Job 7 22 Pi4700e Using the lock job print PC confidential function 7 Input password S Note To clear the Lock Job function type any number in the Password box If no number is typed in the Password box the message Password Error will appear and you might not be able to exit from the function Tip Password is 4 digit number from 0002 to 9999 If you enter a 3 digit number for password it will be regarded as 4 digit number automati cally adding 0 to the head N x 9 b on v lt Convenient Functions Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button The Print dialog box will appear Click the OK button 10 The data will be transferred to the machine but printing will not yet start Procedure on the machine side Unlocking a job After the data has been transferred to the machine operate the machine to start printing 1 Press the Job List key on the control panel Job List 0 Pi4700e 7 23 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions Using the lock job print PC confidential function 2 Touch the Unlock key S Note If the Job List does not appear touch Next or Back Up ponory MEN Time 10 10
185. erver this item shows the address Otherwise enter the IP address of the primary NetBIOS name server here Secondary WINS Server You may also enter the IP address of a secondary NetBIOS name server if you want If you configured your DHCP server to provide the address of a secondary WINS server to the net work interface card the address fields are filled in with the ap propriate information automatically Pi4700e 3 33 Chapter 3 Network Settings e ES o 2 o Ren Network Settings Specifying network settings from PageScope Light Primary Server Logged in Name of the Primary WINS Server to which the printer is cur rently logged in Secondary Server Logged Name of the Secondary WINS Server to which the printer is in currently logged in Apply button Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this point Clear button Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this point After you configure the NetBIOS WINS settings restart the printer The network interface card s status page should now show that the net work interface card is successfully registered with the WINS server The items labeled Primary Server Logged in and Secondary Server Logged in on the WINS Configuration screen now indicate which WINS server s the network interface card is registered with Under normal circumstances your network interface card automati
186. es uses and radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interfer ence to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense WARNING The design and production of this unit conform to FCC Regulations and any changes or modifications must be registered with the FCC and are subject to FCC control Any changes made by purchaser or user without first contacting the manufacturer will be subject to penalty under FCC regulations FCC F02 This device must be used with shielded interface cables The use of non shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under FCC rules For Canada Users Interference Causing Equipment Standard ICES 003 Issue 3 This Class A digital apparatus complied with Canadian ICES 003 Cet appareil num rique de la classe A est conforme a la norme NMB 003 du Canada IC FOS For European Users CE Marking Declaration of Conformity This product complies with the following EU directives 89 336 EEC 73 23 EEC and 93 68 EEC directives This declaration is valid for the area of the European Union This device must be used with shielded interface cables The use of non shielded cables is likely to result i
187. esired options from this list Available settings Dup 2way Tray Dup LCC Duplex Cabinet LCT Mailbin Finisher Multi staple Finisher Single staple Finisher Folding Finisher Hard Disk Drive in Copier Pressing this button adds the selected option Pressing this button removes the selected option This is a list of currently installed options Select it when you wish to remove an option lt when Mailbin Finisher is installed gt You can add a name to each mailbin of Mailbin Finish er For details see page 4 4 If the Dup 2way Tray Duplex Cabinet and Dup LCC are not correct ly selected it may not be possible to select the Finisher correctly Pi4700e 4 3 Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings Device Options Setting tab Mailbox Setting dialog box lt when Mailbin Finisher is installed gt Allows you to set the names of the mailbins in Mailbin Finisher 1 2 3 Mailbox Setting x Option Name Mailbin Finisher Mailbox Name Cancel Help MailBox This is the bin name editing box Setting range max 20 characters PCL6 max 32 characters PS Apply Press to finalize a changed name Bin list Displays a list of names of currently set bins To change the name of a bin select the name you wish to change 4 4 Pi4700e Functions common to various tabs 4 4 3 Functions common to various tabs These functions are common to ta
188. ess 3 Whatis the printer name Type the printer name and press Ever 4 Here the script displays the information you have input up to this point Node name of the Print Server Card printfast Printer name to be used lt printer name gt The printer is attached on PORT 1 Check these settings and make sure they are correct If they are cor rect type yes and press ener Otherwise type no and press ener 5 Is this printer PostScript Type yes and press if the printer is a PostScript printer Other wise type no and press Ere Pi4700e UNIX Configuration 12 c o The printcap entries you have made up to this point appear on the dis play and the script confirms whether you want the entries written into the etc printcap file Type yes if you want the entries added to print cap and then press Ex If you do not want them added type no press and then manually make the required changes to the en tries printer name gt Print Server Card printer lp dev lt printer name gt if usr nic infilter sd usr spool lt printer name gt This completes the installation In response to the message about whether you want to install another printer input yes or no and then press Like all BSD systems ULTRIX uses the etc printcap file to configure a printer The interface to the installation script is the same for all BSD sys tems but the printcap entry is different HP UX System 1 o T
189. etailed information about each menu Information and Settings Display This display shows information or settings in accordance with the selected menu item Admin Password Inputting the admin password provides access to the Admin Mode See Entering the password p 10 2 for more information 10 4 Pi4700e System tab 1 0 10 4 System tab On the System tab information concerning the system structure for the Digital Copier can be checked and set Checking and setting can be per formed with the Summary O Details Y Preference Y Save Setting and Online Assistance menus 3 Minolta PageScope Light for Di470 Microsoft Internet Explorer MEE E On line Minolta Di470 MINOLTA E 3m Ready Version10 System Job Printer Scanner Network OQ Summary Device Status gt Details AAA gt Preference m Brae Save Setting a SS A 5 Online Assistance Cusfigaration Suminar Copier Memory 32 Mbyte Admin Password EDH Tray 12 Sa ind Mo E zu Deseo e Input Tray 1 2 LCC LCT Output Mailbin Finisher EDH Installed Network Ethernet 10 100BaseT Scanner Installed ier E Internet zone O Summary A summary of the status and the system structure of the Digital Copier is displayed Q Details The details of the status and the system structure of the Digital Copier and displayed e Input Tray It shows the current status of all the Input Trays installed on th
190. etter Gothic Bold Letter Gothic Italic ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Oblique ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Oblique ITC Bookman Light ITC Bookman Light Italic ITC Bookman Demi ITC Bookman Demi Italic CourierPS CourierPS Oblique CourierPS Bold CourierPS Bold Oblique Helvetica Helvetica Oblique Helvetica Bold Helvetica Bold Oblique Helvetica Narrow Helvetica Narrow Oblique Helvetica Narrow Bold Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique New Century Schoolbook Roman New Century Schoolbook Italic New Century Schoolbook Bold New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic Palatino Roman Palatino Italic Palatino Bold Palatino Bold Italic SymbolPS Times Roman Times Italic Times Bold Times Bold Italic ITC Zapf Dingbats 12 20 Pi4700e Preview Listing PostScript font 136 Albertus MT Albertus MT Light Albertus MT Italic Antique Olive Italic Antique Olive Bold Antique Olive Compact Antique Olive Roman Arial MT Arial Italic MT Arial Bold MT Arial Bold Italic MT Avant Garde Book Avant Garde Book Oblique Avant Garde Demi Avant Garde Demi Oblique Bodoni Bodoni Italic Bodoni Bold Bodoni Bold Italic Bodoni Poster Bodoni Poster Compressed Bookman Demi Bookman Demi Italic Bookman Light Bookman Light Italic Apple Chancery Chicago Clarendon Clarendon Light Clarendon Bold Cooper Black Cooper Black Italic Coronet Regular Courier Courier Bold Courier
191. ettings Chapter 4 Properties Settings Setup tab S Note With the PS driver the Watermark option is included on the Setup tab For details refer to Overlay tab on page 4 27 1 N up Outputs multiple originals on one sheet of paper N up Set the N up number Available settings Off 2up 4up 6up 9up 16up Border line Sets the layout border N up Style Sets the printing layout if Sra 1 I I a oe I I I I E 4 I I nd pee aes Horiz Horiz Vert Vert Ascending Descending Ascending Descending 2 Duplex Booklet when Dup 2way Tray Dup LCC or Duplex Cabinet is in stalled gt Specifies two sided printing and Booklet printing Off Not set Short Edge Binding Two sided printing takes place so that the short edge is bound Long Edge Binding Two sided printing takes place so that the long edge is bound Booklet Left Binding Four pages are printed on both sides of a single sheet of paper so that when the sheet is folded in the middle it forms a booklet left bound Booklet Right Binding Four pages are printed on both sides of a single sheet of paper so that when the sheet is folded in the middle it forms a booklet right bound 3 Paper Source Selects the machine tray to be used Sets the cover page function and the OHP interleaving function Paper Source Select the machine tray to be used The selectable paper sizes are limited by the types of pape
192. eue on the remote system Type in a description of the printer This information is optional 10 Press Ener to apply what you have input and create the queue 11 Execute the following command to produce a test print lp d queue name file name Configuration complete if the test prints without any problems HP UX Use the following procedure to set up a remote computer on the host that sends jobs to a Network Card using Network Card Ipd 1 At the prompt type sam On the window that appears select Printer Plotter Manager On the menu select List printer and plotters On the list that appears select Actions from the title bar and then se lect Add Remote Printer on the menu that appears 12 34 Pi4700e UNIX Configuration 12 5 Type the appropriate Network Card values on the window that ap pears The following table shows some sample settings Item Example Input Data Description Printer Name myprinter Name used in the Ip command Remote System Name fastprint Network Card host name recorded in etc hosts Remote printer Name PORT1 Ipd queue name You can use any name you want here From the three settings at the bottom of the window select Remote Printer is on BSD System Click OK Ping the Network Card to check the connection ping Network Card IP address gt When ping causes the message shown below to return it means the IP a
193. ew Printer Agent and click the Create button This causes the Create Printer Agent dialog box to appear Confirm the Printer Agent name default is the name of the new printer you are creating and browse to select the NDPS Manager you want to assign it to In the Gateway Types window select the Novell Printer Gateway The Novell PDS dialog box opens Configure the Novell PDS by selecting the Printer Type and Port Type Then click the OK button This starts the Configure Novell Port Handler configuration wizard Configure the Connection Type as Remote LPR on IP and click the Next button Specify the IP address of your host and click the Finish button 10 Select the printer driver for each client operating system O When users install this printer these drivers will be automatically downloaded to their workstations O If you choose a Windows 3 x driver but not a Windows 95 or Win dows NT driver a 16 bit driver will be selected Normally this does not create problems O If the driver you need is not listed rather than adding the driver to the RMS you can choose None from the top of each list Users will then be asked to provide a disk with the appropriate driver the first time they install this printer on their workstations 11 Click the Continue button The main browser window appears with your new controlled access printer listed 8 22 Pi4700e NetWare configuration 8 Using the Remote Printer LPR TCPIP Op
194. f printer controller Example When the IP address of the printer controller is 192 9 200 200 http 192 9 200 200 This causes PageScope Light for Pi4700e screen to appear Operation PageScope Light for Pi4700e operation is identical to that for mena Web sta O a hot link jumps to the link destination and the Back and F d buttons scroll through pages backwards and forward Entering the password After you log in to PageScope Light in the Admin Mode you can change the configuration of the Digital Copier settings 1 Type the administrator password into the Admin Pa initial default administrator password is s rd box The 2 Click the Log in button to log in to the Admin Mode When you want to log out click the Log out button Via Note Log out is performed automatically if no operation is performed for more than 10 minutes On the Network tab a password input text box appears on each set ting screen You must be able to input the correct password in order to change ork tab settings The password you should input here is the same as the Admin Password you input on other tabs 10 2 Pi4700e Screen configuration 10 10 3 Screen configuration The configuration of the PageScope Light for Pi4700e screen is shown below Note Screen images shown in this manual may differ slightly from actual ones Also note that specifications are subject to change without prior
195. f the Save Easy Set Name dialog box Use to save print setting data Before pressing the Save button set the contents of each tab Save Easy Set Name Easy Set Name 1 1 Easy Set Name Add a name to the stored contents Number of registrations 32 max Number of characters 10 characters max 5 22 Pi4700e Properties settings Setup tab This tab allows you to set the paper take up tray paper exit tray and var ious high grade printing functions 1 2 1 2 3 Save A Page Layout Setup Paper Device Options Setting Job Management Detail of Paper Source Output Setting fo Mail Bin 1 Mail Bin 2 Mail Bin 3 Mail Bin 4 Mail Bin 5 wy Printer Elgure Detail of Output Setting Easy Set Paper Source Duplex 3 Untitled 3 Paper Source amp Long Edge Binding aj Auto BA r gom 4 wv On Profile root diutil Prn55ppm dipjlrc ok Cancel Apply Help Paper Source Selects the machine tray to be used Sets the cover page function Paper Source Detail of Paper Source Output Setting This function selects the tray and the OHP interleaving function Select the machine tray to be used The selectable paper sizes are limited by the types of paper take up trays installed in the machine Available setti
196. f you are setting up a serial printer This auto detection may not always work on Spare and Alpha architectures If no devices were detected this could indicate a hardware problem that justifies further investigation ES Pi4700e 5 5 Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux 5 Printer setting with X window System S Note When network connection has been selected detection result dialog box will not be output 6 Edit screen will open First set optional printer name f Specify the SPOOL directory to be prepared It is acceptable to leave default value as it is 8 Click the Select button of input filter and select PostScript Printer here No other settings are required Configure Filter Driver Description Driver for the PostScript printers Does not use ghostscript Use if HP PaintJet your printer has a PostScript interpreter built in Choose the HP PaintJet XL resolution which corresponds to your printer from these list HP PaintJet XL300 and DeskJet 1200C IBM 3853 JetPrinter Resolution J Paper Size Imagen ImPress 300x300 Lexmark 5700 BW Lexmark 7000 7200 BW 1200x1200 Mitsubishi CP50 i REC Pair Color Depth Uniprint Mode NEC Prinwriter 2X UP Okidata Microline 182 Printer Type Te D o Ren Printing Options Printer Driver for Linux Tek 4693d color printer 2 bit mode Tek 4693d color printer 4 bit mode Tek 4693d color printer 8 bit
197. figuration Procedure Windows 2000 XP 1 3 Install TCP IP under Windows 2000 XP Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for more information Assign the IP parameters See 3 2 Specifying the IP Address From the Printer s Touch Panel p 3 2 for more information Use the procedure below to install the printer Installing the printer Windows 2000 XP 1 Install the printer driver following the instructions that come with the in staller Make the new printer the default printer Right click the new printer icon and select Properties from the menu Display the Ports tab Click Add Port This displays a list of available port types Select Standard TCP IP Port from the list and then click New Port This starts Add Standard TCP IP Printer Port Wizard Click Next on the introduction page of the wizard On the Add Port page type the IP address of the Network Card into the Printer Name or IP Address box If the network you are on uses DNS Domain Name Services type in the DNS name instead of the IP address Type the name of the port you want into the Port Name box and then click Next Note When you type the IP address into the Printer Name or IP Address box the name of the port is automatically entered in the Port Name box as IP_ lt IP address but you can change the port name as you want Pi4700e Chapter 3 Network Settings Chapter 3 Network Settings LPR Printing 9 Onthe Addit
198. figure NDS and to set up the Network Card with NDS context and tree The procedures for using NWADMIN to create the printer print server and other print queue objects are provided below After you create these objects you must then associate them with each other Under NetWare 4 x you can keep bindery resources on any server if you want by declaring a SET statement in your AUTOEXEC NCF file If you want you can also use PCONSOLE instead of NWADMIN PCON SOLE can also be used to set up static print server information such as which queues to service and whom to notify in case of problems See the Novell NetWare documentation for details about using PCONSOLE for NDS S Note Some NetWare servers require that bindery context be configured on the file server even when using the NDS mode Pi4700e Chapter 8 Network Interface Card Chapter 8 Network Interface Card NetWare configuration Creating a Printer Object 1 Click the NWADMIN icon in the NetWare Tools group in Windows This displays the NetWare Administrator dialog box To access your directory tree open a browser window by clicking the Tools menu item and then the Browse item 2 Highlight the organizational unit or organization where you want to cre ate the print service in the directory tree select Object and then on the pop up menu select Create S Note If you want you can also create objects in NWADMIN by selecting an organizational unit r
199. following are the commands used for printer con figuration lpadmin p lt printer name gt v dev nic lt printer name gt S Note Your host may require you to use the i command to specify the model enable printer name accept printer name You can use other options in the Ipadmin command See your system documentation for full details S Note The printer name must be the same as the one you specified during Network Card installation SCO also provides the sam program which can be used to configure the printer If you use sam make all specifications just as if the printer were connect ed directly to dev Iprinter lt printer name gt The software installed with your SCO system should be sufficient to satis fy most printing needs SCO supplies ASCII to PostScript filters that are invoked automatically whenever PostScript is specified as the content type The SCO UNIX Ip system also supplies interface scripts that gener ate PostScript banners When necessary you can use the Ipfilter com mand to define new filters and content types The installation provides you with the full power and flexibility of the Ip print service and the fact that you are printing across the network is totally transparent 12 50 Pi4700e UNIX Configuration 12 AIX RISC System 6000 The AIX printing subsystem is driven by the qdaemon program which uses data in the usr Ipd qconfig file to manage queues and route j
200. for Macintosh Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 Installing the printer driver 17 Select either Minolta Di470U PS ppd for measurements in inches or Minolta Di470E PS ppd for metric measurements which were cop ied to the desktop in step 4 and then click the Choose button From BE Desktop F3 Minolta Di470U PS ppd above statement indicates that this PPD was written using the Adobe Kind Document Size 136 KB 4 Go to 4 i gt cr Add to Favorites Cancel Choose 18 Select the appropriate printer model and then click the Add button The printer driver is installed 00 Printer List AppleTalk a i Name A Type MLT 504486 PostScript printer Character SetWestern vl Printer Model Minolta Di470U PS ppd E Cancel Add gt _ _ eoo Printer List e Add Name Status MLT_504486 6 12 Pi4700e Installing the printer driver 6 19 From the Printers menu click Show Info The Printer Info property dialog box appears 20 Select Installable Options Printer Info MLT_000031 Y Name Location PPD Printer Ni Installable Options MLT_000031 Location Layout Queue Name W2K_LP_8200_2F Host Name Local Apply Changes ne e dal e 21 Enter the printer settings and then click the Apply Changes button o Printer Info MLT 000031 I
201. form the above procedure starting from step 2 You cannot use ARP to assign an IP address if the Network Card has already been assigned an IP address by ATIP Pi4700e 12 55 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix Setting Up IP Parameters Assigning IP Addresses Using ARP For UNIX 1 On a computer associated with the same network segment as the Dig ital Copier log on as root Type the command shown below arp S IP address assigned to Network Card MAC address Example Network Card MAC Address 00 20 6b aa bb cc IP Address 192 9 200 200 arp s 192 9 200 200 00 20 6b aa bb cc This stores the MAC address and IP address data in the cache Next type the command shown below ping IP address assigned to Network Card Example IP address assigned to Network Card 192 9 200 200 ping 192 9 200 200 This command sends the IP address to the Network Card A timeout message is returned until the Network Card recognizes this IP address and restarts The Network Card waits for auto reset Otherwise restart the Digital Copier After the Network Card restarts input the command from step 3 again ping IP address assigned to Network Card Example IP Address 192 9 200 200 ping 192 9 200 200 The following response is returned when the IP address is assigned 192 9 200 200 is alive When assignment is complete type the command below to delete the arp cache entry arp d IP address ass
202. fy a URL where detailed information about the printer manufacturer particular printer can be found Operations Supported Use these settings to specify the IPP printing operations sup ported by the printer Unchecking an item means that it is not supported for IPP printing Document Format Sup ported Put a check mark next to the document data formats that the printer supports for IPP printing Document Format Select the default document data format The uses this data format for IPP printing when no data format is specified by the client Message from Operator Type in a message from the printer administrator to users job k octets supported Specify in kilo octet units the upper limit and lower limit of the total job size that the printer can receive Apply button Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this point Clear button Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this point 3 32 Pi4700e Specifying network settings from PageScope Light 3 WINS Configuration This screen appears when you click the WINS Configuration menu on the Network tab It lets you change WINS settings WINS Windows Inter net Name Service makes it possible for a device such as your network interface card to register a NetBIOS name like MLT_995243 along with its current IP address like 192 9 200 200 A client wanting to contact the printer uses
203. g eeeeeeeeeee eene eene eene nnne nennen 12 64 Pi4700e Foreword Limited Software Warranty For the USA and Canada Users Limited Warranty Minolta warrants that the software will perform in accordance with the ac companying written materials for a period of 90 ninety days from the date of purchase Minolta does not warrant that the operation of the program will meet your requirements This limited warranty gives you specific legal rights You may have others which vary from state jurisdiction to state ju risdiction Purchase Remedies Minolta s entire liability and your exclusive remedy with respect to the soft ware shall be at Minolta s option either repair or replacement of the soft ware The software must be returned to Minolta with a copy of your proof of purchase The Limited Warranty is void if failure of the software has re sulted from accident abuse or misapplication Any replacement software will be warranted for the remainder of the original warranty period or 30 thirty days whichever is longer The remedies provided herein are customer s sole and exclusive reme dies In no event shall Minolta Corporation be liable for any lost profits di rect indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether based on contract tort or any other legal theory Minolta Network Card Warranty Warranty Term Minolta Network Cards have a 1 One Year Warranty The Network Car
204. g a Properties dialog box from an Application Menu 2 14 23 Windows NT 4 Q irren cnet tnra crane nnm etna enun enRnDa 2 15 Operating Environment essseeeeneeenenenen 2 15 Installation np eI a Run eret t eee uad 2 16 Making General Settings Before Using the Printer 2 20 Displaying a Properties dialog box 2 21 Displaying a Properties dialog box from the Printer Folder 2 21 Displaying a Properties dialog box from an Application Menu 2 21 Pi4700e i Contents 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 INtFOCUCTION 0 cceceseeeeseeeeenneeeeseeeeeneeeeensneeeneeeensneeeaneneeaseeeeansnennes 3 1 Specifying the IP Address From the Printer s Touch Panel 3 2 Setting procedure 00 ee eeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeaeteaeeeeeeaeeseeeteaeesaeeeaeetnatens 3 2 Peer to Peer Printing with TCP IP eeeeeeeee 3 5 Configuration Procedure Windows 95 98 Me 3 5 Installing the printer Windows 95 98 Me sse 3 6 Configuration Procedure Windows NT 4 0 seeessss 3 7 Installing the printer Windows NT 4 0 en 3 7 Peer to Peer Printing Program Windows 3 8 Installing the IP Peer to Peer Printing Program 3 8 Setting Up the Peer to Peer Printing Program
205. g contents Setting Up the Protocol You can use the Protocol setup command to configure non AppleTalk network protocols On the Option menu select Protocol setup to display the dialog box shown below Protocol Setup Protocol On Off IP Address NetWare O TCP IP O 255 t Gateway 9 200 x You can use the radio buttons on the dialog box to enable and disable pro tocols We recommend that you select off for protocols that are not used on your network After enabling TCP IP you can set or change IP parameters Input the val ues for your network environment into the IP Address Subnet Mask and Default Gateway fields on the dialog box Note Check with your network administrator if you are not sure of the IP pa rameter settings you should make for your network environment In some cases the IP parameters all show zeros This indicates that IP parameters are not set it does not indicate the current IP parame ters 1 After making the settings you want click the OK button 2 To enable the new settings power the Digital Copier down and then back up again You can then check the settings on the status page 8 36 Pi4700e Using the utility software Setting Up the Status Page You can enable and disable printing of the status page each time the Dig ital Copier is powered up On the Options menu select Options to d
206. g the Minolta Di PS ppd file in the PPD folder of the CD ROM O S Note Specify proper file according to the machine used Minolta Di PS ppd Specification U Inch area E Metric area Model name of the machine c 7 o 2 c o in _ o 2 _ o 2 a D c a 6 2 Pi4700e Installing the printer driver Macintosh HD 148 2 MBindisk 83 7 MB a vailablg System Folder 24items 148 2 MB in disk 83 7 MB available An Extensions Apple Menu Item Finder E About System 7 4 MacTCP DNR Startup Items 57 items MacinTalk 3 Shortcuts Simpl 148 2 MB in disk 83 7 MB available Printer Descriptions A qn q __litems 148 2 MB in disk 83 7 MB available TE Minolta Di 470U PS PPD 9 Remove the CD ROM from the CD ROM drive 10 Select Chooser from the Apple menu S Note The steps that follow will apply when the LaserWriter printer driver has previously been installed in the Macintosh computer Pi4700e 6 3 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh Installing the printer driver Rbout This Macintosh ES 4608P165 RppleCD Rudio Player Automated Tasks gt Calculator Chooser Control Panels Find File E Jigsaw Puzzle Key Caps Launcher Note Pad El Quadra HD 1 g
207. ge appears on the computer screen saying some thing to the effect that no printer is connect ed no paper is loaded or LPT1 write error An error is present in the ma chine Check the control panel of the machine If an error is displayed identify the error and take the necessary action by referring to the Error List on page 11 6 The printer cable or network ca ble is disconnected Check that the printer cable or network cable is connected properly to the computer and controller Printing does not start despite the com pletion of printing set up on the computer An error is present in the ma chine Check the control panel of the machine If an error is displayed identify the error and take the necessary action by referring to the Error List on page 11 6 The printer cable or network ca ble is disconnected Check that the printer cable or network cable is connected properly to the computer and controller The printer driver selected for printing is not for the Pi4700e Check the printer name A print job yet to be processed is loaded in the machine causing the printer to wait Refer to the Job List on the ma chine control panel to check for print order for Linux File to be printed is not a PS file Delete job and check to see if it is PS file Pi4700e Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 1
208. ger as signed This can be any server in the current NDS tree in which you have in stalled NDPS This will be the only server on which you will be able to load this NDPS Manager The NDPS Manager will store its database on a volume of this server Pi4700e NetWare configuration 8 Configuring an NDPS Gateway for IPX The Novell NDPS gateway for IPX is compatible with queue based Net Ware printing technologies The following procedure describes how to set up and configure NDPS to interface with the printer via queue based print ing Configuring Queue Based Printers Prerequisites v The print queue you want to reference must already exist v Ona Novell 4 x or 5 x network using IPX install the printer and the print server 1 In NetWare Administrator select the container where you want the NDPS Manager object to reside 2 Choose Object Create NDPS Printer This causes the Create NDPS Printer dialog box to appear 3 Type a name in the NDPS Printer Name field 4 Inthe Printer Agent Source field select Create a New Printer Agent and click the Create button This causes the Create Printer Agent dialog box to appear 5 Confirm the Printer Agent name default is the name of the new printer you are creating and browse to select the NDPS Manager you want to assign it to 6 Atthe Gateway Types window select the Novell Printer Gateway This causes the Novell PDS dialog box to appear f Configure the Novell PDS
209. h and Multi staple Finisher Mailbin Finish er or Folding Finisher must be selected from Installable Op tions to specify Punch Select Multi staple Finisher Mailbin Finisher or Folding Finisher from Installable Op tions Punch cannot be specified if Booklet or OHP interleaving is specified Check the setting of Booklet and OHP Interleaving Unable to effect Punch No holes can be made if the type of paper is thick paper or OHP transparencies Check the type of paper Prints can at times be fed out without being punched if the di rection of the paper loaded in the paper source is not appropriate Check the direction of the paper The hole punch posi tion is opposite to what is expected The paper direction and N up do not match the setting made for Orientation Change the setting for Orienta tion Pi4700e Unable to Print 11 Symptom Possible Cause Action Folding cannot be specified for Windows The optional Folding Finisher is necessary for you to specify Folding Folding Finisher must be selected on Device Options Setting tab Select Folding Finisher on De vice Options Setting tab for Macintosh The optional Folding Finisher is necessary for you to specify Folding Folding Finisher must be selected on Installable Op tions Select Folding Finisher on
210. have valid IP parameters assigned Configuration Procedure 1 Install TCP IP under Windows 2000 XP Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for more information Assign the IP parameters See 3 2 Specifying the IP Address From the Printer s Touch Panel p 3 2 for more information Use the procedure below to install the printer Installing the printer 1 N For Windows 2000 on the Start menu point to Settir click Printers For Windows XP on the Start menu click Printers and Faxes 19S and then For Windows 2000 double click the Add Printer icon to start the Add Printer Wizard For Windows XP click the Add Printer icon to start the Add Printer Wizard Pi4700e 3 21 Chapter 3 Network Settings Chapter 3 Network Settings IPP Printing 3 Click Next on the introduction page of the wizard 4 Onthe Local or Network Printer page select the Network printer option and then click Next 5 Onthe Locate Your Printer page select the Connect to a printer on the Internet or your intranet option 6 Type the IPP printers URL into the URL field as shown below and then click Next http IP address of the printer 631 nic Print Example When the IP address of the Digital Copier is 192 9 200 200 http 192 9 200 200 631 nic Print f Click OK on the confirmation dialog box that appears 8 Inthe Manufacturers and Printers lists select the printer you want to use and then clic
211. he driver to the RMS you can choose None from the top of each list Users will then be asked to provide a disk with the appropriate driver the first time they install this printer on their workstations 12 Click the e button The main browser window appears with your new controlled access printer listed 8 18 Pi4700e NetWare configuration 8 Bindery Reference Queues Novell suggests that you upgrade all of your printers to NDPS as soon as possible However you may still want to provide your users with access to queue based printing resources for a variety of reasons While connect ing to queue based printers controlled by NetWare 4 or NetWare 5 serv ers in the current NDS tree can be accomplished directly when you configure a Printer Agent you may need to create one or more bindery reference queues to provide access to printers controlled by a NetWare 3 file server or printers controlled by a NetWare 4 or NetWare 5 server in a different NDS tree A bindery reference queue serves as a pointer to a real NetWare queue on both types of servers After you have created a bindery reference queue to point to a real bindery queue on a target server you can then configure a Printer Agent to send jobs to that queue just as you would if the queue actually resided on a NetWare 4 x or NetWare 5 x server in the same tree The following section explains how to accomplish this proce dure using NetWare Administrator S N
212. he screen to complete the in p You can change this to any other Aecio dolo the installation proce dure Using MAP Setting Up MAP 1 1 On the Start menu point to P 1s and then Map 2 On the submenu that appears click N Make the settings you want on the dialog box that appears MAP Setup IV Search for IPX based printers Cinal IV Search for IP based printers Help Max Hops for IP Search p Settings e Search for IPX based printers Check this option when you want to detect IPX SPX based printers e Search for IP based printers Check this option when you want to detect TCP IP based printers e MaxHops for IP Search Input a value for the maximum number of hops for the search The ini tial default value is 2 Pi4700e 8 29 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card o D E o lt Network Interface Card Using the utility software S Note The maximum number of hops value defines the maximum number of subnetworks the program searches for Network Cards When a value of zero is set here the search does not include any subnetworks to which the computer is connected A value of 2 searches all networks that can be accessed through no more than two routers Specifying a value of 15 or greater automatically detects all connected Network Caras but such a high setting greatly increases traffic and so it is not recommended After the settings are
213. hvirprt command See the AIX RISC System 6000 documentation in cases where a printer requires even more exten sive settings After adding a virtual printer a stanza that looks like the following will be in usr opf qconfig for device printer name printer name file dev printer name backend usr lpd piobe Edit filez dev printer name to filez dev nic printer n gt Output mise on the previously abacied virtual viel is sent to the named pipe and routed to the Network Card Before editing the files named above make sure the following daemon is running usr nic lpr print dev nic lt printer name gt printfast 10001 amp AIX Print Command The AIX Ip command works slightly differently from other System V Re lease 4 Ip commands The following Ip commands can be used to print files lp d queue name file name Or lp d queue name device name file name 12 52 Pi4700e Setting Up IP Parameters 12 12 7 Setting Up IP Parameters Before you can use TCP IP for network printing you must first assign the following IP parameters to the Network Card IP address subnet mask default gateway You can use any of the following methods for assigning IP parameters to the Network Card Bundled Utility Programs Management Access Program MAP Windows or a Web browser See 8 7 Using the utility software Note that your computer must have IPX SPX conversion protocol in s
214. i eens 7 27 Using the settings function eere 7 29 OVA ai ttai 7 29 Procedure oie peiuP DER eUHNE 7 29 Using the settings stored for a current print job 7 29 Storing settings iie erp REIN RUNE ias 7 30 Deleting settings which have been stored esee 7 32 Confirming that the data has been transferred to the MACHINE 7 34 OVelVIOW sure einem OR e ME 7 34 Procedente cia ub eti qme at 7 34 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 jen me 8 1 Getting ready incio id eii 8 1 Utility software on the CD ROM eee 8 2 System requirements sss 8 3 Setting up the network card eere 8 4 Connecting a network cable essen 8 4 Configuring the network card sse 8 4 Windows configuration eeeeeeeeee eene 8 5 NetWare configuration eeeeeeeeeeeee eene 8 5 Using NWSetUp 11 petiit d d dn t cedes 8 5 Using NetWare Client esee 8 5 NetWare 4 x Configuration Using Bindery Emulation 8 5 Configuration Using Novell Directory Services 8 8 Configuring NetWare Enterprise Print Services NDPS 8 16 Macintosh configuration eeeeeeeeeereeeeeeen nnns 8 27 Setting U
215. ication message The default val ue for this setting is 30 minutes and the setting range is 1 to 60 min utes Pi4700e 8 45 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card 8 Troubleshooting 8 8 Troubleshooting This chapter explains the Network Card s LED status indicators and tells you what to do when experiencing problems with the Network Card If the information presented here does not solve your problem contact your nearest Support Center or Technical Service Representative LED Status Indicators o D E o lt The Network Card has two LED status indicators amber and green in col or o _ 5 The amber LED shows the progress of normal print jobs It flashes while o the Network Card is sending or receiving data and goes out when there S is no data send or receive operation in progress _ 2 The green LED shows normal Network Card operation as described in An the table below x p E Digital Copier St Ne 1 5 igital Copier Sta orma 5 LED Operation tus Network Card Status Aa Z Green LED lit Power on Self test in progress Normal Print job standby Normal operation Normal Green LED flashes 3 Self test finished Prints status page Normal times then remains lit Green LED flashes Self test in progress RAM abnormality detected Abnormal quickly Green LED flashes 4 Self test in progress Ethernet hardware self test Abnormal times then pauses failed Check your network
216. ight clicking to display a pop up menu and left clicking Create to display the New Object window Then you would continue with the steps below 3 When the New Object window shown below appears select the Printer icon on the Class of New Object list and then click the OK button Class of New Object B Organizational Unit a Print Queue B Print Server El Profile 942 Template amp User Ej Volume 4 Onthe Create Printer window that appears type the printer name you want into the Printer Name field and then click the Create button Pi4700e NetWare configuration Creating a Print Server Object 1 2 Highlight Organizational Unit again Select Object from the main menu and then select Create on the pop up menu that appears On the New Object window select the Print Server Name icon on the Class of New Object list and then click the OK button On the Create Print Server window that appears type the print server name you want into the Print Server Name field and then click the Create button Creating a Print Queue Object 1 2 Highlight Organizational Unit again Select Object from the main menu and then select Create on the pop up menu that appears On the New Object window that appears select the Print Queue icon on the Class of New Object list and then click the OK button Click the Directory Services Queue button type the names you want into the Print
217. igned to Network Card Example IP Address Assigned to Network Card 192 9 200 200 arp d 192 9 200 200 12 56 Pi4700e Setting Up IP Parameters 12 S Note When the Network Card host name is already registered in the hosts file etc hosts you can use the host name in place of the IP address Example When the entry below is registered in the hosts file 192 9 200 299 printfast arp S printfast 00 20 6b aa bb cc 3 Note ARP can be used to assign an IP address only Other IP parameters must be set using Telnet or a Web browser For details see 12 8 Us ing Telnet to Make Settings p 12 61 and PageScope Light for Pi5501 Operator s Manual You cannot use ARP to assign an IP address if the Network Card has already been assigned an IP address by ATIP Assigning IP Addresses Using the BOOTP Daemon For UNIX Power down the Digital Copier On a computer associated with the same network segment as the Dig ital Copier log on as root If the BOOTP daemon is already running stop it Edit etc bootptab by adding the following NIC host name N ht hardware type gt 1 ha ethernet Address gt ip IP address gt sm lt subnet mask gt gw gateway address Example RFC 1048 Standard MAC Address 00 20 6B AA BB CC IP Address 192 19 200 200 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway Address 192 9 200 10 Pi4700e 12 57 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter
218. ils of Pag eScope Light see 10 PageScope Light Set Item E mail FTP HDD IP Address O O O Subnet Mask O O Default Gateway A A A SMTP Server Address O ES Reply Address O SMTP Connection Timeout O Default Compression O FTP Proxy Server Address os A os Proxy Port No A E mail Destination List O File Destination List O O Necessary A Necessary depending on environment Necessary Devices servers Not necessary Set Item E mail FTP HDD Network Interface Card O O O SMTP Server O m FTP Server O Hard Disk Drive O O Necessary A Necessary depending on environment Not necessary Pi4700e 9 5 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode o2 LE o 2 o lt Scanner Mode Network Setting Network Setting Accessing to PageScope Light PageScope Light for Pi4700e can be accessed directly from a Web browser 1 Start the Web browser Inthe URL field enter the IP address of the printer controller as shown below http IP address of printer controller Example When the IP address of the printer controller is 192 9 200 200 http 192 9 200 200 This causes PageScope Light for Pi4700e screen to appear Operation PageScope Light for Pi4700e operation is identical to that for Internet Web pages ede a hot link jumps to the link destination and the Back and 1 buttons s
219. ing job When using Lock Job set a password in Password A locked printing job will be printed when it is unlocked using the Job List display on the panel of the machine In this case a password is necessary Lock Job Make the lock job function valid Password Enter the password of the lock job Setting range 0000 to 9999 4 digits Distribution when Hard Disk Drive in Copier is installed Specifies adding a distribution in the background during printing and also sets the conditions for adding distribution number A distribution number is added for each set of prints Distribution Number Select the distribution number function 1st Page Only Select whether to print the distribution number on only the first page or on all pages Starting Number Specify the starting number of the distribution numbers to be printed Setting range 001 to 999 Job Owner Default User Name The user name set in the printer driver is displayed as the job user name on the machine s touch panel Setting range 8 characters max S Note for 1 To clear the Account Code function when PCL6 is used type any number in the Access Number box If no number is typed in the Ac cess Number box the message Access Number Error will appear and you might not be able to exit from the function S Note for 2 To clear the Lock Job function when PCL6 is used type any number in the Password box If no number is typed in the Password box
220. ing registration touch panel of the digital A icti scm ibidem a og ro ie ope darter 9 29 Pi4700e vii Contents c 10 5 10 6 10 7 10 8 Deleting registration touch panel of the digital copier 9 30 Direct Input ziii ancy aii aie een 9 32 Scanning double sided original sss 9 33 Scanning with size specified seseeees 9 34 Scanning with density changed ssssseee 9 35 Scanning with Image Type changed ssessesesss 9 36 Scanning with file format changed ssssesss 9 36 Scanning with resolution changed sseeees 9 37 The operation of Capturing Images by TWAIN 9 37 Installing the TWAIN Driver ese nn 9 37 Capturing Images by TWAIN sseeeeenemee 9 38 How to input characters eese 9 40 System requirements eese eere nnne 10 1 hol mec DEP 10 2 Operation tage ei eer Periti 10 2 Entering the password ssss e 10 2 Screen configuration eese nnne 10 3 SAA raaua abaan adipo a uaan o saaarin Kaaa aiaa 10 5 O SUMMA iia a d teet lc ts 10 5 ODetalS cui rt aces 10 5 9 Preferences ace 10 6 9S ve Selting eonun Dundee aeri RAE 10 6 Online Assistante Ei di 10 6 Hire 10 7 Print Job Management ssssssee
221. ings 5 Job Management tab 1 Setup Paper Device Options Setting Job Management Easy Set Security 2 Untitled Account Code Access Number 0002 9999 Save 0007 Lock Job 3 Password Distribution 1 2 Distribution Number af Starting Number 1 F 1 999 Page Layout Printer Figure Profile root diutil PrnSsppm dipjire Cancel Apply Help Account Code Check this box when using the copy track function An account code is attached to each printing job enabling you to carry out management at the machine In order to use this function copy track function must be set at the machine When the copy track function is set at the machine printing may sometimes fail to take place until the access number managed at the machine is correctly set Account Code Makes the copy track function valid Access Number Enter the access number set in the machine Setting range 0002 to 9999 4 digits Lock Job Check this box when locking a printing job When using Lock Job set a password in Password A locked printing job is printed when it is unlocked using the Job List display on the panel of the machine In this case a password is necessary Lock Job Make the lock job function valid Password Enter the password of the lock job Setting range 0000 to 9999 4 digits Distribution when H
222. inistra tion Manual f Save the file and quit the editor 8 You need to use Ipadmin to configure the host printer Type the follow ing lpadmin p lt printer name gt v dev null i usr nic port1l interface S Note Ipadmin configures the printer name and associates it with a given de vice and printer interface program There is no etc printcap file in volved with this method of configuration 9 Next initialize the printer Type the following commands accept printer name enable printer name Enter S Note After each entry lpadmin acknowledges the invoked command 10 Next type the following command lp d printer name etc hosts Es 11 Check for output or type the following lpstat printer name Or lpstat t Pi4700e UNIX Configuration 12 SCO UNIX The installation procedure for SCO UNIX is similar to that for HP UX The Network Card solution uses a network direct filter named nicfilter The sys tem invokes nicfilter directly from the printer interface file After performing the procedure under Loading the Program you must configure the printer and make it known to the Ip system 1 Type the following to run the installation script nicinst The script automatically downloads the appropriate Network Card util ities for your system and displays questions to prompt you for the in formation it needs Select your system you are using from the list of options that
223. int ers Example PTR MKTG DOMAIN COM based on unit name Select this option to use unit names to distinguish between print ers 3 After the settings are the way you want click OK to close the dialog box Restart Windows to put your settings into effect Network Cards may be undetectable with certain routers and maximum hops settings made with the above procedure When this happens you must add printers manually using the procedure describe below e ES o 2 o Ren Adding a Printer Manually o D c E 1 On the Start menu point to Programs and then Ip p2p o 09 x 2 On the submenu that appears click IP P2P to display the Peer to 9 Peer IP Setup dialog box o zZ 3 Click the Printers button to display the dialog box shown below IP Addr a lame Add A Delete Port o 7 Find Printers Clear Description CF i O Select Available Printers me Unit Name umitir Portiumber 192 9 200 200 192 9 200 200 10001 Minolta Di470 s 3 10 Pi4700e Peer to Peer Printing Program Windows 3 4 Input the required information for the printer you want to add into the fields provided O IP Address Input the IP address of the printer you want to add O Name Input the name you want to assign to the printer Use an easily un derstandable name O Port Input the printer port number The default port number is 10001 O Descriptions Input a description of the printer After making a
224. interface Ethernet port Memory 16MB or more Disk drive CD ROM drive is required for installation only Free space on hard disk 2MB or more Recommended printer soft ware LaserWriter 8 5 1 or later LaserWriter 8 6 or later S Note Do not use an Ethernet cable of low quality Defective printing could result Installation Macintosh OS 7 8 9 This section explains the installation procedure for the Macintosh printer driver under Macintosh OS 7 8 or 9 S Note For details on the procedure for installing the printer driver on a Mac operating system refer to Installation Mac OS X on page 6 9 Pi4700e 6 1 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 Installing the printer driver The following procedures are concerned with Apple Macintosh system 7 5 5 and LaserWriter 8 5 1 S Note When OS with other version or LaserWriter is used procedures may vary slightly Make sure that the controller and computer are properly connected to each other with an Ethernet cable 1 Turn ON the machine N Turn ON the computer and start the Macintosh OS 3 Install the printer controller CD ROM in the CD ROM drive of your computer 4 Double click the Macintosh HD icon on the desktop to the Printer Description folder opened in step 7 to copy the file 5 Double click the System Folder 6 Double click Extensions folder o 7 Double click Printer Description folder 5 8 Dra
225. ion will start When all the files have been copied from the CD ROM the corre sponding icon will be added to the Printers window This completes the installation f Printers A x File Edit View Help a d Add Printer Minolta Di470 PCL6 2 object s selected AL Pi4700e 2 19 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Windows NT 4 0 Making General Settings Before Using the Printer The printer driver requires setting of items that are common to all print jobs including the port to which the printer cable is connected and option al devices configured with the machine These settings must be made us ing property dialog box available from the Properties command after the printer driver has been installed or whenever the operating environment is changed The most common settings were made when the printer driver was in stalled meaning that you do not usually bother to change them Some items must however be changed in the following cases Cases where changes are necessary Applicable property tab You want to add a comment to distinguish the printer from others The computer s connecting port has been changed You want to change the conditions for the display of a timeout error You want to designate a port to which the machine is connected via a network this setting must be made on a computer connected to the machine via a net work You wan
226. ional Port Information Required page select Custom and then click Settings 10 On the Configure Standard TCP IP Port Monitor dialog box select LPR from the LPR Settings box 11 Type PORT1 in the name of the queue you want into the Queue Name box and then check the LPR Byte Counting Enabled check box 12 Click OK to return to the Additional Port Information Required page 13 Click Next to display the next wizard page and then click Finish 14 Click the Close button of the Printer Ports dialog box and then click the Apply button of the Properties dialog box 15 Display the General tab and then print a test page 16 If the test prints normally complete the procedure by clicking OK to close the Properties dialog box After you finish installing a printer with the above procedure you can use it just as you would any standard local printer The printer can also be used as a network printer by other Windows computers on your network whose Windows 2000 XP systems are configured the same way as de scribed above 3 20 Pi4700e IPP Printing 3 8 IPP Printing This section explains how to use the Windows 2000 XP standard IPP printing function Digital Copier wn Jl bg ERU Windows 2000 XP TCP IP IPP Client Requirements e Computer must have TCP IP installed and enabled e Network Card must
227. ions have caused the following items to conflict with each other Item Current Selection Interleaving Paper OHP Interleaving When the Conflicts dialog box appears it shows the settings that could not be combined with each other Check the details and click the Cancel but ton to quit Tip The dialog box looks slightly differently from this one when Device Op tions are being set or the PS driver is being used S Note Some settings which are defied by the machine for the restricted com binations of different functions can at times be accepted by the printer driver If a print command is issued from the personal computer with such settings made the machine does not produce the output correct ly or abandons the job to produce nothing Make sure that you make correct settings 5 35 Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux Properties settings G Jajdeyo xnur JO JSALIG Je1uug Pi4700e 5 36 Installing the printer driver EE Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 6 1 Installing the printer driver Operating environment Before installing the printer driver make sure that your computer meets the following requirements If it doesn t the printer driver may not function properly Operating system Apple Macintosh System 7 5 3 or later 8 x 9 x or Mac OS X 10 2 or later Personal computer Apple Macintosh computer or a Macintosh compatible computer 1 0
228. ip for 1 Set the paper take up tray using De The paper take up tray used is displayed in green on the Printer Fig ure S Note for 2 Some paper sizes cannot be selected For details refer to the User Manual of the machine S Tip for 2 Set the type of finisher using De The paper take up tray used is displayed in green on the Printer Fig ure S Note for 3 If you print a document that contains pages of different sizes and or different directions in the same job the image may be partially cut or images may overlap each other Two sided printing and OHP interleaving cannot be set simultaneous ly 5 24 Pi4700e Properties settings 5 S Tip for 3 The sizes for which you can perform two sided printing are from 140 x 182mm to 297 x 432 mm Short Edge Binding and Long Edge Binding are displayed on the Page Layout S Note for 4 This function is used with a document whose contents are mainly text Using the function with a photo image could even dirty the produced image Pi4700e 5 25 Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux 5 Properties settings Functions of the Detail of Paper Source Dialog Box This function sets the cover page function and the OHP interleaving func tion Detail of Paper Source 1 Interleaving Paper I OHP Interleaving 2 F with Image Interleaving Paper Source awe fry i a OK Cancel Help 1 Cover
229. is play the dialog box shown below Control Options Status Sheets Enable Disable Check the Enable radio button to enable printing of the status page at power up After making the setting click the OK button The setting you make will be applied from the next time you power up the Digital Copier Pi4700e 8 37 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card o D E o lt Network Interface Card Using the utility software NWSetup Windows NWSetup is a program that simplifies setup of the Network Card in a Net Ware environment Requirements e A NetWare server on the network e IPX SPX compatible protocol installed on the computer e Novel NetWare Client 32 installed on the computer Operating system Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 or 2000 S Note See Appendix A Installing and Setting Up Network Protocol Win dows and the applicable Windows documentation for information about installing IPX SPX under Windows Installing NWSetup Use the following procedure to install NWSetup 1 Loadthe CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the computer you want to use 2 Start Setup exe in the Nwsetup folder on the CD ROM Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the in stallation The default installation directory is C Program Files Nwsetup You can change this to any other directory during the installation proce dure 8 38 Pi4700e
230. is function TCP IP Configuration Password NetWare Configuration TCPITP Configuration AppleTalk Configuration IP Address Faz NI Fo i IPP Configuration Subnet Mask 255 255 255 n WINS Configuration Default Gateway naz fes fo ff Reset Maiitenance Base Port Number 10000 DHCP v IP Address in NVRAM v Apply Clear i internet zone Password Input the password assigned to the network interface card The initial factory default is sysadm Clicking the Apply button after inputting the wrong password displays a password error mes sage without changing the settings IP Address Input the IP address you want to assign to the network interface card Subnet Mask Input the network subnet mask Default Gateway If the network has a router input the IP address of the router Base Port Number Type in the base port number for RAW port printing A port number that in one greater than the base port number you specify here is used for actual printing Example Specifying a base port number of 10000 results in an actual port number of 10001 DHCP Checking this option sends a DHCP Dynamic Host Configura tion Protocol request whenever the network interface card is powered up When there is a DHCP server on the network the network interface card can obtain IP parameters automatically from the server at power up IP Address in NVRAM When this option is checked the network interface card uses the IP a
231. ith its bundled peer to peer printing programs for peer to peer printing without a server Peer to peer printing can be per formed using TCP IP or IPX SPX There are two ways you can print from Windows NT 4 0 with TCP IP us ing the bundled IP Peer to Peer Printing Program and using the Windows NT standard LPR printing function There are two ways you can print from Windows 2000 XP with TCP IP us ing the Windows 2000 XP standard LPR printing function and using the Windows 2000 XP standard IPP printing function e ES o 2 o Ren Specifying the IP Address From the Printer s Touch Panel Setting procedure 1 Press the Utility key 2 Touch Administrator Mode and input the Administrator code Network Settings 3 Touch NetworkSet Utility RN wp Administrator Mode NetworkSet 3 2 Pi4700e Specifying the IP Address From the Printer s Touch Panel 3 4 Touch IP Address Enter 5 With the keypad in the operation panel type in the IP address and then touch Enter Utility IP Address 6 With the keypad in the operation panel type in the subnet mask and then touch Enter Utility cancer enter Pi4700e 3 3 Chapter 3 Network Settings 3 Specifying the IP Address From the Printer
232. iver 2 Windows NT 4 0 5 A window will appear prompting you to select the manufacturer and model of your printer Click the Have Disk button on the lower right part of the screen Add Printer Wizard Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers AGFA AccuSet v52 3 AGFA AccuSetSF v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 800 AGFA AccuSet 800SF v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v2013 108 Brother AGFA AccuSet 1000 Rull zl AGFA AccuSet 1NNNSF vi 3 A Have Disk lt Back Cancel 6 The Install From Disk dialog box will appear Install the controller driver CD ROM that is included with the controller in the CD ROM drive of your computer f Click the Browse button select the file corresponding to the type of printer driver to be installed and the operating system being used and then click the OK button 8 A Printers list appears Select the driver to be installed and click the Next gt button 9 Awindow that asks you to confirm the printer name will appear Check the printer name If you want to designate this printer as the default printer select Yes Click the Next gt button 10 Follow the instructions that appears on your computer screen 11 As the last step click the Finish button 2 18 Pi4700e Windows NT 4 0 2 12 Installat
233. k OK If the name of the printer you want to use does not appear in the lists load the Printer Drivers CD ROM that comes with your Digital Copier into your computer s CD ROM drive and then click the Have Disk but ton Next specify the location of the printer s INF file on the CD ROM 9 Select whether you use this printer as the default printer or not and then click Next 10 Click Finish to exit the wizard 11 Click the icon of the newly added printer to select it and then click Properties on the File menu 12 Display the General tab and then print a test page 13 If the test prints normally complete the procedure by clicking OK to close the Properties dialog box After you finish installing a printer with the above procedure you can use it just as you would any standard local printer The printer can also be used as a network printer by other Windows computers on your network whose Windows 2000 XP systems are configured the same way as de scribed above Pi4700e Specifying network settings from PageScope Light 3 3 9 Specifying network settings from PageScope Light Access PageScope Light for Pi4700e can be accessed directly from a Web browser 1 Start the Web browser 2 Inthe URL field enter the IP address of the printer controller as shown below http IP address of printer controller gt Example When the IP address of the printer controller is 192 9 200 200 http 192 9 200 200 This causes P
234. l All users E Personal c E Application Common 16 Common z Personal 16 Personal All users Personal Printer icon Common 0 Personal o Personal Administrator 9 16 1 user Common gt E Application Common 0 Personal T Personal Administrator 16 1 user Common Printer icon 32 1 driver Common 0 Personal Personal Administrator 16 1 user Common Application 32 1 driver Common 0 Personal Personal Administrator 16 1 user Common Printer icon 32 1 driver O m 5 A t _ 5 5 o Ld Q E Application T Ss lt Printer icon e 32 1 driver Zs Lo v c o oO o Q 2 o o A Printer icon 32 1 driver Application Pi4700e 12 11 Chapter 12 Appendix 12 Preview Listing 12 5 Preview Listing Page Layout Value Defined for Print Setting Item Screen Specifica Value Defined for Print Setting Item Screen Specifica Orientation Portrait Orientation Landscape Duplex Booklet Long Edge Binding Orientation Portrait Duplex Booklet Short Edge Binding Orientation Portrait Duplex Booklet Short Edge Binding Orientation Landscape Duplex Booklet Long Edge Binding Orientation Landscape Duplex Booklet Booklet Left Binding Orientation Portrait Duplex Booklet Booklet Right Binding Orientation Portrait Duplex Booklet Booklet Left Binding Orientation Landscape Duplex
235. l name P Printer name a Area e Specify the printer name which was designated during setting e Input model name di550 for Model name e Specify Area select us for Inch area ec for Metric area Refer to 5 3 Properties settings p 5 18 for setting method concerning the printing Tip Specifying Model name and Area is necessary only when didialog command is executed first Pi4700e 5 15 Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux 5 Printer setting with X window System dipjl command dipjl command is a printer setting command used for environment in which X window cannot be used Refer to dipj1 1 file in opt diutil man mant for detailed description To display mar file execute the following command man opt diutil man manl dipj1 1 LONE Note If you are able to use X window environment this command is not nec essary Since the settings using this command are only temporary settings for printing they cannot be saved Printing method dilpr command dilpr command is used for printing method Printing of PS file is performed by executing this command Note that this cannot be printed from applica tion Refer to dilpr 1 file in opt diutil man man for detailed description To display man file execute the following command Te D o lt man opt diutil man manl dilpr 1 Example option of dilpr command P printer name Specifies
236. l of the error and take the necessary action Code Description Action 18A0 NVRAM error Turn OFF the power then turn it Issued when a fault is found in ON If error persists consult the condition of the setting val your Tech Rep ues saved in the NVRAM of the controller 18A1 NIC initialization error 18A3 Version error 18A7 ROM update data load failure 18A8 ROM update data write failure 18F1 Machine communications error 18F2 Controller fatal error 18DO Hard disk being formatted This error is eliminated as soon as formatting is completed 18D1 Hard disk format error Execute formatting from Page ScopeLight again If error persists consult your Tech Rep 18B8 Scan job canceled for short of Recovers 10 minutes later or machine memory space when next scan job starts mt If error persists consult your 18C0 Memory short during image con Tech Rep version 18C1 Scan job NIC processing error Pi4700e Unable to Print 11 Code Description Action 18C2 Scan job controller processing Recovers 10 minutes later or error when next scan job starts If error persists consult your Tech Rep 18A4 ROM update data loading Recovers as time passes or by P conducting job 18A5 ROM update data writing 18A6 ROM update data completed 18CC LDAP server connection refused These codes should cancel after 10 minutes or with the start of the 18CD LDAP server connection
237. lect the Novell Printer Gateway This causes the Novell PDS dialog box to appear 5 Configure the Novell PDS by selecting the Printer Type and Port Han dler Type and click the OK button Pi4700e 8 23 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card o D E o lt Network Interface Card NetWare configuration 6 Select the printer driver for each client operating system O When users install this printer these drivers will be automatically downloaded to their workstations O If the driver you need is not listed rather than adding the driver to the RMS you can choose None from the top of each list Users will then be asked to provide a disk with the appropriate driver the first time they install this printer on their workstations Click Conti The new Printer Agent will now appear in the Pri dow I Converting Public Access Printers to Controlled Access Printers To take full advantage of the security and management features provided by NDS you may want to convert public access printers to controlled ac cess printers For example if you have used a third party gateway to get a printer up and running immediately plug and print the gateway automatically creates a public access printer Later you may want to convert that printer to a con trolled access printer The following procedure explains how to convert a public access printer to controlled access Prerequisites To create a controll
238. lick Printers The Printers window will appear Double click the Add Printer icon Start the Add Printer Wizard If the printer is directly connected to the computer select My Computer and click the Next button S Note When installing the printer driver in a computer connected to the ma chine via a network be sure to consult the network administrator Pi4700e Windows NT 4 0 Add Printer Wizard This wizard helps you install your printer or make printer connections This printer will be managed by e We All settings will be managed and configured on this computer C Network printer server Connect to a printer on another machine All settings for this printer are managed by a print server that has been set up by an administrator 4 A window that prompts you to select the port will appear Select the name of the port to be used and click the Next button Add Printer Wizard Click the check box next to the port s you want to use Documents will print to the first available checked port Available ports Port Description vi Local Port LPT2 Local Port O LPT3 Local Port COM1 Local Port COM2 Local Port COM3 Local Port COM Local Port xl Add Pott Configure Port TF Enable printer pooling E Pi4700e Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Dr
239. ll the settings click Add to close the dialog box After you are finished adding printers click OK Printers you add using IP Peer to Peer printing are added to the POR of the printer properties dialog box and can be selected for printing T list Pi4700e Chapter 3 Network Settings e LE o 2 o lt Network Settings Peer to Peer Printing with IPX SPX Peer to Peer Printing with IPX SPX Use the bundled IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program for IPX SPX peer to peer printing under Windows With IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program there is no need to run NetWare Client Digital Copier SS 1 Sic Bi L Network Card IPX SPX Windows 95 98 Me IPX SPX compatible Protocol IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program Configuration Procedure 1 Install IPX SPX compatible Protocol under Windows Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for more information N Install the IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program Use the IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program for peer to peer printing See 3 6 IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program Windows p 3 14 for more information 3 Use the procedure below to install the printer To install the printer 1 Onthe Start menu point to Settings and then click Printers 2 Double click Add Printer and install the printer Make the new printer the default
240. m 7 20 DECOSE yer 12 29 Host based A 12 41 Printer based lpd eessseeeeeeeeeeneen 12 36 DEC ULETRIX nni ewiMeriditerrtieriibns 12 29 Host based Ipd ion obe 12 41 12 44 Printer based lpd senem een 12 36 Defta lt gateWay cette ia ire ueri pus 12 53 AGOIOSS 5 PR 12 57 ure 12 62 Device Options Setting tab ssssseeene 4 2 5 19 Pi4700e 13 1 Chapter 13 Index op T i 9 Q t lt Index DHCP aote aeq aiii 12 60 Distribution number nran nia ida 7 14 Duplex Printing 3 2 ete e OH Rn 7 2 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol See DHCP 12 60 Easy Set iod ti att ded 7 29 E mail destinations eese 9 12 Enlarging siii pe epe te 7 8 Error Eric dE E UE e tede ori ieee 11 6 Factory default Telnet 2 2 ee en eee ee deiude 12 63 Features of the controller ooocnccccnnncccnccoonnnoncnnnnnnnononononononanornnnnns 1 1 File destinations eseesesssssseeeeeenenn nnnm 9 21 CONUN ae 2 ee ipei ee tete to pepe eet 9 22 new registration 9 24 9 28 Filler rrt 12 42 Folding function o roe De Eie aee Eae b i Ee dee dee 7 27 Function combination matrix EIU 55i ioter n Macintosh Windows Gateway address node Bde 12 57 GlOSSATy x5 eiue ree pet aiia ite eds 12 25 H Hard disk diive 4 ie
241. make sure that the correct client driver is being used 8 48 Pi4700e Troubleshooting 8 12 Is the computer connected correctly to the print queue Print a file and confirm that the job is sent to the print queue If the job is sent correctly check for a problem in the connection between the computer and print server 13 Does a sample print job sent directly from PC queue become active OLE to the assigned oo Card configuration is imp ssible with I LE Version 1 0 15 Is AUTO E P enabled Data can be sent to the network using AUTO ENDCAP Use PRINT CON to check if AUTC P is enabled If i is disabled enable it S Note Whenever the connection between the Network Card and file server is broken for any reason it takes from about five to ten minutes to re es tablish a connection If a connection is not established within this time check for errors and correct any problems you discover The Network Card cannot print from any other context other than that which is installed When you want to print from another context you must create an alias queue See the related NetWare documentation for more information Resetting to Factory Defaults You can reset the Network Card so all of its parameters return to the initial factory default settings Be sure to reset the Network Card before moving the Digital Copier to a different network environment NetWare file server IP subnet etc Reset can be
242. meters p 12 53 for more information 12 30 Pi4700e UNIX Configuration 12 Printer based Ipd Configuration Ipd Ipr is an implementation of the standard UNIX line printer daemon It lets you print across a TCP IP network without needing to install software on your workstation All filtering and banners are done by the Network Card Remote printing uses the same commands lpr Ipq Ipc as local printing An pr request from a workstation references the remote rm entry in the tcap file where it finds the printer on a remote system lpr opens a connection with the network Ipd Ipr process on the remote system and sends the data file to the remote printer The printer based Ipd then filters the data and prints the job in accordance with information contained in the control file and its own printcap file The Network Card Ipd recognizes the format of certain printer emulations and filters the data if possible so it can be printed on the printer type you specify Either of the following two methods can be used to inform the Net work Card Ipd of what type of printer is connected 1 Using the default port setting PCL PostScript etc 2 Using Telnet or the Network Card HTML settings page to change the listed emulation types Network Card HTML settings page can be ac cessed using MAP or a Web browser The following sections describe how to give specific Ipd Ipr setup instruc tions for various systems Pi4700e
243. mine which printer to use xz Select the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation i disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers Printers AGFA AccuSet v52 3 AGFA AccuSetSF v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 800 AGFA AccuSet 8005F v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 800SF v2013 108 AST AGFA AccuSet 1000 zl ATRT Y ABEFA Accu ar 1NNNGE uR 3 Have Disk lt Back Cancel 7 The Install From Disk dialog box will appear Install the controller driver CD ROM that is included with the controller in the CD ROM drive of your computer 8 Click the Browse button select the file corresponding to the type of printer driver to be installed and the operating system being used and then click the OK button 9 APrinters list appears Select the driver to be installed and click the Next button 10 A window that asks you to confirm the printer name will appear Check the printer name If you want to designate this printer as the default printer select Yes Click the Next button 11 Follow the instructions that appears on your computer screen 12 As the last step click the Finish button Pi4700e 2 11 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Windows 2000 XP 13 Installation will start When all the files have been copied from the CD ROM the corre sponding icon will be a
244. model name O Flags An S flag displayed here means the select flag is turned on so the printer is included in the PORT list of the printer Properties dialog box A P flag displayed here means the permanent flag is turned on so the printer cannot be deleted from the list by the Clear List button or De lete button e ES o 2 o lt Network Settings 3 16 Pi4700e LPR Printing 3 7 LPR Printing This section explains how to use the Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP standard LPR printing function Digital Copier 5 LL ES un Ee Network Card TCP IP Windows NT 4 0 2000 XP TCP IP Microsoft TCP IP Printing Requirements e Computer must have TCP IP installed and enabled e Network Card must have valid IP parameters assigned Configuration Procedure Windows NT 4 0 1 Install TCP IP and Microsoft TCP IP Printing service under Windows NT Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for more information 2 Assign the IP parameters See 3 2 Specifying the IP Address From the Printer s Touch Panel p 3 2 for more information Use the procedure below to install the printer Pi4700e Chapter 3 Network Settings Chapter 3 Network Settings LPR Printing Installing the printer Windows NT 4 0 1 2 On the Start menu point to Settings and then cli
245. n No File Destination number Destination Name Type in the name of the File Destination You can input up to 72 characters FTP Server Address Type in the IP address of the FTP site Directory Type in the directory of the FTP site where the scan data is lo cated You can input up to 128 characters Use Proxy Put a check mark into this box to enable access of the FTP site via a proxy Remote Port Number When not using a proxy input the FTP port number You can input a value from 1 to 65535 9 22 Pi4700e File destinations Account Information Section Anonymous Select this option to enable log in to the FTP site using an anon ymous account Private Site Make the following settings for non anonymous account log in on the FTP site User Name Type in the user name for logging in to the FTP site You can input up to 64 characters Password Type in the password for logging in to the FTP site You can input up to 40 characters Confirm Re input the password to confirm it Scanning Mode Secti on Compression Select the compression method to be used when scanned data is send by FTP Apply Button Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this point Clear Button Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this point Icon Click to return to the previous screen Pi
246. n interference with radio communications and is prohibited under EU direc tives Xii Pi4700e Foreword For Users of the Class B regulation s countries This device must be used with shielded interface cables The use of non shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under CISPR 22 rules and local rules For Users except the Class B regulation s countries WARNING This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interfer ence in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures This device must be used with shielded interface cables The use of non shielded cables is likely to result in interference with radio communications and is prohibited under CISPR 22 rules and local rules Pi4700e xiii Foreword Welcome Congratulations on your selection of Minolta Pi4700e printer controller and Network Interface Card for Pi4700e This User Manual explains how to run print cycles on the machine to which the controller is connected It also provides information about how to setup the Network Interface Card and operate the Digital Copier in a network en vironment First read this manual carefully and thoroughly then keep it close at hand so you can refer to it whenever it becomes necessary Some of the screens shown in this manual may look different from what you will view in actual ap
247. n the current connection is an NDS connection The initial de fault for this field is the NDS context specified by the Add Queue dialog box Changing the contents of this field displays a confirmation mes sage asking whether a check should be performed to determine whether the new context exists in the directory tree Click the OK but ton to start the check onn Up Notification The Notify Settings dialog box appears whenever TVOM double click an item listed in ihe J oups Notified by Printer field on the Print Server dialog box Use this dialog box to define users and groups to re ceive notifications S Note The Network Card supports notification in bindery mode only The following explains the fields on this dialog box e User Group name Specifies the name of the user or group whose notification settings are being edited You cannot change the content of this field 8 44 Pi4700e Using the utility software 8 e Delay in minutes for first message Specifies the amount of time a print job is delayed in minutes after which the Network Cards concludes an error has occurred and sends a notification message The default value for this setting is 5 minutes and the setting range is 1 to 60 minutes e Delay in minutes for repeat messages Specifies the amount of time a print job is delayed a second or subse quent times in minutes after which the Network Card concludes an error has occurred and sends a notif
248. nage for AppleTalk and using its various features and functions 8 7 Using the utility software Management Access Program Windows Network Interface Card Management Access Program MAP is a Windows utility that automati cally detects IP and IPX based Network Cards on a network and provides a Web browser based setting and management environment MAP automatically detects all the Network Cards on the network and lists them on a Web browser page Clicking one of the Network Cards listed on the Web browser page accesses the Network Card s built in HTTP server The Web browser can then be used to make Network Card settings Requirements e Computer must have TCP IP installed and enabled e Computer must have IPX SPX compatible protocol installed Re quired only when using the IPX search function e Computer must have a Web browser installed Operating system Windows 95 98 Me NT 4 0 or 2000 Nak Note See Appendix A Installing and Setting Up Network Protocol Win dows and the applicable Windows documentation for information about installing TCP IP and IPX SPX under Windows 8 28 Pi4700e Using the utility software Installing MAP Use the following procedure to install MAP 1 Load the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the computer you want to use N Start Setup exe in the N folder on the CD ROM stallation O The default installation directory is C Follow the instructions that appear on t
249. nations may not function properly depending on the size and direction of the paper Pi4700e 12 3 Chapter 12 Appendix Function combination matrix Macintosh 12 2 Function combination matrix Macintosh Printer Specific Options aseal9 Duipjo4 HeH PIOA Z HO ebp3 uous o6p3 6uo1 HO Jajuay x O xJOJO x x x obp3 uous x x OJO x O JO x x o6p3 6uo1 x x x OJO JOJO O x x JEUIOD x x x x OJOJO JO O JO JO HO O x x x x OJO OJOJO JOJO peuos x O JO O JO OJO O JO JOJOJOJO palloo x O O x x x x O OJOJOJOJ O O payeljooun Paper Source pee y enue x O O O O O O O O O x x 191 x x OJO JO JOJOJO x x OJO x JO x x x 901 x x x OJO JOJO O O O JOJOJOJO JO x OJO t e zZ AeL x x x xO JOJO O O O O JOJO JO O JO JO JOJO ony ojojojojojojojo O O O O A x O x x O O O OJO OIO O OIOIOJ O OIOIOJO O x x x x OJOJO JOJO O x x O JO x x O O x 69 A OJOIOJO x x x O O x x Xx x x x x x x OJOJOJO O x x x x O x x O x x xx x O JOJO O O OJO JO O OJOJO OJOJOJO x x O O O OI O AIxJ O x xx O O xlG6 x O x x xx O O xlG x O x x x x x O O OJ O O O O O O JOJOIOJO OJOJO O AJOJOJOJOJO JO x x x OJO x e8 A OJOJOJOJO xJO x x x ojojojo OJOJOJO OJOJO O OJOJO O OJOJOJO OjoOJOJO AJOJOJO OJOJO O OJOJO JO JOJO x O ojojojo OJOJOJO OJOJO O OJOJO JO OJOJOJO oOjo oOJO AJOJOJO OJOJOJO OJOJO O OJO x O
250. nfiguration Selecting Configuration on the Option menu displays a dialog box for changing the Network Card device name and AppleTalk zone m Configuration Device Type Network Interface Card Serial Number 995243 AppleTalk Zone TP GP y Printer Name MLT_995243 1 To change the device name input the new name into the Printer Name field 2 To change the AppleTallk zone use the AppleTalk Zone field pull down menu to select the zone you want S Note You cannot change the zone on a network that does not have any zones 3 After making the settings you want click the OK button 4 Toenable the new settings power the printer down and then back up again You can then check the settings on the status sheet Error Log The error log function can be used to reference the event log stored on the Network Card The error log is referenced whenever a Network Card prob lem occurs Selecting Error Log on the Options menu displays error log contents You can save the error log as a text file by selecting Save As on the File menu You can also print out log contents by selecting Print on the File menu Pi4700e 8 35 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card o D E o Ren Network Interface Card Using the utility software S Note The above procedure is not registered in the error log when it is per formed Powering the Digital Copier down clears lo
251. ng function set the number of sets of prints to 1 You cannot selagi the same handed take up port for both F and Ir fing Paper Source You can set only Manual Feed using Paper Sou OHP interleaving and two sided printing cannot be set simultaneously S Tip for 2 The OHP film tray is displayed in green on the Printer Figure Pi4700e 5 27 Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux Te D o Ren Printer Driver for Linux Properties settings Functions of the Detail of Output Setting Dialog Box Settings can also be made for finishing functions including stapling hole punching and folding Jetail of Output Setting Folding i 1 Staple 3 ome lor El Punch 2 Off X Punch Holes 3 El OK Cancel Help 1 Staple when Mailbin Finisher Single staple Finisher Multi staple Finisher or Fold ing Finisher is installed gt This function allows you to staple one set of printed documents at a time Off Corner Long Edge Short edge Center Printed documents are not stapled Printed documents are stapled at their corners when Multi staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is in stalled gt The documents are stapled along the long edge lt when Multi staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is in stalled gt The documents are stapled along the short edge lt when Folding Finisher is inst
252. ngs Auto Manual Feed Tray1 to 4 LCC LCT Setthe cover page function and OHP interleaving func tion For details see page 5 26 in the machine to which the paper is to be exited Settings can also be made for finishing functions including stapling hole punching and folding Paper exit destination Mailbin paper exit desti nation Detail of Output Setting Select the machine tray to which you wish to exit the prints The selectable paper exit trays are limited by the type of finisher installed in the machine Mailbin Finisher Auto Mailbin Excepting Mailbin Finisher Auto If Mailbin is selected as the paper exit destination set the mailbin to which you wish to exit the paper Set stapling punching or folding For details see page 5 28 Duplex when Dup 2way Tray Dup LCC or Duplex Cabinet is installed Specifies two sided printing Off Not set Pi4700e 5 23 Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux Te D o lt Printer Driver for Linux Properties settings Short Edge Binding Two sided printing takes place in such a way that the short edge is bound Long Edge Binding Two sided printing takes place in such a way that the long edge is bound 4 Smoothing Correct the edges of the printed image Available settings On Off S Note for 1 Some paper sizes cannot be selected For details refer to the User Manual of the machine S T
253. nned data as direct mail S Note If you haven t logged on in Admin mode appears as the IP ad dress in s and F FTP Proxy Configuration Section FTP Proxy Server Address Type in the IP address of the FTP proxy server Remote Port Number of Proxy Type in the proxy port number You can input a value from 1 to 65535 Apply button Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this point Clear button Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this point 9 8 Pi4700e Network Setting 9 HDD Configuration Ele Edt View Favorites Tools Help On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network Dees HDD Configuration S i MITES ETE Congo A maintenance time limit of scan External Open Link data 7 day 1 99 HDD Configuration Apply LDAP Setting Clear All Scanned Data Admin Password WA 311 Login Clear All Scanned Data e A maintenance time limit of scan data Specify the length of time that data saved on the printer controller s hard disk drive is kept The default setting is 7 days The printer controller automatically deletes scan data kept for the specified length of time e Clear All Scanned Data All scan data on the printer controller s hard disk drive can be manually deleted Deleting all of the scan data can only be performed by a user logged on with Administrator privileges Pi4700e
254. nstall the Network Card Pi4700e 8 51 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card o D E o lt Network Interface Card Jumper switch setting Address Selection Either one of two memory address blocks can be used to access the com mon memory interface The two memory address blocks are named CS1 and CS2 The CS1 space is used when only one card is being used Use jumper switch JP2 to select the address space Setting the jumper switch pin to 1 2 selects CS2 while pin setting 2 3 selects CS1 Bus Handshaking The bus handshake signal can be changed to match the print controller being used In the case of this Digital Copier the handshake signal is the WAIT signal OP3 pin 2 and 3 setting 8 52 Pi4700e Specifications 8 10 Specifications Network Card Dimensions 123 7 mm L x 95 mm H Weight 225g Environmental Temperature 0 to 50 C Humidity 5 to 80 Buttons Indicators Green LED Amber LED 1 each Configuration Setup Onboard non volatile memory Connector Ethernet RJ45 10 100Base T 8 wire 10 100BaseT Cable Be sure to use Category 5 shielded 10 100BaseT cable that conforms with the pinouts shown below Pin No Color Ethernet 8 Blue White 7 Blue 6 Orange White Receive 5 Green White 4 Green 3 Orange Receive 2 Brown White Send 1 Brown Send Pi4700e 8
255. nstallable Options B Installed Trays f Duplex Cabinet R G tcr Finisher Not Installed 4 Apply Changes Note For details on the screen components see Print options on page 6 14 22 Close the Print Center dialog box Pi4700e 6 13 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 Print options 6 2 Print options This section describes the print settings available in the application s Print dialog box displayed by clicking Print in the File menu Print options Macintosh OS 7 8 9 Each print option allows you to make specific settings as detailed below For a detailed description of each function see the corresponding refer S Note The dialog box samples given throughout the subsequent pages are taken from LaserWriter version 8 5 1 The dialog boxes may vary in appearance showing different functions depending on the particular version of the LaserWriter you are using See the documentation pro vided for LaserWriter ence page Print Option Available Settings Berane P 9 Page Installable Options Allows you to make settings for options installed p 6 15 on the machine Page Attributes Allows you to make the basic settings for printing p 6 16 PostScript Options Allows you to make visual effect and font related p 6 17 settings General Allows you to set the pages and the number of p 6 18 copies for printing Background Prin
256. nted This setting is normally recommend ed Uses the optional setting value the setting of optional value instead of the setting value of the printer when the halftone image is printed If a moire pattern occurs using Use printer s settings you should print with ad justing Screen frequency and Screen angle Set the number of lines on the screen Setting range 0 1 to 999 9 in 0 1 steps 3 Screen angle Set the screen angle 0 to 360 in 0 1 steps Pi4700e 4 23 Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings A Job Management tab 4 7 Job Management tab PCL6 version Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties PS version Minolta Di550 Di470 Di450 PS Properties Access Number UD S335 3 a page Gr Seine mers c 4 24 Pi4700e Job Management tab 4 1 2 4 Account Code Check this box when using the copy track function An account code is attached to each printing job enabling you to carry out management at the machine In order to use this function copy track function must be set at the machine When the copy track function is set at the machine printing may sometimes fail to take place until the access number designated at the machine is correctly set Account Code Makes the copy track function valid Access Number Enter the access number set in the machine Setting range 0002 to 9999 4 digits Lock Job Check this box when locking a print
257. nter driver for Mac OS X S Note This printer driver is compatible with Mac OS X version 10 2 or later 1 Turn on the machine 2 Turn on the computer and start up the Mac OS O When starting up Mac OS log in with administrator privileges 3 Install the printer controller CD ROM in the CD ROM drive of your computer 4 Copy Minolta Di470U PS ppd Minolta Di470E PS ppd and Mi noltaPPDPlugin dmg to the desktop from the PPD folder on the CD ROM 5 Double click MinoltaPPDPlugin dmg which was copied to the desk top 6 Double click MinoltaPPDPlugin pkg to start it The Pi4700 PPD Plugin installer starts up 7 Click the Continue button eot Install Minolta PPD Plugin Welcome to the Minolta PPD Plugin Installer 8 Introduction Welcome to the Mac OS X Installation Program You will be Select Destinatior guided through the steps necessary to install this l Typ software R EE Go Back x Continue Pi4700e 6 9 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 Installing the printer driver 8 Select the partition where the software will be installed and then click the Continue button As an example the dialog box below shows the installation on the OSX disk 1 c lt Install Minolta PPD Plugin f Select a Destination introduction Select a destination disk to install the Minolta PPD Plugin Select Destination gt I on Type j OS1 OS
258. nter Setting Operational Panel Output HIIS Bin Bin Name Font Info PCL PS Binl Annie Printer Reset Bin2 Meg Maintenance Local UF Bin3 Mike Bin4 Nancy Admin Password Bin5 uan Hogan Restore Factory Default Apply Clear El TS nene zone 7 Input Section Copies Input a value indicating the number of copies Priority Source Specify the default input tray The menu shows only the trays that are currently available for selection Output Section Bin Bin names when mail bin manager is installed Bin Name Type in the name of the user of each bin You can input up to 32 characters Restore Factory De Click this button to return settings to their initial factory defaults fault Button Apply Button Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this point Clear Button Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this point 10 8 Pi4700e Printer tab 10 e Page Layout This screen appears when you click the Page Layout sub menu under the Settings menu Use this screen to configure the print document page layout Ele Edt View Go Favorites Help a On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network iiettingr Page Layout Pepe Handing Paper Size Letter Mc sao tyent Duplex Of Printer Setting Aci Restore Factory Default Apply Clear Test Print Font Info PCL PS Printer Reset Maintenance Local LF Admin Password Log in el Intemet zone Paper Size Select the page l
259. nter s Touch Panel p 3 2 for more information 3 Install the IP Peer to Peer Printing Program Use the IP Peer to Peer Printing Program for peer to peer printing See 3 4 Peer to Peer Printing Program Windows p 3 8 for more information I Use the procedure below to install the printer Installing the printer Windows NT 4 0 js and then click Printer rinter and install the printer Make the new printer the default printer See 2 Installing the Printer Driver p 2 1 for details about how to in stall it Right click the new printer icon and select Pr es from the menu 4 Display the Ports tab ne followi 9 From the Print to g port s list select the port where the Digital Aue IP addas is displayed 6 Click the OK button of the Properties dialog box to close it Right click the printer icon again to display its Properties dialog box display the G tab and then perform a Test Print operation 8 If the test prints normally complete the procedure by clicking OK to close the Properties dialog box After you finish installing a printer with the above procedure you can use it just as you would any standard local printer The printer can also be used as a network printer by other Windows computers on your network whose Windows NT 4 0 systems are configured the same way as de scribed above Pi4700e Chapter 3 Network Settings e ES o 2 o lt Network Se
260. nts are sorted Select the orientation of the image You can check the selected direction using Page Layout Portrait Landscape Printing takes place lengthwise Printing takes place crosswise Pi4700e 5 31 Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux Te D o lt Printer Driver for Linux 5 Properties settings S Note for 1 If you select a size of paper not loaded in the machine or Manual Feed the machine will give a message prompting you to add paper to Tray Tray2 or Manual Feed and enter into a standby state S Note for 2 When using the OHP interleaving function set the number of sets of prints to 1 S Note for 3 Keep Collate Sort on the application side set to OFF at all times S Tip for 4 If you exit prints to the Elevator Tray when the Single staple Finisher Multi staple Finisher or Mailbin Finisher is installed the prints are ex ited in a sawtooth manner When the Folding Finisher is installed or if none of the finishing options is installed the prints are exited in a criss cross manner The following are the minimum requirements for permitting criss cross sorting using the Collated setting Stacks of paper of the same size are loaded in the lengthwise and crosswise directions The Staple Punch or Cover mode is not set S Tip for 5 A Portrait or Landscape print appears on the Page Layout 5 32 Pi4700e Properties sett
261. nui seal nens 7 6 Printing in reduced enlarged size ees 7 8 OVelVIeW tieu A R a e 7 8 Procedute a ered We ieee les 7 8 Printing pages with watermarks eere 7 10 OVGEINVIEW iio aa 7 10 o eU P n 7 10 Specifying booklet printing eene 7 12 OVerVvieW aside e o uM 7 12 PIOCOGUre inn onte eite in Meise 7 12 Printing pages with a distribution number 7 14 DETEN EE is llos dnde ale e tE dle ee 7 14 A Sieh Sie hup et 7 14 Using the copy track function eere 7 16 eu 7 16 Procedure 4 36 rt ee dei 7 16 Printing on OHP transparencies eene 7 18 OVINO W tit A taba 7 18 Procedure 2 c e Rp dre ee eee 7 18 Adding a cover to each copy set eene 7 20 OVGIMIOW 1 eimi hss Neettei dici hie Mee eie tue 7 20 o A ep 7 20 Using the lock job print PC confidential function 7 22 DI dodo e o i era dtc Ge a 7 22 Procedure on the printer driver side 7 22 Procedure on the machine side Unlocking a job 7 23 Procedure on the machine side Deleting a job 7 25 Using the folding function eee 7 27 OVeIVIeW istituti buo DDR HIE 7 27 Pi4700e Contents 7 14 7 15 Procedure uento Ra
262. o 1 6 18 Pi4700e Print options 6 Background Printing The Background Printing property sheet allows you to make settings for background printing 8 5 1 Printer MLT_504486 w Destination y Background Printing A IA A Print in O Foreground no spool file 6 Background Print Time Urgent Normal O Print at 11 48 AM El 19 5 99 fa Q Put Document on Hold Save Settings 1 Print in Specify whether to enable background printing or not Foreground no spool Does not allow the user to use the application while the file document is printing Background Allows the user to use the computer even while a doc ument is printing 2 Print Time Set the conditions for background printing Urgent Prints a job ahead of any others Normal Sets for printing at the end of the print queue Printat Sets the date and time of day for printing e Put Document on Hold Places a job in the print queue without printing Tip The functions of LaserWriter itself are being used See the documen tation provided for LaserWriter Pi4700e 6 19 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh Ko D o Ren Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 Print options Cover Page The Cover Page property sheet allows you to print out a page of descrip tive data about each print job This function differs from Front Cover Page in Printer Specific Options
263. ob List Department H E Organization E mi Operator Flags V Allow Users To Submit Print Jobs IV Allow Service By Current Print Servers IV Allow Hew Print Servers To Attach E po 2 Click the Assignments button The print queue and printer will appear in the proper boxes of the Printer Queue window if they are properly configured 3 Check the contents of the window and then click the Cancel button Bii Print Queue TEST Assignments Identification Authorized Print Servers TEST_PSERVER QUALITY Operator Users Printers Servicing Print Queue TEST_P QUALITY Job List seal essen eel Printer Configuration and Reset After you finish making the NWADMIN settings described above you must configure and reset the Digital Copier by powering it down and then back up again before you can start printing Pi4700e 8 15 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card o D E o lt Network Interface Card NetWare configuration Configuring NetWare Enterprise Print Services NDPS NetWare Enterprise Print Services is a Novell software solution built on the Novell Distributed Print Services NDPS architecture NDPS is an ad vanced printing architecture that can be run on either an IPX or an IP net work NDPS over IP is the native printing approach for NetWare 5 x systems NDPS is not yet implemented on p
264. obs to the proper devices This information includes entries for each physical vir tual printer and physical device known to the system Simply stated an AIX virtual printer is a high level software view of a data stream queue and device that controls how a given job is to be processed A different virtual printer should be defined for each data stream that is sup ported by a real printer Even when PostScript and PCL jobs are destined for the same printer for example each job uses a different virtual printer Configuring a Network Card printer on an AIX system approximates con figuration of a local printer as nearly as possible The one point where it differs is that the physical device only difference is that the physical device associated with the Network Card printer must be a named pipe used by the print daemon to route data to the Network Card The following shows the most straightforward way to add a printer to the system 1 Type the following to run the installation script nicinst 2 What is the node name of the Print Server Unit Input the host name recorded in etc hosts For example type print fast and then press 3 What is the printer name Type the printer name and press enter 4 Here the script displays the information you have input up to this point The following shows example information Node name of the Print Server Card printfast Printer name to be used printer name The printer is attached on
265. oices below Original Direction ce ilem e a Scanner Mode Paddress Ue Resolution 100 600dpi 9 34 Pi4700e Mailbox Destinations 9 2 Touch the size to be scanned Scanner Mode Scan Size Enter Detect LAAD LAGO When Inch or Metric is selected the corresponding size will be dis played You can also select Custom Size to numerically specify the scan size Scanning with density changed 1 Touch Image Type Scanner Mode Betect Text E EM ext Ji Ji Ji File Forn Resolution 100 4600dpi rF j B00dp 2 Touch Lighter or Darker to select density Scanner Mode Image Type a QOo00000000D rec Cantor CE darker immu nete 3 Touch Enter Pi4700e 9 35 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode o2 LE o 2 o lt Scanner Mode Mailbox Destinations Scanning with Image Type changed 1 Touch Image Type Scanner Mode Address DL Original Scan Size Image Type aan 100 600dpi 600dp 2 Touch Text Text Photo or Pho to to select Image Type Scanner Mode Image Type annnn nnnnP text Lighter IERI darker beats Photo 3 3 Touch Enter Scanning with file format changed 1 Touch File Form Scanner Mode NS
266. oller e Prints only the cover on a different type of paper such as colored pa per p 7 20 i g g e Capable of printing on OHP transparencies You can also insert inter leaves either blank or printed with the same contents as those on the OHP transparencies p 7 18 e Folds copies during finishing p 4 13 N Crease Half Folding Z Folding Pi4700e Features of the Controller 1 Administrative Functions e Different accounts can be managed for printing records just as when using the machine as a copier e Printing of confidential documents may be withheld until a legitimate password is entered on the machine Pi4700e 1 5 Chapter 1 Before Using the Printer Driver Chapter 1 Before Using the Printer Driver 1 Configuration 1 2 Configuration The controller may be configured with the following options e Memory 64MB 128MB Option Expands the memory capacity of Pi4700e e Controller Allows you to use the machine as a printer controlled by your personal computer e Hard Disk Drive Option For downloading Mac PS fonts and storing them Stores the Scan to HDD data NIC Board Option Allows you to use the machine as a printer in a network environment 1 6 Pi4700e Connecting the Controller 1 S Note The NIC Board must be mount
267. on 32 1 driver Application Power Users Printer icon 32 1 driver Application Pi4700e 12 9 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix Number of registrations Number of registrations Usable range for Watermark Windows 95 98 Windows 2000 XP NT 4 0 Registration Use Registration Use Administrator Printer icon Common 16 Personal 16 Common Personal All users Personal Application Common 16 Personal 16 Common Personal All users Personal Power Users Printer icon Common 0 Personal 16 1 user Personal Administra Common Application Common 0 Personal 16 1 user Personal Administra Common Printer icon 32 1 driver Common 0 Personal 16 1 user Personal Administra Common Application 32 1 driver Common 0 Personal 16 1 user Personal Administra Common Administrator Printer icon 32 1 driver O Application Power Users Printer icon e 32 1 driver Application Printer icon e 32 1 driver Application 12 10 Pi4700e Number of registrations 12 Number of registrations Usable range for Custom Paper Windows 95 98 Windows 2000 XP NT 4 0 Application Registration Use Registration Use Printer icon Common 16 Common 9 Personal 16 Persona
268. on Protocol the server automat ically provides IP addresses to clients It is very similar to BOOTP This Network Card has an onboard DHCP client If there is a DHCP server on the network the DHCP client automatically obtains IP parameters from the server at power up See PageScope Light for Pi5501 Operator s Man ual for more information 12 60 Pi4700e Using Telnet to Make Settings 12 12 8 Using Telnet to Make Settings In addition to the MAP and Web browser combination for making settings this Network Card also supports use of Telnet for setting up the environ ment Network Card settings can be make from a Telnet client platform The following settings can be made over a Telnet connection IP parameter changes LPD settings Protocol changes Unit reset Factory setting restore Password changes S Note The Network Card must be assigned a valid IP address before you can use a Telnet connection to make settings Also the computer you are using for the Telnet connection must have TCP IP enabled and must be able to operate as a Telnet client See 12 7 Setting Up IP Param eters p 12 53 for more information about assigning IP parameters to the Network Card Establishing a Telnet Connection N Start up the Telnet client 2 lt Specify the IP address of the Network Card and connect 9 At the login prompt use one of the ID s shown below to log in x E ID Password To che
269. ontext and all sub contexts are displayed Changing the NDS Context field context or the Connection Server field connection causes the Queue list to change and reflect the new connection or context Double clicking a listed queue automatically adds the printer s services to that queue and closes this dialog box e Delete Queue Selecting a queue and then clicking the Delete Queue button displays a dialog box to confirm whether you really want to delete the queue Click Yes to delete or No to abort without deleting anything Pi4700e 8 43 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card o D E o lt Network Interface Card Using the utility software S Note Deleting a queue from the list does not physically delete the object from the file server You must use the NetWare utility to physically de lete the queue from the queue list e Create Queue The following explains the meaning of each field O Queue Name Type in the name of the new queue You must input a queue name here whenever creating a new field This field accepts input of up to 48 characters O File Server Volume Specifies the volume for creation of a queue This field is enabled only when the current connection is an NDS connection and lists all avail able volumes In the case of a bindery services volume the default vol ume name is SYS O NDS Context Specifies the NDS context for creation of a queue This field is enabled only whe
270. ore I O interface Parallel Centronics interface Conforming to IEEE1284 Network 10 100 Base T UTP Free space on hard disk 2MB or more under opt In this section installation procedure is explained referring to Redhat Linux If a different procedure is used depending on each OS explana tion is separately given for that section Pi4700e 5 1 Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux 5 Installing the printer driver Installation This section explains the installation procedure X window System is described here S Note Before installing the printer driver quit all other applications Log in with root when starting OS 2 Start Terminal window Install the controller Driver CD ROM provided with controller in the CD ROM drive of your personal computer Copy RPM file to optional directory The file has been stored in Linux PrintUtility of the CD ROM Input the following command to Terminal window and execute rpm ivh diutil pack file S Note Input file name to diutil pack file Te D o lt Installation will start when the above command has been executed S Note The installation procedure shown above cannot be used for the follow ing Operating Systems Use the installation procedure given on the next page Printer Driver for Linux Open Linux ver 2 4 SuSE Linux ver 6 4 5 2 Pi4700e Installing the printer driver
271. ork ee CO OK Cancel 2 Select Add from Printer at the left top on the dialog box 3 Select printer model dialog box will appear Select Generic post script printer Eag L Select your printer or a model close to it 4 enana da prenne r Generic raw printer device Apple Dot Matrix Printer Apple Image Writer hires Apple Image Writer lowres Apple Image Writer LG E Cancel i S Note Whenever network printer is to be used select Generic remote print er At this time input PORT1 for Remote Queue 5 10 Pi4700e Printer setting with X window System 5 4 Printer name dialog box will appear Input optional name and click the OK button EEEEKEKEER 3 EMEN y Please enter the logical name for the new printer e g Ip1 ps1 etc Name emssppm Lox Cancel il 5 Printer attributes dialog box will appear Make certain that correct de vice is displayed here but do not change any other items Printer attributes x Modify the attributes of the printer Name Paper size Letter X Device devp T Speed 57600 1 2 pages sheet OK Cancel zi 6 Select the OK button f System will ask you whether to save changes to create printer queue etc Select the OK button 8 Return to Printer Configuration dialog box Once the added printer is displayed select the OK button to complete Printer configuration x Printer Da
272. ot punched The document is punched along the short edge The document is punched along the long edge Set the number of holes to be punched Folding when Folding Finisher is installed Select the desired paper folding function Off Just Output Size Z Fold Half Folding Crease Printed pages are not folded Printed pages are folded into three parts Printed pages are folded in two at their center A crease is made in printed pages Pi4700e 4 13 Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings Setup tab S Notes for 1 If Staple is set printed pages are fed out into the Elevator Tray The stapling position is either the top left corner or the top right corner depending upon the direction of the paper and the printing direction If the capacity of Mailbin Finisher Single staple Finisher Multi staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is exceeded the stapling operation may be canceled Refer to the User Manual of the machine If you print a document consisting of pages of different sizes in the same printing job stapling may be canceled Take care when printing a document consisting of pages facing differ ent directions since the stapling position will be determined by the di rection of the first page You cannot set certain sizes or kinds of paper For details refer to the User Manual of the machine Only Center Staple can be set with Booklet Tip for 1 You
273. ote If a bindery reference queue already exists you can use it with NDPS with no modification A new reference queue object does not need to be created in NDS Configuring Bindery Reference Queues Prerequisites Before you can create a bindery reference queue the following require ments must be met v Theprint queue you wantto reference must already exist on the server you want to point to v Abindery object of the same name as the one you are using must exist on that server and must have rights to the print queue you are refer encing In NetWare Administrator select the container where you want the ref erence queue to reside 2 Choose O This causes the New Object dialog box to appear Select P This causes the Create Print Queue dialog box to appear Pi4700e Chapter 8 Network Interface Card 8 NetWare configuration Select R inder 2 Notice that the dialog box changes when you select this option 5 If you want to assign a bindery reference queue name different from co the queue s name on the legacy server enter the reference name in o the Print Queu ie field e If you do not want to assign a different reference name leave the field 5 blank 6 Browse for a bindery server and queue This causes the Network Server and Queue dialog box to appear Click Li ttached Servers to specify whether you want this oben juredo on or off O Toseealist of all available servers
274. over to each of your copy sets Four different modes are available to choose from Se lect the appropriate one according to your needs Print data Printout Procedure Start printing from the application which has been used to create the document Normally printing can be started by selecting Print from the File menu 2 The Print dialog Do will oA Make sure thath lin 1 and click the P S Note Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate Sort in the Print dialog box To ensure proper printing operation however turn OFF these items of the application and make the necessary settings in each tab of the printer driver 5 is displayed for N gt in Printer ties butions The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear Make sure that all setting items such as Original Document Size are correctly set on the Paper tab Glick Mies p tab and select the paper source for text in Paper 7 20 Pi4700e Adding a cover to each copy set 7 S Note Paper sources for text are Manual Feed Tray 1 2 3 4 LCC and LCT 6 Click the Detail of Paper Source Detail of Paper Source dialog box will appear f Apply check mark to Front Cover Page 8 Select the with Image box if you want data printed on the front cover 9 Select whether to add a back cover and if the back cover is to be add ed select whether to print data on the back cover using Back Cover Page and with Image
275. p 2 8 Windows NT 4 0 p 2 15 e Installing the Macintosh PPD file and PPD Plugin file See 6 1 Installing the printer driver on page 6 1 e Installing the Linux print utility See 5 1 Installing the printer driver on page 5 1 Pi4700e Chapter 1 Before Using the Printer Driver Chapter 1 Before Using the Printer Driver Installing the Printer Drivers Pi4700e Windows 95 98 Me 2 EE 2 Installing the Printer Driver This chapter describes the procedure for installing the printer driver on a Windows operating system For details on installation for Linux refer to chapter 5 For details on installation for a Macintosh refer to chapter 6 2 1 Windows 95 98 Me Operating Environment This section explains the required environment for the printer driver Before installing the printer driver check that your computer meets the fol lowing requirements If it doesn t the printer driver may not function prop erly Personal computer IBM PC or compatible with Pentium 200MHz or higher CPU Operating system Windows 95 English Windows 98 English or Windows Me English Memory 64MB or more I O interface Parallel Centronics interface Conforming to IEEE1284 Network 10 100BaseT UTP Free space on hard disk 10MB or more PCL6 2MB or more PS e Windows 2000 XP For the operating environment and installation procedure for the Win dows 2000 XP printer driver se
276. p AppleTalk seen 8 27 Selecting and Setting Up the Printer sseseeesssss 8 27 Network Card Configuration seeenen 8 28 Using the utility software ecce 8 28 Management Access Program Windows ssss 8 28 BOOTP WIihdOWS civic tata 8 32 NIManage for AppleTalk Macintosh eeeeeeneee 8 34 NWSetup Windows esee 8 38 Troubleshooting eee eene rra 8 46 LED Status Indicators 8 46 Troubleshooting rre iter edd 8 47 Resetting to Factory Defaults sse 8 49 vi Pi4700e Contents 8 9 Jumper switch setting eese 8 50 Network Card and Jumper Pin Positions esses 8 50 Resetting to Factory DefaultS oooooccoonicononccononncnnannnnnnrnnnnnrn nono noo 8 50 Address Selection essen 8 52 Bus Handshaking i 0s ieee en ete ence eens d acere dtes 8 52 8 10 Specifications ici at 8 53 Network Carq c ns ating ner nia vas 8 53 T0 100BaseT Gabl 5 a eR qune erret 8 53 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 canner Mo Outline E Mail Scan to E mail sese 9 1 FTP Scan to Server gerere arn aa eor e Ea nana nanns 9 2 URL IS DD RHENUM GE ED 9 3 HDD Scan to HDD enn e taria 9 4 Necessary Settings n a aea aa
277. pages Edit Watermark Set the format position and so on of the watermark characters For details see page 4 28 S Notes When using this function together with the cover page function if you set printing to None with the cover page function and choose setting to print a watermark on only the first page the watermark will be print ed on the second page This function may not operate with some applications Depending on environment used contents of Save Delete will be dif ferent Refer to Appendix A p 12 10 for details Pi4700e 4 27 Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings Overlay tab S Tip The condition of the watermark is displayed on the Page Layout Functions of the Watermark dialog box This dialog box allows you to set the text to be inserted using the Water mark function and also the text style 1 2 3 4 5 1 gt Watermark 2 i 3 CONFIDENTIAL Ed a 4 Delete 5 DK Cancel Help Preview This is the watermark preview Name Select a registered watermark from the list Available settings NONE CONFIDENTIAL COPY DRAFT FINAL PROOF TOP SECRET DO NOT COPY user setting New Used to create new text When you select this item a dialog box for making detailed settings appears Edit Used to edit text selected in 2 When you select this item a dialog box for making detaile
278. pen Link 1 HDD Configuration 2 3 4 anne fle 8pj 192 168 10 12 pub LDAP Setting Admin Password Login e Clicking an unused cell inside the File Destination List displays a screen for registering a new File Destination See Configuring a Destination p 9 22 for more information e Clicking an existing File Destination number or name displays a screen showing the details of that destination See Configuring a Destination p 9 22 for more information File File e Todelete an File Destination click the del button next to the destina tion you want to delete Pi4700e 9 21 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode Chapter 9 Scanner Mode File destinations Configuring a File Destination This section describes the settings you can make on the screens for reg istering a new file destination and for changing the configuration of a file destination Ele Edt View Favorites Tools Help Destinations E mail Destinations File Destinations SMTP amp FTP Configuration External Open Link HDD Configuration LDAP Setting Admin Password Login On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network File Destination File Destination No Destination Name Ftp Server Address Directory Use Proxy Remote Port Number Account Information C Anonymous O Private Site User Name Password Confirm Scanning Mode Compression Internet File Destination Section File Destinatio
279. performed using a Web browser For details see 10 PageScope Light If for some reason you cannot access the Network Card using a Web browser you can reset it using a jumper switch on the Network Card Pi4700e 8 49 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card o D E o lt Network Interface Card Jumper switch setting Jumper switch setting This chapter explains how to change the settings of the Network Card s jumper switch settings Normally the Network Card automatically makes network configuration settings so you do not need to change jumper switch settings There may be certain situations however where it becomes necessary to change jumper switch settings S Important Special care is required when handling the Network Card The Network Card is designed to protect components from electrostat ic discharge during normal operation Be sure to take proper electro static protection measures whenever handling the Network Card Be sure to unplug the Digital Copier from its power outlet before starting work For full details on handing the Network Card see the Setup Instruc tions that comes with the Network Card Network Card and Jumper Pin Positions The illustration below shows the positions of the jumper switches on the Network Card BYPASS Tope TEST Default pin positions are indicated in gray Resetting to Factory Defaults
280. pied from the CD ROM the corresponding icon will be added to the Printers window This completes the installation EJ Printers m xl File Edit View Go Favorites Help ES Pi4700e 2 5 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Windows 95 98 Me Making General Settings Before Using the Printer The printer driver requires setting of items that are common to all print jobs including the port to which the printer cable is connected and option al devices configured with the machine These settings must be made us ing properties dialog box available from the Properties command after the printer driver has been installed or whenever the operating environment is changed The most common settings were made when the printer driver was in stalled meaning that you do not usually bother to change them Some items must however be changed in the following cases Cases where changes are necessary Applicable property tab You want to add a comment to distinguish the printer from others The computer s connecting port has been changed You want to change the conditions for the display of a timeout error You want to designate a port to which the machine is connected via a network this setting must be made on a computer connected to the machine via a net work This setting is not related to printing Color Managemen You want to share the machine with o
281. plications Trademark Acknowledgements Minolta is a registered trademark of MINOLTA CO LTD Page Scope is a trademark of MINOLTA CO LTD Apple AppleTalk and Macintosh are registered trademarks of Apple Computer Inc Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation PCL HP LaserJet Ill HP LaserJet IIISi HP LaserJet 4Si are registered trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company HP UNIX is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds Microsoft Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Mi crosoft Corporation Netscape Communications the Netscape Communications logo Netscape Navigator Netscape Communicator and Netscape are trade marks of Netscape Communications Corporation Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell Inc PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc Red Hat is a registered trademark of Red Hat Inc Sun and Solaris are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders Copyright 2003 MINOLTA CO LTD The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice xiv Pi4700e Features of the Controller 1 1 1 1 Before Using the Printer Driver Features of the Controller The controller is an image controller designed to use the machine as a printer allowing you to print documents directly to the ma
282. precedence over those made in the driver Make the correct settings on the application Error dialog box is output instead of Set ting dialog box Unusable combination of device and settings with Easy Set being stored could have been achieved by changing of device installed Open file specified in the error dialog box delete applicable set tings Distribution cannot be specified To specify Distribution a Hard Disk Drive in Copier that is op tional on the machine is neces sary Hard Disk Drive in Copier must be specified in Device Op tions Setting Select Hard Disk Drive in Copi er on Device Options Setting Chapter 11 Troubleshooting Chapter 11 Troubleshooting 11 Unable to Print Poor Print Quality Perform these troubleshooting procedures when you get poor print quali ty Symptom Possible Cause Action Shades of gray are not Halftone setting is improperly clear set Check the setting made in Halftone in the Quality prop erty sheet If the problem persists even after these checks have been made refer to the documentation provided for the machine Error List When an error occurs the machine control panel gives the message of Controller failure 18xx or 19xx The table below lists the meanings of different error codes together with the appropriate remedial procedures Should an error occur identify the detai
283. printer Cao lpadmin p lt printer name gt v dev nic lt printer name gt enable lt printer name gt accept lt printer name gt You can also use other options in the Ipadmin command See your system documentation for details S Note The printer name must be the same as the one you specified during Network Card installation HP also provides the sam program which can be used to configure the printer If you use sam make all specifications just as if the printer were connect ed directly to dev Iprinter lt printer name gt The software installed with your HP system should be sufficient to satisfy most printing needs HP supplies ASCII to PostScript filters that are in voked automatically whenever PostScript is specified as the content type The HP UX Ip system also supplies interface scripts that generate Post Script banners When necessary you can use the Ipfilter command to de fine new filters and content types The installation provides you with the full power and flexibility of the Ip print service and the fact that you are printing across the network is totally transparent Pi4700e UNIX Configuration 12 System V Solaris Version 2 System V Release 4 386 Base Machine System V Solaris and SVR4 i386 base machines use a network direct fil ter called nicfilter The system invokes nicfilter directly from the printer in terface file To load the software create a usr ic directory and then tar
284. printer name y set option Used when a particular part of set option is to be changed J Job name Set when a name other than file name is to be set as a job name Example of printing method opt diutil bin dilpr P Printer name File name S Note With this command only PS file can be printed Non PS files must be converted to PS for printing Printer Driver for Linux groff command etc can be used to convert to PS file 5 16 Pi4700e Printer setting with X window System 5 didialog command didialog command is used to display dialog box for setting printer utility Refer to didialog file in opt diutil man man for detailed description To display man file execute the following command man opt diutil man manl didialog 1 Example of dialog box display method opt diutil bin didialog m Model name P Printer name a Area Tip Specifying Model name and Area is necessary only when didialog command is executed first Pi4700e Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux 5 Properties settings 5 3 Properties settings Description of each tab Each tab enables you to change the settings indicated below For a de tailed description of each function see the corresponding reference page Property tab Outline of settings that can be changed Reference page Allows you to set the paper take up tray and pa p 5 23 per exit tray Also allows you to set high level
285. printing functions such as two sided printing OHP interleaving Cover Mode Staple Punch and Folding Allows you to set basic printing items such as p 5 31 number of copies paper size and print orienta tion Also allows you to set functions related to sorting Allows you to set option equipment installed on p 5 19 the machine Sets the copy track function p 5 83 Allows you to lock a printing job Also allows you to print the distribution number Allows you to save and read the contents of the p 5 21 settings on a Setup Paper Job Management or Device Optio g property sheet Te D o lt S Note Refer to 5 2 Printer setting with X window System p 5 4 for the pro cedure for displaying dialog box Differences between each OS are indicated based on Redhat Linux ver 6 2 Printer Driver for Linux Details of OS dependent functions are not given 5 18 Pi4700e Properties settings Device Options Setting tab This tab allows you to set the options installed on the machine Be sure to select the options correctly otherwise some functions may be unusable or printing may not take place correctly The settings must match the ma chine configuration Easy Set 1 Default 3 Page Layout Printer Figure Device Options Installable Options Dup LCC 9 Duplex Cabinet ISingle staple Finish
286. r At the same time transmits URL of FTP server with E Mail Suitable for sending high resolution data Environment of Network with Mail server and FTP server is necessary FTP Server FTP Server PoF or TIFF D E N 4 p Chapter 9 Internet Mail Server of ient PC S Note If a key previously programmed with a destination for Scan to E Mail or Scan to Server is touched at the same time and the scanning is per formed this URL operation is performed Pi4700e 9 3 Scanner Mode 9 Outline HDD Scan to HDD S Note In addition to the optional network interface card the optional hard disk drive is also required Saves scanned data to the hard disk drive of the printer controller Suitable for sending high resolution data Acquires scan data with TWAIN driver No additional server such as a mail FTP server is required o2 LE 3 2 o lt Client PC Scanner Mode Client PC 9 4 Pi4700e Outline Necessary Settings settings first To use the Scanner Mode it is necessary to perform the following network You use PageScope Light to make these settings For the deta
287. r the printer that is currently selected in the Available Printers list A printer whose permanent flag is turned on is not cleared from the Available Printers list by the Clear or Delete button even if the print er is physically removed from the network e Find Printers Clicking this button searches for available printers on the network and displays the corresponding print server names in the Available Print ers list e Select Clicking this button toggles the S flag setting on and off for the printer that is currently selected in the Available Printers list A printer whose S flag is turned on appears in the PORT list of the printer Properties dialog box where it can be selected The initial start up default is S flag on for all printers in the Available Printers list Up to 30 S flags can be turned on at any one time e Available Printers This is a list of all the printers detected on the network You can clear this list by clicking the Clear button Then you can update the list by clicking the Find Printers button The following describes the three fields of the Available Printers list Pi4700e Chapter 3 Network Settings 3 IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program Windows O Unit name This field shows Network Card names The format for the default name of this Network Card is MLT serial number gt O Description This field displays a description of the printer Normally this field shows the manufacturer name and printer
288. r Folding Finisher is mounted Stapled along the short edge of the docu ment Long Edge only when Multi staple Finisher or Folding Finisher is mounted Stapled along the long edge of the docu ment Center only when Folding Finisher is mounted Stapled at the center of the document Punch only when Multi staple Finisher Mailbin Finisher or Folding Finisher is mounted Select whether to punch holes in the printed pages Off Does not punch holes Short Edge Punches holes along the short edge of the document Long Edge Punches holes along the long edge of the document Folding only when Folding Finisher is mounted Set the folding functions for finishing Off Does not fold the printed page Crease Makes a crease in the printed page Crease Staple Staples the printed page at the center with a crease made in it Half Folding Folds the printed page in two 6 28 Pi4700e Print options 6 Half Folding Staple Half Folding Punch Half Folding Staple Punch Z folding Z folding Corner Sta ple Z folding Long Edge Staple Z folding Punch Z folding Corner Sta ple Punch Z folding Long Edge Staple Punch Folds printed pages in two and staples them together Folds printed pages in two and punches holes in them Folds printed pages in two staples them together and punches holes in them Folds printed pages into three parts Folds printed pages into
289. r Page Off EX 4 O Preview Save As PDF dud Paper Source Select the paper source to be used by the machine Available options depend on the type of paper source available on the machine Auto Automatically selects the paper source in which paper of the size specified by Paper Size is loaded e Tray1 to Tray4 LCC LCT Manual Feed Prints on paper loaded in the specified paper source Prints on paper loaded in the Multi Manual Feed Tray 2 Duplex Print only when the Dup 2way Tray Dup LCC or Duplex Cabinet is mounted Select the desired duplex print function The results of the specified duplex print can be viewed on the paper preview Off Does not perform duplex printing Short Edge Binding Prints on both sides of each page so that the printed pages can be bound along the short edge Long Edge Binding Prints on both sides of each page so that the printed pages can be bound along the long edge 3 OHP Interleaving Select whether to insert a sheet of paper between sheets of OHP transparencies on which prints have been made Off Does not perform OHP Interleaving Tray1 to Tray4 LCC Specify the paper source for the interleaves LCT 4 Front Cover Page Lets you use paper for the cover of a different type such as colored paper from that for the text pages of your copy sets Off Feeds paper for all pages of your copy sets from the paper source specified in Paper Sourc
290. r Profile Selects profile Tip The functions of LaserWriter itself are being used See the documen tation provided for LaserWriter Pi4700e 6 21 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 Print options Layout The Layout property sheet allows you to set the printing layout 8 5 1 Printer Destination Pages per sheet 1 y 1 Layout Direction ma BA 2 Border mome 3 Save Settings 1 Pages per sheet Specify the number of pages assigned to a single sheet of paper Setting values 1 2 4 6 9 16 4 Down Before Across 6 Down Be fore Across 9 Down Before Across 16 Down Be fore Across 2 Layout Direction Le ra Specify the layout direction by clicking the appropriate icon 9 a 3 Border e Specify the type of border line 5 Setting values None Single hair line Single thin line Double hair line Double thin line Tip The layout direction can be checked on the paper illustration on the left The functions of LaserWriter itself are being used Printer Driver for Macintosh 6 22 Pi4700e Print options 6 Error Handling The Error Handling property sheet allows you to make settings for han dling error information 8 5 1 Printer MLT_504486 w Destination If there is a PostScript error No special reporting Q Summarize on screen Q Print detailed report Save Settings 1 _
291. r exit tray are dis played in green See page 12 15 for the Printer Figure list Pi4700e 4 5 Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings Functions common to various tabs S Note for 1 Depending on environment used contents of Save Delete will be dif ferent Refer to Appendix A for details p 12 9 Watermark Custom Paper Mailbox Name and Font Substitution Ta ble are not set Su Tips for 1 If the set contents have changed the Save button will appear If the set contents are the Easy Name contents the Delete button will appear Functions of the Save Easy Set Name dialog box Use to save print setting data Before pressing the Save button be sure to set the contents of each tab Save Easy Set Name x Easy Set Name 1 Hd 7 Cancel Help dal 1 Easy Set Name Add a name to the stored contents Number of registrations Depending on environment used number of registra tions will be different Refer to Appendix A for details p 12 9 Number of characters max 10 characters 4 6 Pi4700e Setup tab A 4 4 Setup tab This tab allows you to set the paper take up tray paper exit tray and var ious high grade printing functions PCL6 version Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties 3 2 4 PS version Minolta Di550 Di470 Di450 PS Properties 1 3 4 2 Deter chi Pi4700e 4 7 Chapter 4 Properties S
292. r information only once to the printer in downloaded and re order to shorten the printing time tained Send Header Now Sends header information to the controller 3 Print PostScript error information Set the PostScript error information printing 4 Compress bitmap images Send graphics in compressed form Chapter 4 Properties Settings Pi4700e 4 31 Chapter 4 Properties Settings PostScript tab 5 6 7 Fonts Set TrueType font Send TrueType fonts to printer according to the Font Substitution Table Edit the Table Always use PostScript fonts instead of True Type fonts Always use TrueType fonts Send Fonts As Replaces TrueType fonts for the printer fonts or down loads TrueType fonts in accordance with the Font Sub stitution Table For editing the Font Substitution Table you should open the Properties from the Control Panel and select Edit the Table button Sets the Font Substitution Table Always prints replacing TrueType fonts for the printer fonts The printing speed becomes faster but the print ed result may not be the same as the display Always prints downloading TrueType Fonts to the print er The printed result will be the same as the display but the printing speed becomes slower Sets sending method of fonts Advanced Performs detailed settings of PostScript 4 32 Pi4700e PostScript tab Functions of the Font Substitution T
293. r take up trays installed in the machine Available settings Auto Manual Feed Tray1 to 4 LCC LCT Detail of Paper Source Set the cover page function and OHP interleaving func tion For details see page 4 11 4 8 Pi4700e Setup tab 4 4 Output Setting This function selects the tray in the machine to which the paper is to be distributed Settings can also be made for finishing functions including stapling hole punching and folding Paper exit destination Select the machine tray to which you wish to distribute the prints The selectable paper exit trays are limited by the type of finisher installed in the machine Mailbin Finisher Except Mailbin Finisher e Mailbin paper exit desti If Mailbin is selected as the paper exit destination set nation the mailbin to which you wish to distribute the paper Detail of Output Setting Set stapling punching or folding For details see page 4 13 S Note for 1 If you print a document that contains pages of different sizes and or different directions in the same job the image may be partially cut or images may overlap each other S Tip for 1 The printing layout is displayed on the Page Layout S Notes for 2 If you print a document that contains pages of different sizes and or different directions in the same job the image may be partially cut or images may overlap each other Two sided printing and OHP interleaving cannot be set simul
294. r to Peer Printing Program o zu Use the following procedure to install the IPX Peer to Peer Printing Pro E gram D x 1 Load the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the computer you want 9 to use o zZ 2 Starts xe in the Ip p2p folder on the CD ROM 3 Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the in stallation The screen shown below appears automatically after installation is complete r 1 64 x Cancel Clear Delete Permanent Eind Printers Select Available Printers MLT_995243 Print Server Card 3 14 Pi4700e IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program Windows 3 You can use this screen to configure the IPX Peer to Peer Printing pro gram If you do not want to change any settings simply click OK to quit the program The following describes the contents of this screen e OK Clicking this button applies the changed settings and exits the pro gram e Cancel Clicking this button exits the program without applying the changed settings e Clear Clicking this button clears the contents of the Available Printers list except for printers whose permanent flag is turned on e Delete Clicking this button deletes the currently selected printer from the Available Printers list A deleted printer no longer appears in the printer PORT list A deleted printer can be re added using the Find Printers button e Permanent Clicking this button toggles the permanent flag setting on and off fo
295. rWriter c 7 o 2 c o in _ o 2 _ o 2 a o c n 6 24 Pi4700e Print options Printer Specific Options The Printer Specific Options property sheet allows you to make not only such basic settings as the paper source and exit port but also enhanced functions including duplex printing OHP interleaving and Front Cover It also allows you to specify Sort Staple Punch Folding and other finishing functions Printer MLT_504486 w 8 5 1 Destination P Printer Specific Options v Saa a eno N OutputSetting Auto v ww Orientation Portrait v 7 Duplex Print Off o a Sorting Unsorted y DAA DARAS EDAD Save Settings S Note Collate Collated w v Smoothing Off y With LaserWriter 8 5 1 used for this explanation all items in Printer Specific Options can be displayed as one page by scrolling With some other LaserWriter versions contents in Printer Specific Options are di vided into two pages as Printer Specific Options 1 and Printer Specific Options 2 Contents of function for each item are the same however 1 Paper Source Select the paper source to be used by the machine Available options depend on the type of paper source available on the machine Auto Tray1 to Tray4 LCC LCT Manual Feed 2 Output Setting Automatically selects the paper source in which paper of the size specified by Pap
296. ral Details Sharing Setup Paper Quality Device Options Setting Job Management PostScript 1 Easy Set PostScript output Fonts 5 Y PosSciptopinize torspeed Gerd TrueType forts to ire 5 7 according to the Font Substitution PostScript header 2 sare Save Table c Download header with each print i Edit the Table Assume header is downloaded and retained ee e n 1 Send Header Now qc Always use PostScirpt fonts i i instead of TrueType Fonts i i i t 1 1 C Always use TrueType fonts P 1 1 1 A Eres hat i Send Fonts As 6 3 Page Layout uH int PostScript error information 4 Printer Figure Compress bitmap images 7 1 PostScript output Set the output format of PostScript e PostScript optimize for Performs optimization for faster printing processing speed PostScript optimized Performs optimization for reducing error for portability ADSC Encapsulated Post Select this item when you wish to embed this file as an Script EPS image in a document that is to be printed using a differ ent program Archive format Saves the data stream of PostScript to a file 2 Postscript header Set the method of sending the header Download header with This item sends header information each time a docu each print job ment is printed We recommend that you use this set ting when sharing a network printer Assume header is Sends heade
297. red Pica F applicationfond hp pel_ Y application 4 zi J ESSE tes Apply Cleat gi TOC En Z S Note Standard access for IPP printing is http IP Address 631 nic Print For details about IPP printing see 8 Network Interface Card Chapter 3 Network Settings Password Input the password assigned to the network interface card The initial factory default is sysadm Clicking the Apply button after inputting the wrong password displays a password error mes sage without changing the settings Enable IPP Check this option to enable IPP on the network interface card You cannot use IPP print unless this option is checked Pi4700e 3 31 e ES o 2 o lt Network Settings Specifying network settings from PageScope Light The following items are returned when attributes are requested from an IPP client Printer Name Type in a name to identify the printer during IPP printing Printer Location Type in the location of the printer Printer Information Type in a description of the printer More Printer Information Specify a URL where detailed information about this particular printer can be found Printer Driver Installer Specify a URL where the printer driver installer can be found Printer Make and Model Type in the printer manufacturer name and model name More Printer Information Manufacturer Speci
298. red in an application can be finished into a book form through Half Folding and Staple To use this function a Folding Finisher must be mounted on the machine The function is enabled only when the PS driver is used Convenient Functions Procedure Start printing from the application which has been used to create the document Normally printing can be started by selecting from the File menu The Print dialog box will appear Make sure that Minolta Di470 PS is displayed for Name in Printer and click the Prope button S Note Some Applications allow you to set Copies and Collate Sort in the Print dialog box To ensure proper printing operation however turn OFF these items of the application and make the necessary settings in each tab of the printer driver The Minolta Di470 PS Properties dialog box will appear Make sure that Original Doci ize is correctly set on the tab Check the jut Paper Size box and select Select 2 up in N Pi4700e 7 27 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions Using the folding function f Click N up Style to open its dialog box Then set Page Location to Horiz Ascending and click the OK button 8 Click Detail Of Output Setting to open the dialog box 9 Specify Half Folding under Folding 10 Specify Long Edge under Staple 11 Click the OK button 12 Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button 13 The Print dialog box will reappear Click the OK button
299. ree part at the corner Folds printed pages into three par together s and staples them s and staples them Folds printed pages into three parts and punches holes in them Folds printed pages into three part the corner and punches holes in tl Folds printed pages into three part S staples them at hem S staples them to gether and punches holes in them 6 38 Pi4700e Print options 6 Summary Displays a list of the current print settings Printer MLT_000031 Presets Standard laz Summary by Output Options Print to Printer Layout Layout Direction Left Right Top Bottom Pages Per Sheet 1 Copies amp Pages Copies 1 Collated Page Range All Error Handling PPD for Minolta Di470 PostScript Errors No special reporting Tray Switching Display alert I Preview Save As PDF Y B cancard o Preview Save As PDF Cancel Princ gt Atila sinistri Pi4700e 6 39 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh Print options 9 Ja deyo USOJUIDE A 10 JOAUG 19JULIA Pi4700e 6 40 Introduction 7 EE 7 Convenient Functions N x 9 2 Q o lt 7 1 Introduction In this chapter you will learn how to print your document guiding you through steps from start to end of printing WordPad a Windows 98 standard application is used as an example to show the steps to follow for using Windows 98 PCL6 version driver
300. rint options Macintosh OS 7 8 9 sseseeeeee 6 14 Installable Options 5 3 pe eret e ede dita 6 15 Page Attributes n oue eene eee eR qiia 6 16 PostScript Optioris eim i E petens ayy 6 17 Generali AA is 6 18 Background PANINO aii arie taa 6 19 Cover Page eie cade vie eee artes 6 20 Color Matching 2 ideae ede ted tette ne eds 6 21 Layout CERCLE 6 22 Error Handling 3 rime ii ii 6 23 Save as File edet hat bdo 6 24 Printer Specific Options esenen 6 25 Conflicts dialog DOX essen 6 32 Print options Mac OS X 6 33 Paper amp Quality Settings ssssseeeenee 6 34 Paper Source Settings 6 35 Job Managerftlent eiui de tete ott ene 6 36 Finishing Settings esi ir iniiai e aii 6 37 S mmani ede A aei o e o ve e vr praeditis 6 39 iv Pi4700e Contents 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 7 10 7 11 7 12 7 13 niet un Introduction retenir ett oerte ner rne 7 1 Printing on both sides of the paper esee 7 2 oU e nee 7 2 Procedure un ie no ERE REEL eR a ds 7 2 Printing more than one copy at a time sees 7 4 OVEIVIOW 3835533 Sosa eases ese tet DI nsu I te all he 7 4 Procedure ut ven nete eee tr a tete s 7 4 Specifying N up printing eene 7 6 OVelvie Ws ieee let wi EUM tees 7 6 o iid a
301. rinter Language Download Font PS Header Hold on RAM Select the printer control code type When the box next to this option is checked downloaded fonts and PostScript header remain in printer controller RAM as long as power is supplied to the printer controller This option appears after printer controller memory has been increased PostScript Settings Section Error Print PCL Settings Section Orientation Font Size Pitch Font No Symbol Set Form Length Restore Factory De fault Button Apply Button Clear Button When the box next to this option is checked an error message is printed whenever a PostScript error is generated Specify the orientation of the printed page Type in a value specifying the size in points for proportional fonts Type in a value specifying the number of characters per horizon tal inch for uniform space fonts Type in a font number Select the symbol set you want to use with the font The default symbol set is used if the symbol set you select is currently not available Type in a value specifying the number of lines per page Click this button to return settings to their initial factory defaults Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this point Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this point 10 10 Pi4700e Printer tab 10 Printer Front Panel This screen appears when you click the Operational Panel menu on the
302. rinter controller PostScript fonts built into the printer controller PostScript fonts downloaded from the computer to the printer Pi4700e 10 13 Chapter 10 PageScope Light 1 0 Printer tab Printer Reset This screen appears when you click the Printer Reset menu on the Print er tab Use this screen to reset the printer controller Ele Edt View Go Favorites Help a On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network Seumas Printer Reset poania Ean Printer Controller Reset Test Print Font Info PCL PS Printer Reset Maintenance Local LF Admin Password x Log in 9 on fa lt E E http 7 www minolta com EE memet zone Z o 0 Q o ij Printer Controller Clicking the Reset button displays a confirmation message ask o ing if you want to perform the reset Click Yes to reset the printer B controller Applicable users are informed if a reset is executed while a print operation or data receive operation is in progress 10 14 Pi4700e Printer tab Maintenance This screen appears when you click the Maintenance menu on the Print er tab Use this screen to format the hard disk drive and to update the printer controller firmware El MEE File Edt View Go Favorites Help fa On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network Settings Operational Panel Test Print ad once you forma DE Font Info PCL PS Format Printer Reset Maintenance
303. rinter resident print servers Instead a NetWare server includes a gateway that translates between NDPS and a printer supported protocol or protocols Gateways exist for PSERVER on IPX for LPD and for raw binary sockets printing on IP Some gateways support NDPS configuration and status information capabilities using SN MP The following sections describe the NDPS configuration using Novell sup plied gateways For networks running NDS over IPX the gateways use the NetWare PSERVER function implemented on the printer Network Cards For networks using IP the Novell supplied gateway uses the print er LPD capability Novell is developing an NDPS gateway for printers im plementing the IPP protocol update information on how to set this up will be provided when the capability is released and verified with these print ers Creating NDPS Manager An NDPS Manager provides a platform for Printer Agents that reside on the server An NDPS Manager must be created as an object in the NDS tree before you can create server based Printer Agents This procedure is necessary regardless of the gateway or underlying network protocol used To create an NDPS Manager object 1 In NetWare Administrator select the container where you want the NDPS Manager object to reside 2 Choose Object C This causes the Create NDPS Manager Object dialog box to appear Type a name in the ne field Browse for the Resident Server where you want this mana
304. rinting from an IPP client e SLP Service Location Protocol support Utility software on the CD ROM The following items are contained in the nicutlty folder on the CD ROM that comes with the printer controller o D E o lt e Discovery Program o IPX IP Management Access Program MAP e Peer to Peer Printing Programs See 3 Network Settings for details IP Peer to Peer Printing Program IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program BOOTP Program BootPL32 exe NetWare Setup Utility Program NWSetup Macintosh Utility Program NIManage AppleTalk Utility UNIX TCP IP Utility Programs MIB Setting File The ReadMe file on the CD ROM contains the latest information about each of the network software applications Be sure to read the ReadMe file before using the network software Network Interface Card eeococeoeoeoo 8 2 Pi4700e Getting ready System requirements The following table describes the system requirements for using the Net work Card hardware and software Version of Protocol or NOS Novell NetWare Version 4 x or 5 x Macintosh System 7 x 8 x 9 x Mac OS X Windows or LAN Server systems supporting lpr over TCP IP Red Hat Linux 6 1 or later SUSE Linux 6 3 or later OpenLinux 2 3 or later Turbolinux 4 0 or later Software Novell NetWare printing requires NetWare Capture NPRINT and PCONSOLE later than 1 0 utilities NWSetup requires Windows 95 98 M
305. rinting in reduced enlarged size 7 5 Printing in reduced enlarged size Overview This section explains how to enlarge or reduce the image on a document created with an application for printing on paper of a designated output size Printout Print data ux ES Procedure Start printing from the application which has been used to create the document Normally printing can be started by selecting Print from the File menu The Print ap e will bea eR Make sure aa Ite gt is displayed for Name in Printer and click the S button Note Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate Sort in the Print dialog box To ensure proper printing operation however turn OFF these items of the application and make the necessary settings in each tab of the printer driver The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear If the Paper tab is not displayed click the Paper tab Make sure that fes size of ina document created with the application is displayed in D Siz Specify Output Paper Size in Output Paper Size item and select the print page size Select Fit to Paper and specify the zoom ratio matching the output pa per 7 8 Pi4700e Printing in reduced enlarged size Tip When Fit to tive N x 9 b on v lt r is not specified zoom ratio in s Make other settings as necessary and click the OK button c The Print dialog box will reappear Click the OK button
306. rious Printing Functions e Makes prints that are sorted into complete sets of the originals or grouped into uncollated groups each containing prints of one original n i qud pP n gi e Prints two dem of originals on both front and back sides of a single sheet of paper p 7 2 mR f RB V Long Edge Binding Short Edge Binding e Enlarges or reduces the image on the original p 7 8 E e Prints two pages or four pages of originals on a single sheet of paper Maximum of 16 pages of originals can be printed on a single sheet of paper p 7 6 RE gp Pi4700e Features of the Controller 1 e Prints four pages of originals to both front and back sides of a single sheet of paper p 7 12 TH a 57 Tre 5 ble Pe e Places text in the background p 7 10 e Makes prints of aa sets of the originals stapled together or punched for filing p 4 13 APPI m ape 123 By combining Collate with other finishing capabilities you can make complete sets of documents for immediate delivery without having to do any further processing i Ra E Rad nl e Addsareference number Distribution Number to each document set during printing p 7 14 Pi4700e Chapter 1 Before Using the Printer Driver Chapter 1 Before Using the Printer Driver Features of the Contr
307. rrect combination of functions Unable to print exact ly as set Incorrect settings are made The combination of the func tions though valid on the printer driver is invalid on the machine Check the setting for each item of the printer driver The watermark can not be printed The watermark is not correctly set Check the watermark setting The Darkness setting of the watermark is low Check the Darkness setting of the watermark Unable to specify Staple for Windows Linux Staple can be specified only when the type of Finisher you are using is selected on the De vice Options Setting tab and Auto is selected for Output Setting on the Setup tab Select the type of Finisher you are using on the Device Options Setting tab and select Auto for Output Setting on the Set up tab for Macintosh Staple can be specified only when the type of Finisher you are using is selected on the In stallable Options property sheet and Auto is selected for Out put Setting on the Printer Spe cific Options property sheet Select the type of Finisher you are using on the Installable Op tions property sheet and select Auto for Output Setting on the Printer Specific Options prop erty sheet No stapling can be effected in the following case Paper size other than 182 x 182 mm to 297 x 432 mm is speci fied paper source is manual feed port exit
308. s New registration touch panel of the digital copier S Note This procedure cannot be performed from PageScope Light 1 Press the Utility Key N Touch Job Image Scan Input da iMate wae Meter user s Se TL Count 4 Choice 4 Administr ator Mode Toner He plenisher 3 3 Touch Scanner Addr Input E memory 4 Touch the key to be registered Select the address to Input Change or Delete Scanner Address Inputl 3 9 28 Pi4700e Mailbox Destinations 9 5 Type in the name that will appear on the key for example TONY Touch Next Job Image Scan Memory Input appear in the directory a z l 7 nummum o Touch HDD Address Input f Touch Next Input the scan to address 0000 9999 S Note Box numbers entered as 1 01 001 or 0001 will be treated as the same box Job Image Scan Memory Input Input the scan to addres EEEE 9 Touch Enter Checking changing registration touch panel of the digital copier 1 Press the Utility Key 2 Touch Job Image Scan Input Utility Rewari wae Meter user s Se L Count 4 Choice 4 Administr ator Mode y Toner He plenisher Pi4700e 9 29 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode o2 LE o 2 o lt Scanner Mode 9 Mailbox Destinations
309. s Touch Panel With the keypad in the operation panel type in the default gateway and then touch Enter Utility Default Gateway e ES o 2 o lt In order to activate the address settings turn the digital copier off then D on again inm o o S x o Note The specified IP address cannot be confirmed from the copier panel Zz Confirm it from the network configuration sheet 3 4 Pi4700e Peer to Peer Printing with TCP IP 3 3 Peer to Peer Printing with TCP IP Use the bundled IP Peer to Peer Printing Program for TCP IP peer to peer printing under Windows Digital Copier um h i Network Card TCP IP Windows TCP IP IP Peer to Peer Printing Program Configuration Procedure Windows 95 98 Me 4 N Install TCP IP under Windows Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for more information Assign the IP parameters See 3 2 Specifying the IP Address From the Printer s Touch Panel p 3 2 for more information Install the IP Peer to Peer Printing Program Use the IP Peer to Peer Printing Program for peer to peer printing See 3 4 Peer to Peer Printing Program Windows p 3 8 for more information Use the procedure below to install the printer
310. seeeeeeeeneneseeeneseeeees 12 30 12 38 J TEPP ei a eee 12 31 Directo canica T 12 41 Port number iii iaa sed peus 12 30 12 62 Printing O TO 12 41 Telnet ai dl 12 61 Telet cat i 12 31 12 61 LOG EI 12 61 Troubleshooting 5 2 aa 11 1 TWAIN stie dct iiu Saute ecos 9 37 13 8 Pi4700e Unable to make correct settings 0 0 0 eeeesseeeesseeeeeneeeeeeneeresneeereeeees 11 3 Unable to print 2 5 ence El eto ule 11 1 Unable to print exactly as set 11 3 B parer 12 29 URL ci ae is mar dedo bee ite atu 9 3 Virtual printer eee petet 12 51 12 52 Watermarks 5 5 gui Gs nie reto ee oer accel 7 10 Web browser i ite ib d rc a ter es eade ieu dps dean 12 31 WORKOUTQUD 4 5 2 reno ADMI 12 35 Pi4700e 13 9 Chapter 13 Index EL Jaideyo xepu Pi4700e 13 10 MINOLTA Copyright 2003 MINOLTA CO LTD The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice to incorporate improvements made on the product or products the manual covers MINOLTA CO LTD 2003 6 3 13 2 chome Azuchi Machi Chuo ku Osaka 541 8556 Japan
311. server name when this field is left blank is MLT Network Interface Card serial number Print Server Password When you want to use a password for logging into the network interface card type the password you want to specify into the field Type the same password into the Password Retype field for confirmation The password you specify must be the same as the bindery and NDS based print server password Pi4700e 3 27 Chapter 3 Network Settings e ES o 2 o lt Network Settings Specifying network settings from PageScope Light Preferred File Server Type in the name of the preferred file server when setting up for bindery and bindery emulation See 8 Network Interface Card for more information about the preferred file server The print server must always be configured on a preferred file server Failure to properly configure the preferred file server can cause incorrect printing results Preferred NDS Context Input the print server for NDS operation In this case always in put the entire context without inputting a period at the begin ning of the path Example ou standard ou organization_1 Preferred NDS Tree Input the print server for NDS operation If you do not know what the tree is input w mi at the DOS command line Print Queue Scan Rate Specify the print server s queue scan interval in seconds The default scan rate is 1 second Etherne
312. side set to OFF at all times Pi4700e 4 17 Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings Paper tab S Tips for 5 If you output prints to the Elevator Tray when the Single staple Finish er Multi staple Finisher or Mailbin Finisher is installed the prints are output in a sawtooth manner When the Folding Finisher is installed or if none of the finishing options is installed the prints are output in a criss cross manner The following are the minimum requirements for permitting criss cross sorting using the Collated setting Stacks of paper of the same size are loaded in the lengthwise and crosswise directions The Staple Punch or Cover mode is not set When Collated is selected Sorting is dimmed S Tip for 6 A Portrait or Landscape print appears on the Page Layout Pi4700e Paper tab 4 Functions of the Edit Custom Paper or Custom Paper dialog box The name of the dialog box is Custom Paper for PCL6 Edit Custom Paper for PS Use this dialog box to set special sizes of paper Paper Name Paper Size Untitled Paper 1 8 0 16 x 11 0 16 inch OK Cancel 1 E Untitled Paper 2 8 0 16 x 11 0 16 inch 2 3 4 1 Paper Name Select the paper name from the Custom Paper list 2 New This function allows you to set a special size of paper When it is selected the dialog box changes to the Custom Paper Setting Di
313. st gt E mail Destinations File Destinations SMTP amp FTP Configuration a Ei External Open Link 00 Nancy nancy foo bar HDD Configuration 01 Tom tom foo bar LDAP Setting 02 annie annie foo bar 03 Bob bob foo bar Admin Password 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 e Clicking an unused cell inside the E mail Destination List displays a screen for registering a new E mail Destination See Configuring an E Mail destination p 9 13 for more information e Clicking an existing E mail Destination number or name displays a screen showing the details of that destination See Configuring an E Mail destination p 9 13 for more information e Todelete an E mail Destination click the del button next to the desti nation you want to delete 9 12 Pi4700e E mail Destinations Configuring an E Mail destination This section describes the settings you can make on the screens for reg istering a new E mail destination and for changing the configuration of an E mail destination File Edt View Favorites Tools Help Destinations gt E mail Destinations File Destinations SMTP amp FTP Configuration External Open Link HDD Configuration LDAP Setting Admin Mode On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network E mail Destination No Destination Name Destination Address Scanning Mode Compression Apply Clear Internet E mail Destination Section No E mail Destination n
314. stScript fonts in a PostScript compatible printer it is possible to produce smoother letters than bit mapped fonts can PostScript printer software The program that is used on the computer to enable printing on PostScript printers printer driver Software that enables controlling printer operations print job A single batch of job for printing specified at one time from an application It may be directly transmitted to the printer or temporarily stored in a print queue Pi4700e 12 27 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix Preview Listing print manager An application that manages the print queue and print files resolution See dpi SIMM An acronym for Single In line Memory Module TCP IP The standard data transfer protocol over the Internet Data is transferred by breaking up data messages into packets to which IP addresses are at tached TrueType font A soft font standard the system has TrueType is a font technology that ensures that the printed output is identical to what you see on screen It is also scalable capable of producing characters in varying sizes gray scale The method of representing color data on a monochrome device by ap proximating the data with shades of gray halftone paper The medium on which the printer can print data Varieties include OHP transparencies labels letterhead and postcards in addition to plain pa per and recycled paper 12 28 Pi4700
315. stallation script nicinst The script automatically downloads the appropriate Network Card util ities for your system and displays questions to prompt you for the in formation it needs N What is the node name of the Print Server Unit Input the host name recorded in etc hosts For example type print fast and then press Ere 12 42 Pi4700e UNIX Configuration 12 3 gal o What is the printer name Type the printer name and press E Here the script displays the information you have input up to this point Node name of the Print Server Card printfast Printer name to be used printer name The printer is attached on PORT 1 Check these settings and make sure they are correct If they are cor rect type yes and press Eve Otherwise type no and press Ee y Is this printer PostScript Type yes and press Ee if the printer is a PostScript printer Other wise type no and press The printcap entries you have made up to this point appear on the dis play and the script confirms whether you want the entries written into the etc printcap file Type yes if you want the entries added to print cap and then press Er If you do not want them added type no press and then manually make the required changes to the en tries Do not change the device name in the etc printcap file which was given to the Network Card in step 3 The Ip command line must refer ence the p entry recorded in the printc
316. stalling the printer driver make sure that your computer meets the following requirements If it doesn t the printer driver may not function properly Personal computer IBM PC or compatible with Pentium 200MHz or higher CPU Operating system Windows NT 4 0 English Memory 64MB or more I O interface Parallel Centronics interface Conforming to IEEE1284 Network 10 100BaseT UTP Free space on hard disk 10MB or more PCL6 2MB or more PS e Windows 95 98 Me For the operating environment and installation procedure for the Win dows 95 98 Me printer driver see page 2 1 e Windows 2000 XP For the operating environment and installation procedure for the Win dows 2000 XP printer driver see page 2 8 Pi4700e 2 15 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Windows NT 4 0 Installation This section explains the installation procedure for the Windows NT 4 0 printer driver No Note When starting up the operating system log in with administrator privi leges Before starting to install the printer driver be sure first to quit all other applications ee Tip The following procedure assumes that the machine is a Digital Copier and that the printer driver is PCL6 Read the specific proper names ac cordingly if the machine is a model other than the Digital Copier and if for example the printer driver is PS 1 Click the Start button From the menu that appears select S then c
317. t Recent Applications gt Recent Documents gt Recent Servers gt 8 Scrapbook Stickies Shut Down 11 The Chooser dialog box will appear Click the LaserWriter icon File Edit View Label Special Chooser AppleShare LaserWriter 8 MLT_504486 a Select a PostScript Printer Create AppleTalk Active Q Inactive 155 6 4 Pi4700e Installing the printer driver 6 12 The printer name set up with the NIC appears in the list under Select a PostScript Printer Select the printer and click the Create button Chooser Select a PostScript Printer MLT_504486 AppleShare LaserWriter 8 Create Active Q Inactive 755 AppleTalk 13 The Select a PostScript Printer Description File dialog box will ap pear Select Minolta Di470U PS ppd from the dialog box and click the Se lect button S Note The following procedure is explained for Di470 specified for inch area as an example Use by specifying proper file according to the machine used Select a PostScript Printer Description File Cp Printer Descriptions Macintosh HD Printer Model Minolta Di470 PostScript Pi4700e 6 5 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh Installing the printer driver 14 After the installation procedures have been completed a small printer
318. t EE reversal 5 2 p eet e pire io qe Geese cel screen angle screen frequency send fonts as Stmoothlng 5 n mf pU ti SOMING eS staple user name watarmark sse Properties settings Linux Ad MON sssr eor ir oett o re e eed deceo dildos Quality tab RARA a he thc eee ne lo lado eo 12 59 Reducing arain a N NA 7 8 Pi4700e 13 7 Chapter 13 Index op i 9 on t lt Index Reset Telnet iia Mie eee heed an tenis 12 62 Scala rl 7 8 Scan to Email oie 2 3 AMS mte dete cee 9 1 Scamto HDD arta titan dee acci dee fette 9 4 SCAN O SOON sx cucine dig beg 9 2 Rees 12 29 Host based lpd aie tee 12 41 12 49 Printer based AA 12 37 Setting up the network card 8 4 Set p tab ieu ee teni eh 4 7 5 23 n 12 34 12 52 SMTP 8 FTP configuration oooocnccnnnccnnccnonnnoncnnnnncnnncnnnccnncnnnn cnn canaria 9 7 Sol ica E 12 29 Host based lpd orita 12 41 12 42 Printer based Ipa i mito 12 38 Specifications 5 2 tue ee ela e orte irte 12 19 Spooling directory estian rni arn aoe a oiae 12 32 12 40 Slats pajenn o ii 12 30 Subrietimask 5 eee re ee deel ae Be 12 53 A A edu 12 57 ME 12 62 System Management Interface Tool See SMIT 12 52 System Ve osa cette a E 12 29 Host based Ipd pte 12 41 12 47 Printer based lpd ccceseeecesseeeeeeseee
319. t between elements lt SPACE gt Selects lt F1 gt Help Nae Note When setting is performed using network printer LPD setting Remote Hostname Remote Queue should be made in addition to above set ting Input PORT1 for Remote Queue With Turbo Linux4 0 some other setting should be made on Edit Print er Setting screen For setting of printer type select Other settings can be left as default settings 5 8 Pi4700e Printer setting with X window System Select the t button to complete setting erminal AE Fie Edit Settings Help TurboPrintCfg v2 0 2 C 1999 Turbolinux E Configure Printers Select the printer that you wish to modify or use the Add Remove buttons to add or remove a printer The and R keys are shortcuts to add and remove respectively Type Queue Name Printer Type LOC Prnb5ppi Unknown B gt between elements SPACE Selects lt F1 gt He 7 Pi4700e Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux Chapter 5 Printer Driver for Linux 5 Printer setting with X window System Open Linux With Open Linux printer setting can be performed using dialog box The setting method using dialog box is given here 1 Open KDE menu Select COAS Peripherals Printer The dialog box shown below will appear Printer configuration Printer Daemon Configure the printers connected to your computer or netw
320. t Frame Type Specify the frame type being used by Ethernet Normally the frame type being used by NetWare is determined by monitoring the network interface card When the frame type is determined it is assumed that the network interface card is the same frame type Once you select a frame type network interface card op eration supports that NetWare frame type only Frame type monitoring normally starts from IEEE 802 3 and then moves to Ethernet ll and then 802 3 SNAP When the net work you are on uses multiple Ethernet frame types use the pull down menu to select the frame type to be recognized Disable Bindery Check this option to disable bindery when only the NDS mode is used When bindery is disabled the network interface card no longer supports the print server on the bindery file server Apply button Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this point Clear button Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this point The settings you make on this screen do not become valid until you reset the network interface card or power it down and then back up again See Reset p 3 34 for more information on resetting the network interface card 3 28 Pi4700e Specifying network settings from PageScope Light NetWare Status This screen appears when you click the NetWare Status sub menu under the NetWare Configuration menu Use this screen to check the
321. t dre tid fecere 1 6 HDD niue tee te edant 9 4 HDD configuration Lei eo a 9 9 ost nai 12 57 12 59 How to input characters o oo eeeseeeeseeceeseeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeneeeeeneeeennaeeeeaaes 9 40 HP UX iicet etes ddp ue tete a ales 12 29 HostbasedilDd eod cote ettet 12 41 12 45 Printer based lpd 2 0 eed 12 34 13 2 Pi4700e HTTP server Password i nao it 12 63 INTE ose c E H 12 42 Installing the printer driver see e 2 1 BED 5 2 MacOS X seii ue hn eli ete SM 6 9 Macint shi OS 7 8 91 id t aaa aa raoi eain nata ade E aiaia 6 1 Windows 2000 XP essent 2 9 Windows 95 98 Me a araa eE era nE E EAE EE EAE EATER Ein A 2 2 Windows NT 4 0 iiti gre tii 2 16 Interpreter Language action area eei ene aote ee cioe Moe dide edere deo 12 62 IP Address specifying from the touch panel ss 3 2 IP addiess scott eet dac nie iecit te vot 12 53 ARP istic EN 12 54 12 56 BOOT P gt tcs tardando eti Miser Boge 12 57 DHCP linras ES 12 60 HARP aoga EH 12 59 Telnet dee ia E Ane E 12 61 12 62 IPP printlng E E EE 3 21 IPX Peer to Peer Printing Program e 3 14 Need fei Aesee tates tepid rn 7 34 Job Management tab seem 4 24 5 33 LDAP Setting eiii e RR eibi Reels 9 10 Line printer daemon See lpd ssseeeeee 12 29 IDUX taie TEUER bgami diuites 12 39 Lock job functioning Ee ede eene 7 22 E Og IY itt te e
322. t ei eife co ore 12 61 Tod 12 29 12 31 Host based IPA eee tee 12 29 12 41 EPD emulation witch cient roter eee eel tet Cote Cete coe de 12 62 Printer based p trt eie eet 12 30 ge ia 12 29 12 31 Pi4700e 13 3 Chapter 13 Index e _ o 2 o lt Index CPR printing rore ete ete ate i n Rede aa E 3 17 LPSYSTEM 2 iter tke ii veu ee o eco 12 38 M MAC address ARP iaa tte ec entered E os 12 54 12 56 lale EE 12 59 Mailbox destinations seeseeee mn 9 28 Management Access Program sssssseeee 8 28 pi 8 28 12 31 MEMON eee Oa Ms is 1 6 Named pipe vente dein Heelies RH ni pee 12 52 NDPS uut I Sasa ake dase os 8 16 jc E rt da dica tai 8 8 Network card jumper switch setting see nar 8 50 Specifications ero get pic et ea tees 8 53 troubleshootirig 2 cte da 8 46 Network settings BOOTP Windows rapra dete ee Eten ee ed 8 32 Macintosh configuration ss naar rrnnrrnnnnn nn 8 27 MAP e E 8 28 NetWare configuration occonnocccccnnononcccccconononccnnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnccnnnnnnnnns 8 5 NIManage eie dte ep RR cupit iet dioc is 8 34 NWSetup Windows eeeeeenneene eene 8 38 system requirements seeessseseseeeeee eene nnnm enne 8 3 Windows configuration eeeeenn nnnnnr nana 8 5 NIG Board DD E Wheto os 1 6 NiManage for AppleTalk
323. t to specify a time frame for the machine op eration You want to share the machine with other computers connected to the same network this setting must be made on the computer directly connected to the ma chine You want to restrict access to the machine You want to check the accounts of the machine users This setting is not related to printing For the details of Device Options Setting tab see page 4 2 2 20 Pi4700e Windows NT 4 0 2 Displaying a Properties dialog box There are two different steps to take to display a properties dialog box The contents of a particular properties dialog box slightly differ depending on how you access it Select the appropriate one according to your need 1 To display a properties dialog box from the Printers window 2 To display a properties dialog box from an application menu Below are the detailed procedures for each approach Displaying a Properties dialog box from the Printer Folder 1 Click the Start button and select Se ings Then click Printers 2 Click the appropriate printer icon ex Minolta Di470 PCL6 To display the General tab Select Properties from the Fi menu 4 To display Printing Preferences dialog box Click Document Defaults from the File menu It allows you to set the environment in which you will use the printer The settings made through this method are valid in all applications Displaying a Properties di
324. t you just created This displays the Print Server window Wii Print Server TEST PSERVER Identification Identification Name TEST PSERVERQUALITY Advertising Name TEST_PSERVER Assignments Other Hame H un Um Network Address _ IPX COQ9C8C8 00206BAABBCC 9999 Description 1 Dperator Y Auditing Log Location HB E Ea Department H El MTS Organization COo B E Version Status Running Unload Change Password Eme pese end 2 Click the Assignments button and then click the Add button to dis play the Select Object window Bill Print Server TEST PSERVER Assignments Identification Printers Lc i Users perator Auditing Log Print Layout 4 gt Add Printer Humber oK Cancel Help 3 From the Objects list select the printer object you just created and then click the OK button to add the printer with its context to the Prints box in the Print Server window 4 Click the OK button again Pi4700e NetWare configuration 8 Checking Assignments 1 Atthe directory tree double click a print queue object you just created This displays the Print Queue window Identification Identification Name TEST Q QUALITY Volume LEFT SYS QUALITY Assignments Other Hame H m Operator Description 14 Users z Locis BE J
325. talled in able to use MAP BOOTP Windows See 8 7 Using the utility software Other Methods ARP command Windows See Assigning IP Addresses Using ARP For Windows ARP command UNIX See Assigning IP Addresses Using ARP For UNIX BOOTP daemon UNIX See Assigning IP Addresses Using the BOOTP Daemon For UNIX RARP daemon UNIX See Assigning IP Addresses Using the RARP Daemon For UNIX DHCP daemon UNIX See Using the DHCP Daemon For UNIX Note If you start up the Digital Copier with its initial factory default setup without assigning a Digital Copier IP address ATIP Automatic Tem porary IP Address automatically assigns an IP address and subnet mask You can use IP address assigned by ATIP to detect the Digital Copier with the MAP utility To change the current IP address and sub net mask setting first access the Digital Copier s Web setup page from MAP and then make the changes you want Pi4700e 12 53 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix Setting Up IP Parameters Assigning IP Addresses Using ARP For Windows 1 On a computer associated with thes same network segment as the De ital Copier click Start 5 and then click N S Prompt Com Type the command shown below arp s IP address assigned to Network Card MAC address Example Network Card MAC Address 00 20 6b aa bb cc IP Address 192 9 200 200 arp s 1
326. taneous ly S Tips for 2 The sizes for which you can perform two sided printing are from 140 x 182 mm to 297 x 432 mm Short Edge Binding Long Edge Biding Booklet Left Binding and Booklet Right Binding are displayed on the Page Layout S Note for 3 Some paper sizes cannot be selected For details refer to the User Manual of the machine Pi4700e 4 9 Chapter 4 Properties Settings Chapter 4 Properties Settings Setup tab S Tips for 3 Set the paper take up tray using Device Opti The paper take up tray used is displayed in green on the Printer Fig ure S Note for 4 Some paper sizes cannot be selected For details refer to the User Manual of the machine S Tips for 4 Set the type of finisher using Device Options Set The paper take up tray used is displayed in green on the Printer Fig ure Pi4700e Setup tab Functions of the Detail of Paper Source dialog box This function sets the cover page function and the OHP interleaving func tion Detail of Paper Source 1 r Cover Page L xj Front Cover Page FP th Image Cover Paper Source Trayl z 1 Cover Page This function is used to print a document with front and back cover pages You can print on the front cover or leave it blank Front Cover Page with Image Front Cover Page Back Cover Page with Image Back Cover Page Cover Paper Source 2 interl
327. taple Finisher or Folding Finisher is mounted Stapled along the long edge of the docu ment Center only when Folding Finisher is mounted Stapled at the center of the document Punch only when Multi staple Finisher Mailbin Finisher or Folding Finisher is mounted Select whether to punch holes in the printed pages Off Does not punch holes Short Edge Punches holes along the short edge of the document Long Edge Punches holes along the long edge of the document Folding only when Folding Finisher is mounted Set the folding functions for finishing Off Does not fold the printed page Crease Makes a crease in the printed page Pi4700e 6 37 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh Ko D o Ren Printer Driver for Macintosh Print options Crease Staple Half Folding Half Folding Staple Half Folding Punch Half Folding Staple Punch Z folding Z folding Corner Sta ple Z folding Long Edge Staple Z folding Punch Z folding Corner Sta ple Punch Z folding Long Edge Staple Punch Staples the printed page at the center with a crease made in it Folds the printed page in two Folds printed pages in two and staples them together Folds printed pages in two and punches holes in them Folds printed pages in two staples them together and punches holes in them Folds printed pages into three parts Folds printed pages into th
328. tee vk d MUS 12 44 HP UX Systema aei ooi inthe cte rep reae edes 12 45 System V Solaris Version 2 System V Release 4 386 Base Machine eid tira Neate 12 47 SOOQUN Dia i E E E 12 49 AIX RISC System 6000 sssssseseeeeeeenee nennen 12 51 Virtual Printer Commands sene 12 52 AIX Print Command ss 5t ede uen UE 12 52 Setting Up IP Parameters eese 12 53 Bundled Utility Programs eeee 12 53 Other Methods naa een eere enitn redet deeds 12 53 Assigning IP Addresses Using ARP For Windows 12 54 Assigning IP Addresses Using ARP For UNIX 12 56 Assigning IP Addresses Using the BOOTP Daemon EOF UNIDO iiec nece e a A dest us 12 57 Assigning IP Addresses Using the RARP Daemon FOr UNDO icto ieu Bee a da 12 59 Using the DHCP Daemon For UNIX eeeeeeee 12 60 Using Telnet to Make Settings esses 12 61 Establishing a Telnet Connection seeeeees 12 61 CIL sisi eis nse 12 62 IP Paramietets 2 n bv ee EP E ERE aeara Apia daarin 12 62 EPD Pririters om eere ahr Bener ied ade 12 62 ProtoCols nto ne GER He BC RENTRER IS 12 62 Reset Unitaria eet tree rere iei tintin 12 62 Restore Factory Defaults sen 12 63 Change Password sse nennen 12 63 Exiting Telnet Exit ccce 12 63 FTP Printin
329. tempel Garamond Bold Italic Symbol Symbol Sets z 9 Symbol Set Name Roman 8 PC 8 PC 8 D N IBM 850 ECMA Latin 1 Legal Latin 2 CO NI OD mo BY oj N Latin 5 Times Roman Times Italic Times Bold Times Bold Italic Times New Roman MT Times New Roman Italic MT Times New Roman Bold MT Times New Roman Bold Italic MT Univers Univers Oblique Univers Bold Univers Bold Oblique Univers Condensed Univers Condensed Oblique Univers Condensed Bold Univers Condensed Bold Oblique Univers Light Univers Light Oblique Univers Extended Univers Extended Oblique Univers Bold Extended Univers Bold Extended Oblique Zapf Chancery Medium Italic Zapf Dingbats Wingdings Candid emulates Carta Taffy emulates Takton Copperplate Gothic ThirtyTwo BC Copperplate Gothic ThirtyThree BC Hoefler Text Ornaments 12 22 Pi4700e Preview Listing Selectable Paper Sizes Letter 11 x 17 11 x 14 Legal Invoice Executive A6 A5 A4 A3 B6 B5 B4 FLS1 FLS2 FLS3 FLS4 Pi4700e 12 23 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix Preview Listing Accessories Pi4700e Quick Start Guide Printer Driver CD ROM for Pi4700e Controller 12 24 Pi4700e Preview Listing 12 Glossary 10BASE T A network data transfer standard established by the IEEE The network uses a twisted pair cable carrying 10 megabits per second 10Mbps
330. the menu Note however that you need to input the password on the Network tab only once per session After you input the password the Password box does not appear any more on other Network tab setting screens dur ing the current session Summary This screen appears when you click the Summary menu on the Network tab Use this screen to view a summery of the network interface card Ele Edit View Go Favorites Help Summary TCP IP Configuration NetWare Configuration AppleTalk Configuration IPP Configuration WINS Configuration Reset Maintenance On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network Summary ROM Version 6 19 IP Address 192 168 10 11 Hardware Address 00 20 6B 1 1 22 33 Serial Number 123456 ml 8 Intemetzone E ROM Version Network interface card firmware version IP Address IP address assigned to the current network interface card Hardware Address MAC address of network interface card Serial Number Serial number of network interface card 3 24 Pi4700e Specifying network settings from PageScope Light 3 TCP IP Configuration This screen appears when you click the TCP IP Configuration menu on the Network tab It lets you change a number of network interface card TCP IP settings Ele Edit View Go Favorites Help On line Ready System Job Printer Scanner Network Summary A password is required to perform th
331. the printer resolution ment Unlimited Download Enables downloading of as many fonts as required able Fonts A Tip The functions of LaserWriter itself are being used See the documen tation provided for LaserWriter Pi4700e 6 17 Chapter 6 Printer Driver for Macintosh Ko D o Ren Printer Driver for Macintosh Print options Ge neral The General property sheet allows you to set the pages and the number of copies for printing 3 H Paper Source All pages from y 1 2 8 4 5 S Printer _MLT_504486 wv Destination Printer v Copies 1 O Collated Pages amp All Q From To O First page from Remaining from v Save Settings Copies Set the number of copies to be made Setting range 1 to 999 sets Pages Specify the pages to be printed All Prints all pages From to Prints pages between the specified pages Paper Source This cannot be set on this property sheet Use Printer Specific Options Destination Select whether to print to the machine or a file Setting values Printer File Collated Do not make a setting on this property sheet Use Printer Specific Options Note It is possible to enter a number exceeding setting range However do not specify the number exceeding the range When using the OHP interleaving function set the number of sets of prints t
332. the problem is due to a damaged cable Are Network Card control settings correct Check the protocol that is enabled on for the Network Card Make sure that the protocol being used by the Network Card is also enabled on the computer Has there been any change in network configuration Check to make sure that settings are correct for any network hardware that has been added modified or removed Has there been any change in the computer s applications If you have recently added an application to the computer check to make sure that the application is not interfering with network settings Can you print from other applications If you can print successfully from other applications perform the prop er troubleshooting procedures for the application with which you are experiencing problems Can you print from other computers If you can print successfully from other printers perform the proper troubleshooting procedures for the operating system of the computer on which you are experiencing problems Pi4700e 8 47 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card o D E o lt Network Interface Card Troubleshooting NetWare Troubleshooting Checklist Check the following points whenever you are experiencing problems while using NetWare Is the print server name input correctly The default printer name is MLT serial number The serial number is recorded on the Network Card Is
333. the way you want click the OK button to apply them and close the dialog box Running MAP 1 2 2 9 On the Start menu point to Programs and then Map On the submenu that appears click MAP A list of Network Cards found by MAP appears on a Web browser page 3 Management Access Program 3 80 Microsoft Internet Explorer x File Edt View Go Favorites Help B Management Access Program 3 80 Update Server List Help Units supporting TCP IP http 192 9 200 200 MLT 995243 Minolta Di450 Units supporting IPX SPX MLT 995243 Minolta Di450 q ej E My Computer Z 4 Click the URL or the serial number of the Network Card whose settings you want to change 5 This displays a Web page for managing the printer where the Network Card is installed You can use the Web page to make various Network Card settings See 10 PageScope Light for more information 8 30 Pi4700e Using the utility software 8 S Note If you start up the Digital Copier with its initial factory default setup without assigning a Digital Copier IP address ATIP Automatic Tem porary IP Address automatically assigns an IP address and subnet mask You can use IP adaress assigned by ATIP to detect the Digital Copier with the MAP utility To change the current IP address and sub net mask setting first access the Digital Copier s Web setup page from MAP and then make the changes you want Pi4700e 8 31 Chapter 8
334. ther computers connected to the same network this setting must be made on the computer directly connected to the ma chine For details of Device Options Setting tab see page 4 2 Displaying a Properties dialog box There are two different steps to take to display a properties dialog box The contents of a particular properties dialog box slightly differ depending on how you access it Select the appropriate one according to your need 1 To display a properties dialog box from the Printers window 2 To display a properties dialog box from an application menu Below are the detailed procedures for each approach Pi4700e Windows 95 98 Me 2 Displaying a Properties dialog box from the Printers window Click the Start button and select Settings Then click Pr 2 Right click the appropriate printer icon ex Minolta Di470 PCL6 Select Properties from the menu that will appear This shows the properties dialog box It allows you to set the environment in which you will use the printer The settings made through this method are valid in all applications Displaying a Properties dialog box from an Application Menu As an example the procedure for the PCL6 printer driver is described be low 1 Select Print from the File menu of the application Make sure that the ne of the Printer is Minolta 6 ta Di470 PCL6 is not ds click Y and iom the menu that will then appear select Min CL N
335. three parts and staples them at the corner Folds printed pages into three parts and staples them together Folds printed pages into three parts and punches holes in them Folds printed pages into three parts staples them at the corner and punches holes in them Folds printed pages into three parts staples them to gether and punches holes in them 11 12 Y OHP Interleaving Select whether to insert a sheet of paper between sheets of OHP transparencies on which prints have been made Off Does not perform OHP Interleaving Tray1 to Tray4 LCC Specify the paper source for the interleaves LCT Front Cover Page Lets you use paper for the cover of a different type such as colored paper from that for the text pages of your copy sets Off Feeds paper for all pages of your copy sets from the paper source specified in Paper Source Manual Feed Tray1 to Specify the paper source for the cover Tray4 LCC LCT Note for 8 If the Folding function is to be used turn Off ple setting under If The stapling position may be at the upper left or upper right corner de pending on the orientation of the paper and printing e and make the Sta is set printed pages are fed out into the Elevator Tray If the number of sheets of paper exceeds the limit that the Multi staple Finisher Single staple Finisher or Mailbin Finisher can handle the stapling function may be canceled For details see the
336. ting Allows you to make settings for background print p 6 19 ing Cover Page Allows you to print out a page of descriptive data p 6 20 about each print job Le i 5 Color Matching Allows you to set color data output p 6 21 e Layout Allows you to set the printing layout p 6 22 5 Error Handling Allows you to set the handling of error informa p 6 23 tion Save as File Allows you to make settings for saving data in p 6 24 c files 7 Q Printer Specific Options Allows you to make not only such basic settings p 6 25 S such as paper source and exit port but also en 3 hanced functions including duplex printing OHP Ss interleaving and Cover mode FEE It further allows you to set finishing capabilities 2 including sort staple punch and folding for L those occasions when you need to make multiple 9 complete sets of the original document Q _ o ww E a 6 14 Pi4700e Print options 6 Installable Options The Installable Options dialog box allows you to set the options installed on the machine Make sure that the correct settings are made otherwise some printer functions may not function properly or printing cannot be per formed correctly The settings should match the machine configuration Current Printer Description File PPD Selected Minolta Di470U PS PPD Installable Options 1 Installed Trays Dups2wayTray v 2 Hen ntie v 3 Finisher Folding Finisher v 1
337. tion a Dup 2way Tray Dup LCC or Duplex Cabinet must be mounted on the machine Print data Printout 2 gt Procedure Start printing from the application which has been used to create the document Normally printing can be started by selecting Print from the File menu 2 The Print dialog BOX will ed Make sure that Minolta Di47 gt is displayed for N gt in Printer and click the Properties button Note Some applications allow you to set Copies and Collate Sort in the Print dialog box To ensure proper printing operation however turn OFF these items of the application and make the necessary settings in each property sheet of the printer driver The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear Make sure that the size of the document created with the application is displayed in Original Document Size on the Paper tab Click the Setup tab 7 2 Pi4700e Printing on both sides of the paper 7 6 Select Long Edge Binding or Short Edge Binding from Duplex Booklet N LE i Q f lt Oo If Long Edge Binding is selected printing will be performed on both sides of each page so that the printed pages form a book when they are bound along the long edge If Short Edge Binding is selected printing will be performed on both sides of each page so that the printed pages form a book when they are bound along the short edge Long Edge Binding Short Edge Binding Tip The Duplex Booklet icon shows which edge is to be
338. tion at the Server Console At the server console you can create a Printer Agent to represent a printer attached to one of the following e A workstation or a remote file server e Directly to the network running in Ipr mode in a TCP IP environment and for which no gateway is available A Printer Agent configured in this mode will emulate a legacy print server PServer Emulation and will no longer require the pserver nlm file 1 Perform the steps described in Creating Public Access Printers in NetWare Administrator 2 Choose Connection Type Remote Printer LPR TCPIP This causes the Port Handler Configuration Remote Printer LPR TCPIP Mode screen to appear 3 Choose IP Host select Host Type and provide the information re quested 4 Click Accept and Exit The Printer Agent with its associated Print Device Subsystem and Port Handler string are then loaded The Port Handler configuration utility closes and control returns to the NDPS Manager Public Access Printers and Controlled Access Printers Creating Public Access Printers in NetWare Administrator 1 Double click the NDPS Manager object you will be using to control this Printer Agent 2 Inthe Identification page for the NDPS Manager object you want to use choose the Printer Agent List and click New This causes the Create Printer Agent dialog box to appear 3 Type the name of the Printer Agent in the Printer Agent Name field 4 Atthe Gateway Types window se
339. tions screen 3 Press F to enter the bindery mode S Note If a message appears telling you to log in with bindery connection it means that the attached server does not have bindery mode enabled Either perform the procedure under Confirming the Bindery Context or log onto a server with bindery services enabled 4 Onthe Available Options screen select Quick Setup and then press Enter Use Quick Setup to connect the print server print queue and printer you want to use You will be able to change this settings later if you want Print Services Quick Setup Print server New printer New print queue Banner type Printer type Location Interrupt Port MLT 160150 Print queue volume LEFT SYS Text Parallel Manual Load None polled mode LPTl 5 Select Print Server and then press to modify the entry 6 Type the name of the print server you want to use into the New print server field and then press e Pi4700e 8 7 Chapter 8 Network Interface Card o LE D o lt Network Interface Card NetWare configuration S Note You can use MAP or a Web browser to change the print server name See Management Access Program Windows p 8 28 for more in formation The initial default print server name is MLT serial number m Press E to move the cursor to New printer type the printer name and
340. tions allow you to set Copies and Collate Sort in the Print dialog box To ensure proper printing operation however turn OFF these items of the application and make the necessary settings in each property sheet of the printer driver 3 The Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties dialog box will appear 4 Click the down arrow W of Easy Set Name and from subsequent menu select the name to be used Minolta Di470 PCL6 Properties Quality Device General Details Easy Set N X WaterFINAL Default 4upHA T BookDupl ER cB 5 Dialog box for confirmation will appear Click the OK button The set ting data will then be read to the driver software 6 Click the Delete button f Dialog box for confirmation will appear Click the OK button The title name will disappear and the setting data will be deleted 7 32 Pi4700e Using the settings function 7 N 9 NY a S Note O If the setting contents are changed before deleting the Easy Set Name will change to Untitled and the Delete button will change to the Save button Deleting cannot be performed in this status S Click the OK button L The print dialog box will then reappear Click the Cancel button 5 T D NY gt eee 5 Note o Settings can also be deleted from the printer icon property sheet opened from the Printers window With PS it is not possible to save the settings if the function has been activated from the application Start the f
341. to save your changes without applying them Select 2 to save your changes and reset the Network Card which applies the changes Select 3 to discard your changes Pi4700e 12 63 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix 12 FTP Printing 12 9 FTP Printing Use the following procedure for using FTP File Transfer Protocol to print Start up the FTP client and look into the Network Card using the fol lowing setting Host Name lt NIC IP address gt Login Name port1 Password port1 2 Upload PUT the file you want to print The printer prints the uploaded PUT file S Note FTP Printing does not support selecting multiple file names Only one person can be logged on to a port at any particular time 12 64 Pi4700e 13 E 13 Index A AD a a DU ete end ts 12 29 12 41 AIX AO ouea E nie 12 34 AIX RISC System 6000 sss 12 51 AIX Version 2 5 ui aaa 12 33 hiat mm 12 54 12 56 Entry ccc aloha d i a bins dds 12 55 O uM DAI IU MU 12 29 12 35 Booklet printing oii eom erri a ae 7 12 A etiim et tei 8 32 12 57 Bourne Shell sssssssseseeeeeeeeeneeenennee nennen nnns 12 38 BSD UNIX mn aed ie ida 12 30 12 32 C Collate csi Meee ES 7 4 Conflicts dialog DOX o eeeeeceeseeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeseaeeeaeetnneesas 4 36 5 35 ied 1 6 connecting initi bete ote t deli ette end ec 1 7 COPY re dq 7 16 ege
342. ttached to your computer click Local Printer If it is attached to another computer click Network Printer vi C Network printer _ o9 Bek mes cons S Note When installing the printer driver in a computer connected to the ma chine via a network be sure to consult the network administrator This is a request to be made of the network administrator To install the printer driver in a computer connected to a network select Net work printer and click the Next button Then a window will appear prompting you to enter the network path Enter the path 5 A window will appear prompting you to select the manufacturer and model of your printer Click the Have Disk button on the lower right part of the screen Add Printer Wizard Click the manufacturer and model of your printer If your printer came with an installation disk click Have Disk If your printer is not listed consult your printer documentation for a compatible printer Manufacturers uSet 1000 AccuSet 10005F v2013 108 AGFA AccuSet 10005F v52 3 AGFA AccuSet 1500 AGFA AccuSet 15005F v2013 108 Bull AGFA AccuSet 800 C ltoh xz AGFA AccuSet ANNSF v2n3 1608 El pe io toos Pi4700e 2 3 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Driver Windows 95 98 Me 6 The Install From Disk dialog box will appear Install the controller driver CD ROM that is included with the controller in
343. ttings Peer to Peer Printing Program Windows Peer to Peer Printing Program Windows Peer to Peer Printing Program is a Windows utility that lets you output di rectly to a printer from a computer on a network without going through a server Use this program for peer to peer printing under TCP IP Requirements Computer must have TCP IP installed and enabled e Network Card must have valid IP parameters assigned S Note Refer to the applicable Windows documentation for information about installing TCP IP under Windows Installing the IP Peer to Peer Printing Program Use the following procedure to install the IP Peer to Peer Printing Pro gram 1 Load the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive of the computer you want to use p folder on the CD ROM 2 Start Se xe in the Ip Follow the instructions that appear on the screen to complete the in stallation The default installation directory is C Program Files lp p2p You can change this to any other directory during the ingtalliation sia Neus Note ve e Us gt appears on thes screen iai tthe end of the installation procedure The installation procedure does ihe thing required to install the program correctly so simply click C clear this message Pi4700e Peer to Peer Printing Program Windows 3 Setting Up the Peer to Peer Printing Program On the Si rt menu point to Progr ims and then Ip p2p 2 On the s
344. ubmenu that appears click IP P2P Make the settings you want on the dialog box that appears IP PeerToPeer Setup Version2 73 EQ Max Hops for Search 2 a IP Port Printers 10000 m Printer Names 1 based on Serial Numbers based on IP Address based on DNS Name based on unit name O Max Hops for Search Input a value for the maximum number of hops for the search The initial default value is 2 See the precautions under Management Access Program Windows p 8 28 for more information about the maximum number of hops o IP Port Base Input the print server initial port number The initial value is 10000 TCP IP port 10001 but you can change this setting if you need to O Printer Names Select the printer port name display format based on Serial Numbers Select this option to use Network Card serial numbers to distin guish between printers The serial number is displayed as follows MLT serial number When a Network Card serial number is SN991354 for example the printer port name becomes MLT 991354 based on IP Address Default display format Select this option to use IP addresses to distinguish between printers When the IP address is 199 99 92 99 for example the printer port name becomes 199 99 92 99 Pi4700e 3 9 Chapter 3 Network Settings 3 Peer to Peer Printing Program Windows based on DNS Name Select this option to use DNS names to distinguish between pr
345. umber Destination Name Type in the name of the E mail Destination You can input up to 72 characters Destination Address Type in the E mail address of the destination You can input up to 72 characters Scanning Mode Secti on Compression Select the compression method to be used when scanned data is sent as an E mail attachment Apply Button Click this button to apply any settings you have input up to this point Clear Button Click this button to cancel any settings you have input up to this point Icon Click to return to the previous screen Pi4700e 9 13 Chapter 9 Scanner Mode o2 LE o 2 o lt Scanner Mode E mail Destinations Checking changing registration PageScope Light Start PageScope Light Click Scanner Click E mail Destination Enter your admin password then click Log in Click the number assigned to the destination to be checked or modi fied Deleting registration PageScope Light al Start PageScope Light Click Scanner Click E mail Destination Enter your admin password then click Log in Click the del button of the destination to be deleted New registration touch panel of the digital copier 1 2 Touch Job Image Scan Input Press the Utility Key Utility eMart eae Meter F ser s EC A count 4 Choice 4 Administr ator Mode y Toner Re plenisher
346. unction using the printer icon The detailed print settings remain valid even after the Easy Set Name has been cleared from the options list Pi4700e 7 33 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions 7 Confirming that the data has been transferred to the machine 7 15 Confirming that the data has been transferred to the machine Overview Status of data transferred from the personal computer will be displayed in Job List Procedure 1 Press the Job List key on the control panel Job List O 2 Job list will be displayed change rins am Device Orig epum Dm 9 999 999 10 05 10 50 Print Copier e 1 5110 09 10 55 Wait Copier e 9 o9f1o 12 11 00 vast Copier 8 999 52111 05 Scan Copier Memory Free 7 34 Pi4700e Confirming that the data has been transferred to the machine 7 S Note For printing a lock job refer to Procedure on the machine side Un locking a job p 7 23 in 7 12 Using the lock job print PC confiden tial function N x 9 b on v lt For unlocking the job refer to Procedure on the machine side Delet ing a job p 7 25 in 7 12 Using the lock job print PC confidential function Convenient Functions Pi4700e 7 35 Chapter 7 Convenient Functions Confirming that the data has been transferred to the machine 7 36 Pi4700e Outline 8 EE 8 Network Interface Card 8 1
347. unt settings A document contain ing more than 40 pages cannot be printed The maximum number of docu ment pages that can be stored in the standard memory is 40 Decrease the number of doc ument pages or add memory to expand its capacity Select Printer for Priority Device available in 6 6 of Us er s Choice on the machine A PS error print is output Some applications allow you to select either Binary or ASCII mode when the PS driver is be ing used A PS error could result if an attempt is made to print in the Binary mode Select the ASCII mode If the problem persists even after these checks have been made refer to the documentation provided for the machine Pi4700e Unable to Print 11 Unable to Make Correct Settings Unable to Print Exactly as Set Perform the troubleshooting procedures given below in the order when you cannot make proper settings in the printer driver or when the print re sults do not represent what has been set Symptom Possible Cause Action The options are dimmed on the com puter screen An illegal combination of func tions has been made Reselect functions for Linux Certain items can be set only by root user in Device Options Set ting The Conflicts dialog box is displayed on the computer screen An illegal combination of func tions has been made Check for combination and make a co
348. vices emulation See NetWare 4 x Configuration Using Bindery Emulation p 8 5 e Novell Directory Services configuration This section describes how to configure the Network Card with Net Ware 4 x directory services See Configuration Using Novell Directory Services p 8 8 NetWare 4 x Configuration Using Bindery Emulation Novel NetWare 4 x supports two operation modes NDS and bindery ser vices emulation This chapter explains how to configure NetWare 4 x us ing bindery emulation For information about NDS see Configuration Using Novell Directory Services p 8 8 These two services run simultaneously and transparently to each other The Network Card can be configured to operate in the bindery services mode only or under NDS Under NDS the Network Card will also service older file servers operating in bindery mode S Note The Network Card will not be able to find its file servers if it is not cor rectly configured for NDS operation and the bindery services mode is not running You can use MAP or a Web browser to check the config uration of the Network Card See Management Access Program Windows p 8 28 for more information Pi4700e Chapter 8 Network Interface Card 8 NetWare configuration Confirming the Bindery Context Before installing the Network Card under Novell NetWare 4 x in the bind ery emulation mode you should first confirm whether the server has a bindery context name assigned to
349. y Printer Configuration Tip With Redhat Linux Printer Configuration window can also be dis played by executing printtool command from Terminal window 1 Click menu button and open System Control Panel 2 When control panel is opened click the Printer Configuration button Printer system manager will open Red Hat Linux Print System Manager PrintTool Ipd Tests Help Printer Queues in etc printcap 3 First click the Add button of the printer manager Pi4700e Printer setting with X window System 5 4 When the personal computer has been directly connected to the ma chine select Local Printer Add a Printer Entry Printer type Local Printer Remote Unix Ipd Queue SMBAYindows 95 NT Printer NetWare Printer NCP Direct to port printer OK Cancel S Note If you install a printer driver to the computer which has been connected via network be sure to consult the network administrator To the network administrator When the setting of the driver is to be selected via network with Remote Printer Remote Unix 1pd Queue etc printer queue printer name IP address etc are necessary Input PORT for printer queue 5 The printer device will be detected Click the OK button If not detected check to see if the port is already in use Ruto detection found the following dev 1p0 Detected dev 1p1 Not detected dev 1p2 Not detected You may disregard this message i
350. ype Do you want to change printer description file etc printcap Type Y Write a printer name Type the name of the printer Example Iprprinter1 Is Iprprinter1 a remote printer or a local printer Type R Enter remote host name Type the Network Card host name recorded in the printcap file Example Iprprinter Confirm the information you have entered Type Y Confirm the preceding connection as your system default Type Y Pi4700e 12 37 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix UNIX Configuration Enter another printer name or quit setup Type Q 10 Do you want to start the remote daemon now Type Y 11 Use a line editor to open the etc p file and replace the rp en try with the appropriate remote duetos name The following Shows an example of how this is done when the remote port is named PORT1 printer1 lp This field is used for specification of the local printer device name This field must be left empty rm lprpriter V Network Card host name recorded in etc hosts Yp PORT1 N Any remote queue name you want Sd usr spool lpd printerl Name of spool directory on client System V Release 4 Solaris 2 x You can use lpd lpr if your system recognizes the LPSYSTEM command is available Settings can also be made using admintool if the system sup ports it LPSYSTEM Installation S Note The following procedure must be performed from the Bourne Shell 1
351. ype the following command to run the installation script nicinst The script automatically downloads the appropriate Network Card util ities for your system and displays questions to prompt you for the in formation it needs What is the node name of the Print Server Unit Type the host name recorded in etc hosts For example type print fast and then press Ere What is the printer name Type the printer name and press Eve Here the script displays the information you have input up to this point Node name of the Print Server Card printfast Printer name to be used printer name The printer is attached on PORT 1 Check these settings and make sure they are correct If they are cor rect type yes and press Ever Otherwise type no and press Ee Pi4700e 12 45 Chapter 12 Appendix Chapter 12 Appendix UNIX Configuration The script automatically starts the daemon for the newly configured printer At this time the script displays the path you should use if you ever need to restart the daemon Example usr nic lpr print dev nic printer name gt print fast 10001 amp The above example reflects the name supplied to the script earlier After the installation script is complete you must then configure the printer and make it known to the Ip system The HP UX Ip pill uses the Ipad min command used to configure a printer There is no ntcap file The following are the commands used for

MINOLTA PI4700E Use and Maintenance Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents